<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<TEI xmlns="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">
  <teiHeader>
    <fileDesc>
      <titleStmt>
        <title>A study of student loans and their relation to higher educational finance</title>
        <author>
          <persName>
            <forname>Leo Jeannot</forname>
            <surname>Chassee</surname>
          </persName>
        </author>
      </titleStmt>
      <publicationStmt />
      <sourceDesc>
        <bibl>
          <msIdentifier>
            <idno>1028402236</idno>
          </msIdentifier>
        </bibl>
      </sourceDesc>
    </fileDesc>
  </teiHeader>
  <text>
    <body>
      <div>
        <pb n="1" />
        A  Study  of  Student  Loans
AND  THEIR  RELATION  TO
Higher  Educational  Finance

Prepared  under  the  Supervision  of  the
STUDENT  LOAN  INFORMATION  BUREAU

Under  the  Authority  of  the
ASSOCIATION  OF  UNIVERSITY  AND  COLLEGE
BUSINESS  OFFICERS  OF  THE
EASTERN  STATES
        <pb n="2" />
        HARMON  FOUNDATION  MONOGRAPHS
NUMBER  ONE
A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and
Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

By
L.J.  CHASSEE
Lecturer  in  Banking,  School  of  Business
Columbia  (Jniversity

PREPARED  UNDER  THE  SUPERVISION  OF
G.  C.  WINTRINGER,  Chairman
Controller,  Princeton  (Jniversity

C.  S.  DANIELSON
Bursar,  Columbia  (Jniversity

L.  E.  KIMBALL
Comptroller,  New  York  (Jniversity

UNDER  THE  AUTHORITY  OF  THE
ASSOCIATION  OF  UNIVERSITY  AND  COLLEGE
BUSINESS  OFFICERS  OF  THE
EASTERN  STATES

«St
        <pb n="3" />
        TABLE  OF  CONTENTS
PAGE
Foreword  5
Letters  op  Transmittat,
Committee  on  Loans  •
Secretary  of  Student  Loan  Information  Bureau  9
Perspective
Student  Loans  and  “The  Business  of  Higher  Education”  11
Chapter  I
Financial  Development  op  Higher  Education
Early  Development  17
The  Spread  of  the  University  Idea  17
Motives  in  Higher  Education  17
Martin  Luther  and  the  New  Motives  18
Beginning  of  State  Support  18
England  and  its  Philanthropic-Religious  Institutions....  19
The  Early  Colonial  Period  in  America  19
Early  National  Period—(1776-1825)  20
The  Present  Period—(1865-1925)—and  the  New  Purpose  20
Financial  Support  and  Purposes  21
Chapter  II
Sources  op  Educational  Income
Three  Sources  22
Property  Values  of  Institutions  of  Higher  Education  23
Philanthropie  Sources  24
Gifts  to  Higher  Education  25
Recent  Gifts  25
Reliability  of  Philanthropie  Sources  in  the  Future  26
Philanthropie  Sources  in  1924-25  27
Public  Sources  27
Incidence  of  Public  Revenue  for  Higher  Education  27
Public  Sources  in  1924-25  29
Student  Fees  for  Tuition  and  Other  Educational  Services  29
The  Increasing  Cost  to  the  Student  30
Comparative  Fees  and  Tuitions  in  State  Institutions  31
Present  Schedule  of  Fees  and  Tuition  32
Comparative  Fees  and  Tuitions  in  Private  Institutions  37
Fees  and  Tuitions  in  Private  Institutions  in  1924-25  38
The  Cost  of  Education  to  the  Student  40
Cost  of  Building  44
Sources  of  Income  versus  Benefits  44
Chapter  III
Allocation  op  Higher  Educational  Costs
Two  Phases  45
Costs  and  Increased  Enrollmcnts  45
Points  of  View  46
Society  Should  Bear  the  Cost  46
Recipient  Should  Pay  Full  Cost  48
Dividing  Cost  Between  Recipient  and  Society  48
The  Problem  of  Cost  Allocation  49
Arriving  at  the  Ratio  50
The  Present  Situation  50
Basis  for  Cost  Allocation  52
Reasons  for  Such  Allocations  54
The  Individual  55
Knowledge  with  an  Economic  Purpose  56
The  Share  of  Philanthropy  56
The  Share  of  Society  56
The  Share  of  the  Student  57
The  Results  57
        <pb n="4" />
        Chapter  IV

The  Student  as  a  Financial  Risk  page
Education  as  a  Commercial  Venture  61
The  Cash  Value  61
Education  an  Investment  64
Analysis  of  Student  Credit  %  65
Credit  as  Applied  to  Education  66
Training  to  the  Student  66
Student  Security  67
Reasons  for  Lösses  68
Endorsements  69
Group  Guarantee  70
Purpose  to  be  Served  by  Group  Guarantee  70
Service  of  the  Group  Guarantee  71
The  Guarantee  Fund  74
Disposing  of  the  Guarantee  Fund  75

Chapter  V
Financing  the  Student
The  Student’s  Problem  77
Personal  Economics  or  Finance  77
The  Student’s  Budget  79
The  Announcement  and  the  Student’s  Budget  79
Making  the  Budget  82
Kinds  of  Student  Aid  82
Self-Help  '•  83
Management  of  Self-Help  84
Self-Help  and  Student  Finance  85
Self-Help  and  Loans  85
The  Postponement  of  Fees  86
Fellowships  and  Scholarships  86

Chapter  VI
The  Administration  op  Student  Loans
Methods  of  Administration
Amount  of  Funds  Available  1924-25
Past  Experience
Selecting  the  Risk
Size  of  Loan
Interest  Rate
Security  for  Student  Loans
Term  of  Loan
Methods  of  Repayment
Collections
Organization  to  Administer  Loans  .•••.•
Charitable,  Religious,  and  Fraternal  Organizations
Banks  and  Trust  Companies
Philanthropie  and  Semi-Philanthropic  Organizations
The  Educational  Institution
Digest
Recommendations
Appendix
A.  Experience  of  the  Harmon  Foundation  in  Student  Loans
B.  The  Loan  Association  of  the  German  Students
The  Institution  of  Honour  Loans—France

90
91
94
97
98
100
101
102
103
105
106
107
107
108
109
110
119

121
147
156
        <pb n="5" />
        CHARTS,  TABLES  AND  DIAGRAMS
PAGE
Table  1  —  Income  for  Higher  Education—1921-22  22
Table  2  —Value  of  Property  in  Universities,  Colleges  and  Professional
Schools  in  the  United  States—1921-22  23
Tabu:  3  —Average  Fixed  Charges  for  Resident  Students  in  State  Colleges
and  Universities,  United  States—1900-25  33
Table  3A—Average  Fixed  Charges  for  Non-resident  Students  in  State  Colleges ­
  and  Universities,  United  States—1900-25  33
Chart  1  —Average  Fixed  Charges  per  Resident,  State  Colleges  and  Universities—1900-25 ­
  34
Chart  1A—Average  Fixed  Charges  per  Non-resident,  State  Colleges  and
Universities—1900-25  35
TablE  4  —Comparative  Fee  Schedule  of  State  Institutions  36
TablE  5  —Average  Fixed  Charges  in  Privately  Endowed  Institutions,
United  States—1900-25  38
Chart  2  —Average  Fixed  Charges  in  Privately  Endowed  Institutions—
1900-25  39
Table  6  —Comparative  Fee  Schedule  of  Private  Institutions—1924-25....  40
Chart  3A-—Tuition  and  Fees  Compared  with  Cost  of  Living  41
TablE  7  —Indices  of  Cost  of  Education,  Cost  of  Building,  and  Cost  of
Living  Compared  42
Chart  3B—Tuition  and  Fees  Compared  with  Cost  of  Building  43
Diagram  I—The  Sources  of  Revenue  and  the  Assumed  Expenditures  for
Higher  Education—1924-25  51
Diagram  II  —Hypothetical  Allocation  of  the  Sources  of  Revenue  and  of
the  Expenditures  for  Higher  Education  53
Diagram  III—Effect  of  Education  on  Average  Incomes  at  Different  Ages
and  Total  Life  Earnings  53
Table  10  -  Comparative  Costs  of  Educational  Services  and  Other  Expenses
(1924-25),  Private  Institutions  80
Table  11  —Comparative  Costs  of  Educational  Services  and  Other  Expenses
(1924-25)  for  Non-resident  Students  in  State  Institutions  81
Table  12  —Comparative  Costs  of  Educational  Services  and  Other  Expenses
(1924-25)  for  Resident  Students  in  State  Institutions  81
        <pb n="6" />
        Foreword  to  Study  of  Student  Loans  and  Their  Relation  lo
Higher  Educational  Finance

r EAR  ago,  in  December,  1924,  I  agreed  to  finance  an  independent

investigation,  and  study  of  established  Student  aid  methods,  under

the  auspices  of  the  Association  of  University  and  College  Business ­
  Officers  of  the  Eastern  States.  I  did  so  because,  from  the  threeyear
  experience  of  the  Harmon  Foundation  in  this  field,  we  feit  that
existing  methods  of  handling  eight  or  ten  million  dollars  of  public  moneys
in  trust  funds  for  Student  aid  loans,  scholarships,  etc.,  each  year  by  the
Colleges  were  often  based  on  doubtful  premises,  conducted  with  a  poor
technique,  were  seriously  wasteful  and  in  a  very  large  number  of  cases
engendered  harmful  influences  on  the  character  of  the  recipients.
Mr.  Chassee  started  with  only  the  most  meager  outline  of  data
embracing  the  scope  of  the  work  to  guide  him,  and  obviously  without  any
attempt  to  influence  his  judgment.  His  mental  attitude  was  so  judicial
that  for  three  or  four  months  it  was  impossible  to  determine  the  trend
of  his  mind  in  the  many  Conferences  he  had  with  the  members  of  our
staff,  and  only  as  the  various  chapters  or  sections  of  the  final  report  were
submitted  did  we  realize  the  extraordinary  character  of  the  conclusions.
The  reception  of  “A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and  Their  Relation
to  Higher  Educational  Finance”  by  the  Association  of  University  and
College  Business  Officers  of  the  Eastern  States  at  its  annual  Conference
was  also  a  source  of  great  and  unexpected  satisfaction.  A  copy  of  the
report  was  sent  in  typewritten  form  to  each  member  in  advance  of  the
meeting  and  the  endorsement  of  Mr.  Chassee’s  position  was  cordial  if
not  even  enthusiastic.
The  objectives  of  the  Harmon  Foundation  have  been  two-fold—
Service  and  Education.  The  Service  could  be  handled  with  independence
and  in  accordance  with  our  convictions  because  we  were  using  our  own
money.  It  was  necessary,  however,  to  limit  our  educational  program  to  an
exhibit  of  the  results  of  our  experience  and  an  expression  of  our  opinion
when  asked  for  by  educators,  which  happily,  has  been  of  almost  constant
occurrence.
With  the  “Study  of  Student  Loans  and  Their  Relation  to  Higher
Educational  Finance”  available,  prepared  by  a  man  with  scholastic,  scientific, ­
  and  business  training—endorsed  as  a  whole  and  rejected  in  no
particular  part  by  the  Association  of  University  and  College  Business
Officers  of  the  Eastern  States—we  feel  that  culpable  or  careless  methods

[5]
        <pb n="7" />
        «■  IH'.IHMMJ»'

&amp;gt;^|Wüg

of  handling  funds  devoted  to  Student  aid  can  no  longer  be  excused  or
palliated.  Further,  that  large  budgeting  deficits  should  no  longer  be
justified  simply  because  it  is  easier  to  raise  money  through  an  appeal  to
alumni  or  a  generous  public  than  to  increase  charges  for  tuition.
There  are  ample  grounds  for  generous  gifts  to  Alma  Maters  outside
of  those  made  to  meet  current  expenses.  These  should  as  a  rule  with
obvious  exceptions  be  paid  for  by  the  recipient  at  cost,  either  in  cash  or
through  deferred  Obligation.
Unless  this  problem  is  adjusted  of  having  the  beneficiary  as  far  as
possible  pay  the  cost  of  his  education  (which  usually  directly  increases
his.  powers  and  earning  capacity),  the  time  will  come  when  that  generous
band  of  contributors,  made  up  in  a  larger  measure  of  keen  and  successful
business  men,  will  become  wise  and  legitimate  needs  will  suffer  from  the
careless  destruction  of  confidence.
I  might  say  that  this  foreword  is  the  expression  of  an  individual  and
personal  opinion  only,  written  without  consultation  or  endorsement,  but
it  is  the  result  of  a  very  profound  interest  in  and  concern  for  the  wellbeing
  of  institutions  for  higher  education  and  the  students  who  emerge
therefrom  to  take  up  the  responsibilities  of  life.

Sincerely  yours,
        <pb n="8" />
        TTo  the  Association  of
University  and  College  Business  Officers  of  the  Eastern  States

Gentlemen  :
At  the  last  meeting  of  this  Association,  Mr.  William  E.  Harmon  of
the  Harmon  Foundation,  very  generously  offered  to  contribute  the  sum
of  $5,OCX)  to  cover  the  expense  of  a  year’s  study  and  research  in  Connection ­
  with  Student  loans  and  their  administration.  This  offer  was  accepted
and  a  committee  of  three  appointed  to  confer  with  Mr.  Harmon  and
report  to  the  President  and  Executive  Committee  any  plan  or  conclusions
that  might  be  reached  as  to  the  best  method  of  Cooperation  with  Mr.
Harmon  along  the  lines  that  he  had  indicated.
We  were  most  fortunate  in  securing  as  our  investigator,  Mr.  L.  J.
Chassee,  a  Lecturer  in  Banking  in  the  School  of  Business  of  Columbia
University,—a  man  well  qualified  to  carry  on  the  details  of  this  research
and  one  who  has  in  addition  evinced  a  very  great  interest  in  the  work.
We  are  indebted  to  him  for  a  thorough  investigation  of  the  subject  as  is
evidenced  in  the  report  we  submit  herewith.
Your  Committee  held  its  first  meeting  with  Mr.  Harmon  in  January
at  which  time  plans  for  the  work  were  outlined,  including  the  decision
to  secure  the  Services  of  some  one  to  do  the  necessary  research  work.  We
reported  to  the  Executive  Committee  in  March  and,  receiving  approval
of  the  plan  under  which  we  proposed  to  operate,  the  work  was  immediately
  started  on  the  investigation.
While  your  Committee  was  not  charged  with  the  recommendation  of
any  specific  plan  that  should  be  generally  adopted,  the  Executive  Committee ­
  feit  the  report  should  include  such  recommendations  as  our  investigation ­
  indicated  should  be  presented  to  the  Association.  We  have
therefore  embodied  in  Chapter  VI  general  recommendations  which  we
hope  will  form  the  basis  for  a  discussion  of  this  subject  and  lead  to  the
adoption  by  our  membership  of  some  general  plan  of  Operation.

Respectfully  submitted,

Charles  S.  Danielson

November  6,  1925

\7)

LeRoy  E.  Kimball
        <pb n="9" />
        [9]

Columbia  University
New  York  City
October  15,  1925

Tf/ie  Association  of  Unioersity  and  College
Business  Officers  of  the  Eastem  States
The  Committee  on  Student  Loans

Genteemen  :
The  result  of  the  study  on  Student  loans  made  by  the  Student  Loan
Information  Bureau  is  being  transmitted  to  you  for  appropriate  action.
The  study  began  as  one  of  Student  loans  proper,  but  as  the  work  progressed,
  it  was  found  that  the  fundamental  wrong  with  Student  loans
was  not  so  much  the  loans  themselves  as  the  position  which  they  occupy
in  the  financial  policies  of  universities  and  Colleges.  It  was  found  necessary,
  therefore,  to  expand  considerably  the  scope  of  the  study  in  Order
to  treat  the  subject  of  Student  loans  adequately.
The  study  is  divided  into  eight  parts.  The  first,  a  Perspective  on
“Student  Loans  and  The  Business  of  Higher  Education”,  is  a  summary
of  the  seven  parts  which  follow.  It  should  be  valuable  to  those  who  lack
time  to  read  the  entire  work,  since  it  takes  up  the  salient  points  in  digested
form.  Chapters  II  and  III  will  be  of  interest  to  those  who  lean  toward
the  broader  aspects  of  higher  educational  finance.  Chapters  IV,  V  and
VI  will  be  of  interest  to  those  who  are  close  to  the  Student  and  are  responsible
  for  the  administration  of  some  of  the  university  and  College
funds.  Appendices  A  and  B  should  be  of  value  to  those  who  are  working
out  the  mechanism  for  the  administration  of  Student  loans.
In  the  preparation  of  this  study  we  have  received  the  most  generous
Cooperation  from  the  members  of  both  the  Eastern  and  Western  Associations
  of  University  and  College  Business  Officers.  We  must  feel  indebted
  to  them,  since  without  such  Cooperation  in  the  way  of  furnishing
the  desired  material  and  giving  valuable  suggestions  the  work  could  not
have  come  to  a  successful  end.  The  members  of  the  Harmon  Foundation ­
  Staff  have  also  given  untiring  cooperation  and  have  made  available
to  us  all  information  at  their  command.  Miss  Ethel  C.  O’Neill,  who  has
been  associated  with  me,  did  all  the  secretarial  work  connected  with  the
study,  prepared  all  the  graphs  and  charts,  made  the  digest  for  Appendix  B,
and  has  given  constructive  criticism  at  every  step  in  the  work.  The  suggestions ­
  made  by  Mr.  W.  E.  Harmon  and  Professor  Samuel  McCune
Lindsay  of  the  Faculty  of  Political  Science  at  Columbia  University  and
        <pb n="10" />
        1  il

Economic  Advisor  to  the  Harmon  Foundation,  have  been  most  valuable
and  constructive.  Acknowledgment  is  due  to  Dr.  H.  Parker  Willis,
Editor  of  the  New  York  Journal  of  Commerce  and  Professor  of  Banking
in  the  School  of  Business  at  Columbia  University,  for  his  advice  in  the
Organization  of  the  work  and  the  formulation  of  the  problem.  He  also
contributed  some  of  his  time  to  a  careful  reading  of  the  manuscript  and
making  valuable  suggestions.  Acknowledgment  is  also  due  to  Dr.  Robert
M.  Haig,  Professor  of  Business  Administration  at  Columbia  University,
for  his  careful  perusal  of  the  manuscript  and  constructive  criticism.
Director  James  C.  Egbert  of  the  School  of  Business,  Columbia  University, ­
  made  available  the  necessary  office  space  for  the  Bureau  and  both  he
and  Dr.  R.  C.  McCrea,  Hepburn  Professor  of  Economics  in  the  School
of  Business,  Columbia  University,  have  given  friendly  support  to  our
efforts.
It  is  realized  that  there  exist  many  errors  in  the  report  as  presented;
in  the  style,  the  method  of  presentation,  and  the  construction.  These
will  have  to  be  eliminated  before  the  report  is  ready  for  publication  if
the  association  recommends  such  a  Step.  It  would  be  well,  it  seems  to
me,  that  sufficient  time  be  given  at  the  convention  to  discuss  thoroughly
each  part  of  the  report.  In  this  way  it  would  be  possible  to  benefit  by
the  experience  of  all  the  members.  The  criticisms  and  suggestions  made
could  be  incorporated  in  the  final  publication  and  thus  make  the  document
  more  valuable  and  practical.
My  association  with  the  members  of  the  Committee  has  been  very
pleasant  and  fruitful.  I  wish  to  take  this  opportunity  to  express  my
appreciation  to  them  for  the  amount  of  freedom  that  they  have  allowed
me  in  developing  the  work.  However,  I  am  willing  to  assume  complete
responsibility  for  all  the  Statements  made  in  the  study.
        <pb n="11" />
        STUDENT  LOANS  AND
“THE  BUSINESS  OF  HIGHER  EDUCATION” 1

A  Perspective
It  is  impossible  to  take  the  correct  view  of  Student  loans  unless  the
Position  which  they  should  occupy  in  the  business  of  higher  education  is
first  considered.  The  institution  of  higher  learning  is  made  up  of  seven
elements:  1.  Buildings  and  Grounds,  2.  Physical  Equipment,  3.  Available
Funds,  4.  The  Business  Administrative  Staff  (which  go  to  make  up  the
business  division  of  higher  education),  5.  The  Faculty,  6.  The  Academic
Administrative  Staff  (which  make  up  the  academic  division  of  higher
education),  and  the  Student  who  then  enters  in  as  the  seventh  element  and
who  must  have  a  relationship  with  each  of  the  two  divisions  of  the  university.
  These  relationships  should  be  separate  and  distinct;  that  is,  the
student’s  business  relationship  to  the  university  should  be  with  the  business
officers  and  under  their  control;  his  academic  relationship  to  the  university
should  be  and  is  under  the  control  of  the  faculty.
In  discussing  loans  we  are  concerned  only  with  the  student’s  relationship ­
  to  the  business  side  of  higher  education  and  enter  into  the  academic
side  only  to  the  point  where  his  academic  life  will  influence  the  business
officers  in  the  granting  of  loans.  The  business  officer  should  be  informed
as  to  whether  the  Student  is  a  member  in  good  Standing  of  the  academic
community  and  as  to  whether  a  loan  is  desirable  for  him  from  an
academic  standpoint.  The  business  officer  then  has  this  information  at
his  command  when  he  is  deliberating  over  making  a  loan  and  this  information ­
  should  act  as  a  guide  to  him  in  the  application  of  business  principles
  to  loans  made  to  students.
The  business  of  higher  education  must  be  clearly  set  forth  at  this
point  if  it  is  to  be  shown  how  Student  loans  can  be  advantageously  handled
on  business  principles.  In  higher  education  as  in  industry  and  commerce, ­
  the  plants  have  become  so  numerous,  have  reached  such  magnitudes,
  and  the  purpose  for  which  higher  education  exists  has  so  changed
that  the  academic  life  cannot  be  efficiently  conducted  unless  the  factors
or  elements  of  higher  education  are  properly  proportioned  and  the  management ­
  of  the  physical  plant  and  the  finance  is  left  to  men  trained  in
business.  This  management  of  the  physical  plant  will  mean  furnishing
it,  equipping  it,  operating  it,  and  financing  the  whole  enterprise  of  higher
education  in  such  a  way  that  the  faculty  will  be  able  to  do  the  best  work.
The  faculty  having  decided  what  the  requirements  are  for  the  proper
1  The  phrase  “The  Business  of  Higher  Education”  was  suggested  by  the  title  of  a  course
given  in  the  School  of  Business,  Columbia  University,  by  Dr.  H.  Parker  Willis,  entitled  “The
Business  of  Journalism.”

Hi]
        <pb n="12" />
        12

A  Study  of  Student  Loa  ns  and

advancement  and  dissemination  of  knowledge,  it  then  falls  upon  the  business
  officers  to  provide  for  these  physical  and  financial  needs.  The  furnishing
  and  operating  of  the  physical  plant  and  the  financing  of  the  whole  enterprise
  of  higher  education  may  properly  be  termed  “the  business  of  higher
education”  and  should  be  under  the  guidance  of  business  officers  with
responsibility  to  the  President  only.  This  may  be  considered  theoretical,
but  it  is  theory  that  is  being  put  into  successful  practiceby  some  institutions.
Student  loans  cannot  be  advantageously  handled  until  some  definite
policy  such  as  the  one  discussed  above  is  established  with  regard  to  the
scope  of  authority  between  the  business  officers  and  the  academic  officers
of  the  institution.  The  fundamental  wrong  with  Student  loans  may  be
traced  to  the  Organization  of  the  university  itself  and  the  consequent  lack
of  definiteness  which  the  institution  has  in  its  business  relations  with  the
Student.  It  is  at  this  point  that  higher  educational  institutions  have  been
losing  a  great  opportunity  to  train  the  Student  in  the  practical  affairs  of  life.
This  training  need  not  be  confined  to  those  who  borrow,  for  all  students
can  be  required  to  budget  before  entering  College.  Those  who  borrow
will  simply  receive  additional  training  in  the  financing  of  themselves  on
a  credit  basis.  This  can  be  done  by  making  loans  in  monthly  allowances
rather  than  in  one  large  amount.  Payments  of  the  loan  will  be  made  in
the  same  way  which  means  that  the  transaction  will  cover  a  period  of  eight
to  ten  years.  Promptness  and  precision  in  dealing  with  the  Student  in  this
matter  cannot  fail  to  be  a  valuable  lesson  to  him  in  the  fundamental  principles
  that  make  for  success.  A  large  proportion  of  the  students  borrow
and  will  therefore  profit  by  such  training.  Similar  training  can  be  extended
to  those  who  do  not  borrow.  This  group  will  also  be  required  to  budget
themselves  before  entering  College.  Some  will  have  to  budget  to  see  what
loans  they  will  require,  others  will  have  to  budget  so  as  not  to  be  forced
to  resort  to  loans,  and  the  rest  will  have  to  budget  so  as  to  use  most  efficiently
  the  resources  which  they  have  at  their  command.  Thus  all  students
will  be  receiving  a  training  in  proper  personal  business  management. 2  To
accomplish  this  end,  however,  it  is  necessary  that  a  definite  line  be  established ­
  between  the  business  side  of  the  institution  and  the  academic  side,
and  the  proper  cooperation  be  brought  about  between  these  dual  organizations.
  Institutions  will  then  become  more  efficient,  and  the  Student
will  come  out  of  the  institution  a  better  product. 3  There  is  no  reason  to
suppose  that  his  academic  training  would  be  inferior  under  such  a  System
and,  on  the  other  hand,  he  would  receive  a  training  in  practical  affairs  that
would  better  fit  him  to  deal  with  the  business  world.  Every  individual
must  realize  sooner  or  later  in  life  that  the  world  in  which  he  lives  demands

2  See  Appendix  A.
3  A  more  elaborate  discussion  of  this  will  be  found  in  the  text,  pp.  82-89.
        <pb n="13" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educationae  Finance

13

that  he  know  how  to  cope  with  the  practical  affairs  of  his  environment.
The  university  and  College  could  do  no  greater  service  than  to  train  the
Student  in  these  matters.  The  student’s  contact  with  the  business  side  of
higher  education  is  an  opportune  place  to  do  this.  The  business  side  of
higher  education,  however,  must  be  business-like  and  this  can  be  done
only  by  making  it  independent  of  the  academic  side.  The  Situation  then
becomes  comparable  to  conditions  which  the  Student  will  encounter  in
the  outside  world.
When  the  above  conditions  have  been  complied  with,  the  Student  loan
problem  then  becomes  more  simple  and  easier  to  handle.  However,  this
training  in  the  business  affairs  of  the  student’s  life  can  be  initiated  at  an
earlier  period  than  in  College.  The  way  in  which  the  College  or  university
may  bring  this  about  is  to  require  that  each  Student  has  demonstrated  a
knowledge  and  ability  to  handle  his  personal  business  affairs  properly
before  entering  College.  This  will  awaken  the  public,  his  parents,  and
educators  in  secondary  schools  to  the  realization  of  the  importance  of
knowing  proper  personal  business  management.  When  Colleges  and  universities
  begin  to  consider  a  knowledge  of  personal  economics  or  personal
finance  essential  to  a  successful  career,  institutions  which  prepare  students
for  College  will  evolve  the  necessary  machinery  to  bring  this  about.  In
general  it  will  consist  of  guidance,  and  perhaps  courses  in  grade  and  high
schools  in  the  managing  of  one’s  personal  economic  resources  and  finance.
It  can  be  done  in  Cooperation  with  savings  banks.  The  grade  and  high
school  Student  will  be  encouraged  to  save  and  what  is  more  important,  he
will  be  taught  how  to  better  manage  the  resources  which  he  has  at  his
command.  The  development  of  the  idea  of  greater  efficiency  in  handling
checking  accounts,  balancing  these  with  the  bank,  accurate  bookkeeping
methods  in  personal  affairs,  the  proper  budgeting  of  one’s  resources  over
a  period  of  two  or  three  years  may  be  made  a  requisite  to  College  entrance
or  be  given  some  form  of  credit  toward  the  College  work.  The  actual
book  in  which  the  Student  makes  and  keeps  his  calculations,  how  closely
the  outcome  measures  up  to  his  calculations,  and  corrections  made  for
future  personal  finance  could  be  made  the  basis  for  both  financial  and
academic  credit.  This  teaching  will  have  to  be  of  a  practical  nature.  A
new  literature  will  have  to  be  created  on  the  subject  of  personal  finance.
The  Student  will  be  taught  how  to  fit  himself  best  to  his  economic  and
social  environment.  It  can  be  successfully  done  by  appealing  to  the  selfish
motive  and  thus  turning  the  selfish  motive  to  a  fruitful  end.  Young
people  must  be  taught  how  to  manage  their  personal  economic  affairs  so
that  they  will  be  better  able  to  utilize  their  opportunities,  both  for  themselves
  and  for  others  with  whom  they  come  in  contact.  If  the  universities
would  exert  such  pressure  from  the  top,  they  would  be  spreading  a  whole-
        <pb n="14" />
        14

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and
some  influence  which  would  permeate  all  of  American  life,  for  such  training
  and  guidance  would  soon  be  extended  to  all  people  whether  they
attended  College  or  not. 4  *  With  such  a  background  the  Student  would  enter
College  better  equipped  than  he  does  now.  His  relationship  with  the  business
  Organization  of  higher  education  would  further  his  training  in  the
management  of  his  personal  affairs  and  would  lead  him  to  see  what  he
must  encounter  in  the  outside  world  after  he  leaves  College.  Such  a  procedure
  need  not  interfere  with  the  academic  program,  but  in  fact  should
assist  it,  since  the  Student  so  trained  in  the  management  of  his  financial
affairs  will  take  such  as  a  matter  of  course  and  can  then  give  better  attention ­
  to  his  academic  life.
What  then  becomes  of  the  loans?  The  institution  would  find  that  it
could  deal  with  the  Student  on  a  business  basis,  for  he  will  expect  it  and
will  resent  in  fact  being  dealt  with  in  any  other  manner.  This  business
basis  means  the  application  of  the  highest  business  principles  in  the  business
dealings  which  the  institution  has  with  the  Student.  The  application  of
business  principles  to  Student  loans,  however,  does  not  mean  that  the
peculiar  characteristics  of  lending  to  students  will  not  be  taken  into  consideration.
  Adjustments  will  have  to  be  made,  but  this  will  not  prevent
entering  into  a  definite  agreement  with  the  Student  and  making  him
realize  the  responsibility  which  he  undertakes.  He  is  borrowing  money
for  an  economic  venture  and  should,  therefore,  pay  the  commercial  rate  of
interest.  The  term  of  the  loan  (except  when  it  is  an  emergency  loan),
should  correspond  with  the  period  of  turnover  in  College,  which  is  approximately
  five  years.  The  amount  of  the  loan  should  be  enough  to  be  of
substantial  assistance  to  the  Student.  Once  a  loan  has  been  made  to  a
Student  the  institution  should  come  to  his  assistance  with  further  loans
in  Order  to  “see  him  through”  unless  it  is  found  that  he  is  no  longer  a  good
risk.  It  is  unwise  to  require  any  security  except  a  note  of  honor.  The
Student  who  needs  the  money  most  has  no  security  to  off  er.  If  he  has
security  or  can  get  an  endorser,  there  is  no  reason  why  he  should  borrow
from  the  institution.  If,  nevertheless,  some  form  of  collateral  or  security
is  deemed  wise,  the  group  guarantee  is  then  the  best  way  in  which  to  secure
the  funds.  In  this  way  the  students  accept  collective  as  well  as  individual
responsibility.  However,  those  who  constitute  the  group  should  have  a
voice  in  the  selection  of  the  risk.
It  is  urgent  that  student  loans  be  put  on  a  business  basis.  Students
who  have  borrowed  where  loans  were  administered  in  a  business-like  manner ­
  express  preference  to  borrow  under  such  administration.  They  appre-4
  The  possibility  of  such  a  result  was  expressed  in  conversation  with  Mr.  C.  S.  Danielson  of
Columbia  University  and  Mr.  O.  C.  Tester,  Assistant  Vice-President  of  the  Bowery  Savings  Bank,
New  York  City.
        <pb n="15" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

15

ciate  being  dealt  with  in  a  firm  manner,  if  the  firmness  is  of  a  high  type.
They  would  rather  be  looked  upon  as  young  men  who  have  a  business
to  transact  than  mere  boys  who  need  assistance.
Many  objections  will  be  raised  against  the  introduction  of  business
principles  into  Philanthropie  works.  To  refute  these  objections  it  is  possible
to  show  that  most  of  the  great  philanthropists  were  first  great  business
men.  It  is  difficult  to  decide  in  which  role  they  have  accomplished  the
greatest  social  good.  Constructive  philanthropy  of  the  highest  type
approaches  efficient  business  ideals.  They  approach,  at  times,  each  other
so  closely  that  they  are  often  indistinguishable. 5
The  value  to  society  of  good  business  is  so  great  and  philanthropy  so
surrounded  by  risks  that  one  should  hesitate  to  advise  the  successful  shoemaker
  who  is  constantly  striving  to  produce  a  better  pair  of  shoes  to  trade
places  with  the  man  who  is  endeavoring  to  give  away  large  sums  of  money
intelligently.  The  change  might  involve  too  many  possible  changes  of  disappointment,
  if  not  actual  failure. 6
Student  loans  cannot  be  divorced  from  the  business  of  higher  education.
  Higher  education  will  have  to  assume  a  new  form  of  administration
and  such  administration  will  have  to  approach  the  best  forms  of  business
ideals.  Our  universities  and  Colleges  are  now  taking  only  emergency
measures  and  accomplishment  is  lagging  far  behind  opportunity.  They
will  have  to  adopt  in  an  intelligent  and  earnest  fashion  more  business-like
methods  of  Organization  in  Order  to  adjust  themselves  to  the  rapidly  changing
  conditions  of  American  life.  Institutions  of  higher  learning  can  meet
these  demands  by  radical  reorganization. 7  The  faculty  must  be  faculty
and  the  business  officers  must  be  allowed  to  be  business  officers.  The
President  must  be  a  unique  individual.
America  has  a  different  problem  to  meet  in  higher  education  than
Europe.  Ours  is  a  young  and  rapidly  changing  society;  Europe  is  an  old
and  more  or  less  static  one.  Since  our  universities  and  Colleges  are  failing
to  keep  in  advance  of  changing  conditions,  they  must  either  take.  bold
and  rapid  steps  forward,  perish,  or  remain  a  remnant  of  the  past—a  haven
for  slumbering  scholars.
New  financial  policies  will  become  necessary.  The  individual,  at  the
time  he  receives  his  education,  will  be  called  upon  to  pay  a  larger  Proportion ­
  of  the  cost.  If  a  sufficient  amount  of  additional  funds  is  to  be  secured
to  carry  on  the  changed  Organization,  the  objectives  of  the  university  and
College  will  have  to  be  shown  to  be  useful,  commercially  sound,  returning
a  reasonable  rate  of  interest  or  some  combination  of  these  objectives.  These
values  are  not  necessarily  commercial  values  only,  for  usefulness  may  be
6  W.  E.  Harmon,  “Business  versus  Philanthropy”,  Harmon  Foundation  Bulletin,  Sept.,  1925
p.  4.
8  Ibid.,  p.  5.
7  Similar  Statements  have  been  attributed  to  Dr.  R.  Pound  and  Dr.  A.  Flexner  in  an
Editorial  in  the  New  York  World,  Oct.  4,  1925.
        <pb n="16" />
        16

A  Study  of  Student  Loans

other  than  commercial  usefulness.  The  outworn  appeals  of  “loyalty  to
one’s  Alma  Mater,”  “for  the  good  of  society,”  and  “the  uplift  of  mankind”
  are  empty  phrases  which  are  out  of  harmony  with  modern  changes  in
human  Organization.  Our  education  must  be  put  on  a  more  individualistic
basis  and  the  individual  must  pay  a  larger  share  of  the  cost,  depending
upon  the  kind  of  value  which  can  be  assigned  to  the  training  he  receives.
If  the  individual  is  to  pay  for  a  larger  proportion  of  his  education,
he  will  have  to  be  guided  how  to  meet  these  new  demands  both  through  a
wiser  use  of  the  resources  at  his  command  and  through  making  available
to  him  additional  resources  in  the  form  of  loans.  In  Order  to  secure  funds
so  to  assist  him,  it  will  be  necessary  that  they  be  administered  under  business
  principles.
If  a  higher  price  is  to  be  placed  upon  higher  education,  it  will  be
necessary  to  study  higher  educational  finance  not  only  as  it  has  been
studied  from  the  standpoint  of  costs,  but  from  the  standpoint  of  benefits
derived  by  those  who  come  in  contact  with  it  and  the  benefits  given  to
society  as  a  whole.  Thousands  of  dollars  have  been  spent  to  study  the
cost  of  higher  education,  but  there  has  been  great  reluctance  and  no  attempt
to  estimate  the  values  which  higher  education  produces  and  what  price
should  be  placed  on  such  values.  Perhaps  higher  education  has  no  value
to  either  the  individual  or  society;  its  efforts  may  be  producing  negative
results  for  all  we  know.  It  is  necessary  that  we  show  what  results  higher
education  is  producing  over  a  long  period  of  time,  that  we  assign  values
to  these,  and  that  we  Charge  proportionately.  If  this  is  not  possible,  we
must  declare  higher  education  bankrupt.  To  say  that  it  is  not  bankrupt,  the
results  which  higher  education  brings  about  must  be  shown  to  possess  values
sufficiently  above  cost  to  make  it  worthwhile  for  universities  and  Colleges  to
continue  and  it  must  be  shown  also  that  it  is  a  paying  proposition  for  certain
  individuals  to  purchase  the  Services  of  these  institutions  on  credit.
A  higher  price  for  higher  education  may  be  justified  by  the  fact  that
in  so  far  as  it  is  deemed  theoretically  right  for  “the  consumer  to  pay  the
freight”,  it  is  right  for  the  educated  to  pay  for  his  education.  The
adoption  of  a  sound  Student  loan  plan  would  permit  Colleges  to  increase
fees  to  meet  costs,  except  where  state  institutions  are  strongly  competitive,
and  in  time  they  will  have  to  follow  the  trend  in  fairness  to  their  tax  paying
constituency.  When  the  consumer  is  not  able  to  “pay  the  freight”  in  cash,
the  costs  are  not  written  off  against  him,  but  an  agreement  is  entered  into
for  payment  when  the  goods  have  enabled  him  to  secure  the  necessary
funds.  So  too,  in  education  the  Services  should  not  be  given  away  simply
because  the  consumer  is  unable  to  pay  at  the  time,  but  they  should  be
extended  to  him  on  a  definite  credit  basis  which  should  consist  of  well
administered  Student  loans.
        <pb n="17" />
        CHAPTER  I

FINANCIAL  DEVELOPMENT  OF  HIGHER  EDUCATION
Early  Development
The  financial  support  of  higher  education  in  general  during  the
early  years  of  development  cannot  be  identified  separately  from  that  of
the  church  and  religious  Orders.  Scholars  would  get  together  at  a  designated
  meeting  place,  even  on  the  Street  at  times,  to  discuss  topics  of
scholastic  importance.  In  the  early  part  of  the  Middle  Ages,  the  monasteries
  became  meeting  places.  Eventually  the  discussions  were  grouped
under  four  heads:  philosophy,  medicine,  theology,  and  law,  and  it  was
with  this  division  of  learning  and  the  establishment  of  academies  as
meeting  places  for  scholars  that  our  present  day  higher  education  had  its
origin.  The  more  formal  beginning,  however,  was  with  the  establishment
of  the  University  of  Bologna  in  1158,  which  later  became  famous  for  its
courses  in  law.  Universities  had  existed  before  this  date,  but  Bologna
was  the  first  to  which  a  university  charter  was  granted.  To  Frederick
Barbarossa  is  due  the  distinction  of  being  the  first  person  to  establish  a
university  in  a  formal  way.  He  not  only  granted  a  charter  to  the  University ­
  of  Bologna  but  bestowed  his  protection  upon  it  and  conceded
Privileges  to  it  as  well. 1
The  Spread  of  the  University  Idea
During  the  next  five  hundred  years  similar  institutions  spread
throughout  Europe  and  the  British  Isles,  and  it  is  from  this  beginning
that  the  present  university  and  College  Institution  has  developed.  They
were  at  first  known  as  academies  and  in  Germany  a  type  known  as  “manual
labor  institutes”  developed  for  the  training  of  teachers.  The  idea  of  the
“manual  labor  institute”  spread  to  the  United  States  as  late  as  1825-1840
and  was  the  nucleus  of  some  of  the  institutions  of  higher  learning  which
are  still  in  existence  in  this  country.  Oberlin  College  at  Oberlin,  Ohio,
started  in  this  way. 1  2
Motives  in  Higher  Education
At  first  education  combined  spiritual  and  secular  training  with  the
emphasis  on  the  former.  Hence  religious  Orders  were  closely  involved
and  practically  the  entire  financial  support  came  from  the  church.  Eittle
1  F.  P.  Graves—“Evolution  0 f  Our  Universities”,  School  and  Society,  Vol.  8,  pp.  691-702.
2  Paul  Monroe—History  of  Education,  p.  723.
[17]
        <pb n="18" />
        18

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

by  little,  however,  the  secular  interests  came  to  the  forefront.  Until  the
middle  of  the  sixteenth  Century,  the  time  of  Martin  Luther,  it  was  the
religious  motive  which  controlled  the  Situation  and  so  no  distinction  can
really  be  made  between  the  financial  support  of  education  and  that  of
religion.  This  religious  motive  remained  the  dominant  one  until  the
latter  part  of  the  eighteenth  Century  and  so  religious  denominations  were
the  chief  source  of  support. 3  New  motives  were  gradually  introduced.
Higher  education  began  to  be  looked  upon  as  having  a  cultural  value,  an
influence  on  citizenship,  and  finally  an  economic  value.  These  new  motives
furnished  an  argument  for  new  sources  of  support  and  so  wealthy  individuals
  left  endowments  for  certain  schools  of  learning;  the  States  assumed
educational  responsibilities;  and  finally  the  Student  was  asked  to  pay  his
share  of  higher  education.  The  religious  motive  as  the  sole  motive  for
higher  education,  was  first  challenged  by  Martin  Luther.
Martin  Luther  and  the  New  Motives
Martin  Luther  pointed  out  that:
even  though  there  were  neither  soul,  heaven,  nor  hell,  it  would
still  be  necessary  to  have  schools  for  the  sake  of  affairs  here  below,  as  the
history  of  the  Greeks  and  Romans  plainly  teaches.  The  world  has  need  of
educated  men  and  women  to  the  end  that  the  men  may  govern  the  country
properly,  and  that  the  women  may  properly  bring  up  their  children  and  direct
the  affairs  of  their  households. 4
Luther  further  pointed  out  and  insisted  in  his  teachings  that:
schooling  was  to  be  brought  to  all  the  people,  noble  and  common,
rieh  and  poor;  it  was  to  include  both  boys  and  girls,  and  finally  the  state  was
to  use  compulsion  if  necessary. 5
Martin  Luther’s  doctrines  formed  the  opening  wedge  for  a  program
of  state  support  for  education  in  general  and  gradually  for  higher
education.
Beginning  of  State  Support
Luther,  therefore,  was  in  a  large  measure  responsible  for  the  propagation
  of  the  idea  of  a  state  system  of  secondary  schools  together  with
institutions  of  higher  learning  which  developed  in  Germany.  This  was
the  first  state  support  given  to  higher  learning  and  it  was  brought  about
by  a  changed  purpose  in  higher  education.  The  next  state  to  take
interest  in  the  support  of  higher  education  was  France.  In  this  country
higher  education  was  the  first  division  of  learning  to  be  favored  by  state
support,  for  in  1806  the  University  of  France  was  established  which
included  in  itself,  practically  as  a  department  of  the  National  Govern*Ibid„ ­

  p.  729.
4  Monroe—Op.  Cit.,  p.  410.
5  Ibid.,  p.  412.
        <pb n="19" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

19

ment,  all  secondary  and  higher  education.  It  is  conspicuous  that  financial
support  was  given  to  the  state  university  and  secondary  education  twentyseven
  years  before  it  was  extended  to  elementary  education  in  France. 6
Here,  as  in  Germany,  it  was  the  development  of  the  feeling  that  it  was  to
the  ad  van  tage  of  the  state  to  educate  its  citizens  that  brought  about  state
support.  It  was  part  of  the  scheme  of  Nationalism.
England  and  Its  Philanthropic-Religious  Institutions
A  different  development  is  to  be  found  in  England.  The  close  Connection ­
  between  church  and  state  which  is  still  to  be  found,  implies  that
support  for  a  large  part  of  higher  education  is  not  yet  entirely  divorced
from  that  of  religion.  It  was  this  close  Connection  which  is  found
between  state,  church,  and  higher  education  that  prompted  a  more  liberal
group  to  found  the  London  School  of  Economics.  By  far  the  largest  Proportion ­
  of  financial  support  for  higher  education  in  England,  therefore,
first  came  from  philanthropic-religious  organizations.  Even  those  institutions
  not  connected  with  the  church  of  England  were  at  first  religious
in  character.  Later,  religious  and  Philanthropie  support  was  supplemented
by  forms  of  land  grants  to  those  institutions  already  in  existence. 7  This
was  the  beginning  of  direct  state  support  for  higher  education  in  England.
Additional  state  help  was  given  later  but  even  at  the  present  time  no
state  institution  for  higher  learning  has  been  established  as  such.
The  Early  Colonial  Period  in  America
In  America  as  in  European  countries,  the  institutions  of  higher  learning ­
  were  philanthropic-religious.  This  was  inevitable,  due  to  European
influence  during  the  early  development.  The  Philanthropie  sources,  however,
  differed;  mostly  religious  at  first  in  a  population  where  no  great
fortunes  had  as  yet  been  amassed,  the  contributions  were  numerous  and
varied.  There  were  a  large  number  of  small  gifts  and  no  small  amount
came  from  England,  due  for  the  most  part,  to  the  influence  of  religious
organizations.  This  applies  to  the  entire  history  of  American  College
building  and  it  was  not  until  recently  that  large  sums  were  given  by  one
donor.  Many  of  the  gifts  were  for  specific  purposes  such  as  libraries,
professorships,  scholarships,  and  buildings,  but  a  relatively  large  per  cent.
of  these  were  made  to  the  Colleges  unconditionally. 8
During  these  years  America  contributed  little  to  theoretical  discussions
of  higher  education  and  its  financial  support.  As  time  went  on,  the  idea
6  Monroe—Op.  Cit.,  p.  732.
Ubid.,  p.  733.
8  J.  B.  Sears—“Philanthropy  in  American  Higher  Education”,  U.  S.  Bureau  of  Education
Bulletin  No.  26,  1922,  p.  105.
        <pb n="20" />
        20

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

of  free  public  education  began  to  take  root  and  gradually  the  leaders  of
America  came  face  to  face  with  the  question  of  school  support.  The  first
moves  toward  state  support  of  higher  education  came  in  the  form  of  land
grants  and  later  taxation.  This  was  in  fact  a  duplicate  of  what  took
place  in  England,  presumably  due  to  English  influences.  These  sources,
however,  were  only  a  Supplement  to  religious  and  private  support  and
were  at  all  times  surpassed  by  the  latter.  This  predominance  of  private
support  has  persisted  even  to  the  present  day  (as  the  figures  in  the  following
  chapter  show),  if  we  view  higher  education  in  the  United  States
as  a  whole.
Early  National  Period—(1776-1825)
The  close  of  the  Colonial  period  and  opening  of  the  early  National
period  in  the  United  States,  marks  the  beginning  of  the  states  taking  a  hand
in  the  initiating  and  in  the  support  of  higher  education.  The  break  with
England  naturally  cut  off  the  sources  of  support  from  the  mother  country
and  caused  the  leaders  in  the  United  States  to  take  the  matter  in  their  own
hands.  This  was  only  in  so  far  as  financial  support  was  concerned,  for
there  was  no  special  break  in  the  main  forces  that  had  been  building  up
Colleges  in  the  Colonies.  The  difference  came  in  an  expansion  in  the  number
  of  Colleges  and  in  the  educational  aim  and  type  of  studies.
The  turmoil  of  the  revolution  and  financial  reconstruction  of  the  new
nation  caused  state  support  of  higher  education  to  slump  and  during  the
latter  part  of  the  eighteenth  and  early  part  of  the  nineteenth  Century  the
question  of  the  state’s  function  in  higher  education  was  much  discussed.
The  doctrine  that  it  was  the  duty  of  the  state  to  advance  knowledge  through
higher  education  and  thus  make  better  citizens  spread  and  led  to  the
establishment  of  several  state  universities  and  Colleges  supported  by  the
appropriation  of  state  funds.
The  Present  Period—(1865-1925)—And  the  New  Purpose
After  1865  the  United  States  entered  upon  a  period  of  vast  expansion
both  in  state  and  private  institutions  of  higher  learning.  Large  fortunes
had  been  accumulated  by  this  time  and  many  donated  a  large  proportion
of  their  wealth  in  the  form  of  unconditional  gifts  or  gifts  for  specific
purposes  to  institutions  of  higher  learning  already  in  existence.  New
institutions,  such  as  Johns  Hopkins  and  Leland-Stanford  Universities,
were  founded  upon  a  single  gift.
A  new  development  appeared  in  higher  education  during  this  period.
The  Student  demanded  an  education  not  only  to  increase  his  intellectual
powers  and  thereby  gain  social  or  political  preferment,  but  also  asked  for
        <pb n="21" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

21

a  training  which  would  bear  directly  on  his  economic  progress.  The  economic ­
  advantage  of  such  an  education  began  to  be  stressed  and  along  with
this  idea  developed  the  Professional  schools.  The  outcome  was  that  many
of  the  universities  established  Professional  schools  beyond  those  of  medicine
and  law,  and  there  developed  schools  of  journalism  and  schools  of  business
and  the  old  divisions  of  law,  and  medicine,  were  looked  upon  as  having  an
economic  value  to  the  individual  as  well  as  to  the  state.
With  the  various  purposes  for  training  coming  into  existence  and  with
the  realization  of  the  economic  advantage  to  be  derived  from  a  College  education, ­
  increased  funds  were  made  available  to  institutions  both  by
States  and  'by  individuals.  The  establishing  of  professorships  and  the
giving  of  funds  for  the  construction  of  buildings,  as  monuments  to  individuals, ­
  and  fields  of  economic  endeavor  became  prevalent.  Higher  education ­
  now  became  one  of  the  greatest  recipients  of  charity,  with  the  result
that  today  it  has  a  vast  permanent  endowment  and  philanthropy  still  bears
the  major  portion  of  the  cost  of  advanced  training. 9
Financial  Support  and  Purposes
Throughout  the  entire  development  of  higher  education  we  find  that
the  purpose  for  which  it  existed  and  its  sources  of  financial  support  were
closely  related.  A  view  of  the  present  Situation  reveals  the  same  fact.
It  may  be  concluded  that  the  reasons  for  the  existence  and  liberal  support
of  these  institutions  are  three  in  number.
1.  Cultural—which  includes  the  religious  or  spiritual  purpose  and  also  embraces
  the  advancement  of  knowledge  in  unremunerative  fields.
2.  Political—which  is  generally  explained  as  the  training  for  citizenship.  It
should  be  noted  that  education  for  culture  also  bears  directly  on  the  training ­
  for  citizenship.
3.  Economic—which  includes  the  advancement  and  dissemination  of  knowledge
for  the  purpose  of  Controlling  the  material  environment  of  humanity  so  as
to  bring  the  greatest  amount  of  comfort  and  happiness  possible,  and  that  the
individual  may  be  able  to  command  more  wealth. 10
The  above  Classification  is  not  necessarily  listed  in  order  of  importance,
  but  in  historical  sequence.
These  three  purposes  are  now  so  closely  interrelated  that  an  attempt
to  assign  separate  values  to  each  is  difficult  and  perhaps  futile.  If  it  were
possible  to  conclude  that  support  and  purpose  bear  absolute  relationships,
it  would  then  be  possible  to  determine  the  part  the  different  purposes  play
in  the  carrying  out  of  higher  education,  for  the  proportion  of  support
which  each  source  furnishes  can  and  will  be  determined.
9  Sears,  Op.  Cit.,  p.  108.
10  This  is  reflected  in  the  large  sums  of  money  set  aside  for  research  in  the  physical  as  well
as  the  social  Sciences.
        <pb n="22" />
        CHAPTER  II

SOURCES  OF  EDUCATIONAL  INCOME
Three  Sources 11
The  sources  of  higher  educational  income  may  be  grouped  under
three  heads:
1.  Endowments  and  gifts,  or  the  Philanthropie  sources.
2.  Appropriations  by  cities,  States,  and  the  national  government  (the
last  named  would  include  land  grants).
3.  Fees  and  tuition  paid  by  students,  or  “income  from  students’  fees
for  tuition  and  other  educational  sources.” 11  12
The  public  as  well  as  the  private  institutions  receive  an  income  from
Philanthropie  sources  and  both  receive  state  funds  and  federal  aid.  As
may  be  noted  in  Table  1,  public  institutions  receive  'by  far  the  largest

TABLE  1
INCOME  FOR  HIGHER  EDUCATION—1921-22

Private
Institutions 1

Per  Cent,
of
Total

Public
Institutions 2

Per  Cent,
of
Total

Both

Per  Cent,
of
Total

Total

$186,006,242

100

$133,747,023

100

$319,753,265

100

Sources

Students’  Fees...

50,602,128

27

13,694,084

10

64,296,212

20

Public  Sources 8 ..

4,691,421

03

89,092,662

67

93,784,083

29

Philanthropy

73,862,731

40

3,538,025

03

77,400,756

24

Other  Sources...

13,932,098

07

13,607,847

10

27,539,945

09

Income  from  property
  and  productive

  funds*....

42,917,864

23

13,814,405

10

56,732,269

18

1  Statistics  of  Universities,  Colleges  and  Professional  Schools  (1921-22),  U.  S.  Bureau  of
Education  Bulletin,  1924,  No.  20,  p.  37.
2  Statistics  of  State  Universities  and  State  Colleges  (1921-22),  U.  S.  Bureau  of  Education
Bulletin,  1923,  No.  49,  p.  15.
3  Including  city,  state,  and  federal  appropriations.
4  Figured  on  a  basis  of  4%.

amount  of  state  and  national  appropriations  for  higher  education,  although
private  institutions  are  still  the  recipients  of  public  funds.  Some  States
find  it  more  advantageous  to  assist  private  institutions  than  to  establish  a
11  This  study  is  primarily  concerned  with  the  last  named,  but  in  order  to  give  the  third
source  its  proper  place  and  examine  it  in  its  broader  aspects,  it  is  necessary  to  study  it  not  by
itself,  but  as  a  part  of  the  wkole  scheme  of  higher  educational  finance.
12  Used  by  the  U.  S.  Bureau  of  Education  to  designate  this  source  of  income.
        <pb n="23" />
        A  Study  of  Student  Loans

23

state  Institution  of  higher  learning.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  in
1921-22  (the  year  which  Table  1  represents),  public  institutions  received
over  three  tnillion  dollars  from  Philanthropie  sources  and  private  institutions ­
  received  over  four  million  dollars  from  public  sources.  As  may  be
expected,  the  fees  and  tuition  from  students  in  the  public  institutions  constitute
  a  much  smaller  percentage  of  the  income  in  proportion  to  cost  than
they  do  in  the  private  institutions.  This  is  also  true  of  the  actual  total
sum.
Besides  the  three  major  current  sources  of  income  for  higher  education
  (as  shown  in  Table  1),  there  is  the  fourth  which  is  classed  as  “all
other  sources.”  This  includes  any  miscellaneous  income  not  already
included.  With  the  proper  information  it  would  be  possible  to  divide  this
item  between  Philanthropie  and  public  sources.
There  is  in  addition  to  the  income  from  students’  fees,  public  sources,
philanthropy,  and  “other  sources”,  the  income  received  from  property
and  productive  funds  in  which  the  Institution  has  invested,  as  shown  in
Table  1.  This  does  not  include  the  value  of  the  property  and  equipment
which  the  institutions  use,  as  shown  in  Table  2.

TABLE  2
VALUE  OF  PROPERTY  IN  UNIVERSITIES,  COLLEGES  AND
PROFESSIONAL  SCHOOLS  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES—1921-22

Per  Cent.
Public  of

Per  Cent.
Private  of

Per  Cent
of

Institutions 1

Total

Institutions 1

Total

Both

Total

Total

$345,360,183

100

$1,072,946,619

100

$1,418,306,802

100

Value  of  libraries,
scientific  apparatus,
  machinery,
and  furniture....

62,806,414

18

78,093,992

07

140,900,406

10

Value  of  grounds..

46,371,534

13

100,482,239

09

146,853,773

10

Value  of  buildings
excluding  dormitories


160,832,813

47

270,506,358

25

431,339,171

31

Productive  funds..

75,349,422

22

623,864,030

59

699,213,452

49

1  Statistics  of  Universities,  Colleges,  and  Professional  Schools,  (1921-22),  U.  S.  Bureau  of
Education  Bulletin,  1924,  No.  20,  pp.  31  and  36.

Property  Values  of  Institutions  of  Higher  Education
Many  of  the  gifts  and  appropriations  which  have  been  made  in  the
past  have  been  invested  in  or  given  in  the  form  of  property  that  has
increased  in  value.  This  has  brought  about  an  enormous  advance  in  the
assets  of  higher  education,  so  that  in  1921-22  the  various  institutions  possessed
  property  valued  at  nearly  a  billion  and  a  half  dollars.  This  is,  no
        <pb n="24" />
        24

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

doubt,  a  conservative  estimate  of  the  funds  permanently  invested  in
higher  education,  since  it  is  based  on  the  information  furnished  only
by  those  universities,  Colleges,  and  Professional  schools  which  report
to  the  U.  S.  Bureau  of  Education  (780  institutions  in  all—119  public  and
661  private).  It  includes  the  property  held  in  1921-22  and  does  not  take
account  of  the  many  gifts  and  appropriations  that  have  been  made  since
for  permanent  investments,  nor  the  increase  in  value  of  the  property
held.  On  the  basis  of  the  above  figures,  it  should  be  safe  to  say  that
the  present  value  of  such  property  owing  to  accretion,  additional  gifts
and  appropriations  amounts  to  almost  three  billion  dollars.
Accepting  with  due  caution  the  estimates  in  Table  2  made  by  the
U.  S.  Bureau  of  Education,  some  light  may  be  thrown  on  the  distribution
of  these  values  as  in  the  different  forms  of  property.  The  forms  of  property ­
  listed  in  Table  2  are  very  definite  sources  of  income  to  institutions
of  higher  learning  and  must  be  included  as  such.  It  is  not  possible  to
assign  to  philanthropy  and  the  public  their  proper  share  of  this  income
from  fixed  assets.  It  is  reasonably  accurate,  however,  to  assign  the  income
from  the  property  of  public  institutions  to  public  sources  and  that  of  the
property  of  private  institutions  to  philanthropic  sources.  The  overlapping
will  just  about  balance.
Philanthropic  Sources
The  philanthropic  sources  were  the  first  means  of  support  for
higher  education.  Religious  organizations,  later  on  individuals,  and  at
present  both  of  these  as  well  as  certain  corporations,  associations,  and
foundations  are  contributing  heavily  to  higher  education.  The  motives
underlying  these  different  gifts  are  diverse.  Philanthrophy,  the  desire
to  help  society  in  a  general  way,  is  a  strong  incentive;  religious  zeal
is  also  an  important  factor  and  is  closely  allied  to  the  purely  philanthropic ­
  sentiment—it  is  a  desire  to  spread  one’s  own  religious  belief.
(The  numerous  religious  institutions  of  higher  learning  are  ample  evidence
of  this.)  Next  should  be  noted  the  desire  to  advance  learning.  This  has
come  to  the  fore  recently  and  is  exemplified  in  the  numerous  foundations ­
  and  institutes  for  research—all  endeavoring  to  ascertain  truths
along  certain  specific  lines.  Millions  of  dollars  have  been  set  aside  for  this
purpose  within  recent  years  and  the  result  should  be  a  rapid  advancement
of  knowledge  rather  than  just  the  dissemination  of  knowledge  already
acquired,  as  was  the  case  in  the  most  part  under  the  purely  philanthropic
and  religious  motives.  The  other  motive  of  primary  importance  is  the
personal  one.  When  donations  and  endowments  are  given  for  philanthropic, ­
  religious,  or  research  purposes,  there  is  offen  in  them  the  personal
Stimulus;  thus  large  endowments,  gifts,  professorships,  and  scholarships,
        <pb n="25" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educationae  Einance

25

for  example,  are  sometimes  established  to  commemorate  the  memory  of
certain  individuals.  This  is  as  good  an  incentive  as  the  others,  for  while
it  is  the  erection  of  a  monument  to  some  individual,  it  serves,  at  the  same
time,  purposes  other  than  the  individual  one.  It  perpetuates  an  ideal  as
well  as  a  name.

Gifts  to  Higher  Education
Philanthropy  has  been  generous  to  higher  learning.  According  to
the  figures  published  by  the  U.  S.  Bureau  of  Education,  it  has  given  more
to  the  advancement  of  higher  education  than  it  has  to  all  other  education
combined.
„  .  .  Gifts  and  Bequests  to  Higher  Education
Gifts  and  Bequests  to
All  Education,  Including  Absolute  Per  Cent,  of
Higher  Education  Amount  Total

1910-12  $30,061,310  $28,185,999  92
1912-14  31,357,398  29,927,138  92
1914-16  37,093,280  34,845.551  94
1916-18  29,856,568  27,450,945  91
1918-20  67,417,156  65,286,159  95
1920-22  78,330,790  77,400,756  99

If  all  the  money  which  has  recently  been  given  for  the  advancement
of  higher  education  in  the  way  of  research  were  added  to  the  above,  it
would  be  found  that  this  type  of  education  has  been  receiving  an  increasing
Proportion  of  the  total  amount  of  money  which  philanthrophy  has  given
to  education  in  general.  There  are  three  reasons  for  this:  first,  elementary
and  secondary  education  have  been  better  provided  for  by  the  public
than  has  higher  education;  second,  money  placed  in  higher  education
yields  more  immediate  and  conspicuous  results—those  who  have  large
sums  to  give  are  generally  more  interested  in  the  spreading  of  certain
ideals  and  the  advancement  of  knowledge  along  certain  lines  than  they
are  in  merely  the  development  of  youth  in  general;  and  third,  the  maintenance
  of  higher  education  is  becoming  increasingly  more  costly.
Recent  Gifts
The  question  which  presents  itself  now  is  whether  Philanthropie
sources  of  income  will  continue  to  be  as  generous  as  they  have  been.  At
first  it  might  seem  so,  especially  if  we  examine  some  of  the  large  gifts  which
have  been  made  recently.  The  J.  B.  Duke  and  G.  Eastman  donations
together  with  the  five  million  which  Mr.  G.  F.  Baker  gave  to  the  Harvard
School  of  Business  Administration  are  the  most  notable.  The  Eastman
gift,  in  all,  was  more  than  fifty  million,  of  which  over  forty  million  was  for
higher  education. 13  This  means  that  fifty-eight  million  dollars  was  given

13  Editorial,  “Millions  for  Higher  Education”,  Outlook,  Dec.  17.  1924.
        <pb n="26" />
        26

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

for  higher  education  during  the  last  year  by  three  inviduals  and  does  not
include  the  many  other  gifts  and  commitments  which  will  be  found  to
amount  to  several  million.  If  the  amounts  donated  for  research  and  the
advancement  of  knowledge  to  institutes  and  foundations,  other  than  universities
  and  Colleges  (and  such  research  should  be  classed  as  part  of
higher  education),  were  added,  the  gifts  and  bequests  in  the  United  States
in  the  year  1924-25  may  be  well  over  $150,000,000.
Reliability  of  Philanthropie  Sources  in  the  Future
In  speaking  on  this  subject,  Lord  Bryce  said  that  the  people  of
England  who  usually  endow  Colleges  can  no  longer  give  in  the  generous
sums  to  which  they  have  been  accustomed;  that  the  taxation  of  incomes
and  inheritances  is  taking  half  the  property  of  the  rieh;  that  the  same
conditions  prevail  in  America  where  income  taxes  and  other  forms  of
taxation  are  lessening  the  available  income  of  many  people  by  one-half;
and  that  only  the  possessors  of  very  great  fortunes  can  still  give  in  large
amounts. 14  As  against  this,  Dr.  C.  F.  Thwing,  President  Emeritus  of
Western  Reserve  University,  maintains  that  the  fear  among  certain  College
people  in  America  that  the  race  of  rieh  men  will  die  out  and  so  be  unable
to  give  in  large  sums  is  not  well  founded,  because  new  sources  of  revenue
are  continually  being  discovered.
It  is  difficult  to  reconcile  these  two  views.  The  facts  in  the  case
support  neither  one  as  stated.  An  increasing  amount  of  money  has  been
set  aside  each  year  by  philanthropy  for  higher  education,  but  while  these
amounts  received  from  private  sources  have  increased,  and  there  is  no
reason  to  suppose  that  they  will  not  continue  to  do  so  for  some  time,  still
the  needs  have  outrun  the  sources  by  leaps  and  bounds  and  accomplishment
  seems  to  be  lagging  far  behind  opportunity. 15  It  is  not  a  question
of  how  much  is  nerw  being  received  and  is  to  be  received,  in  an  absolute
way,  but  what  proportion  the  receipts  bear  to  the  expenditures  necessary
to  move  forward  at  a  pace  commensurate  with  opportunity  and  need  for
the  development  of  higher  learning.  This  Situation  demands  more  than
just  increased  endowments  or  appropriations.  It  is  doubtful  if  it
could  be  met  in  this  way.  Although  more  money  is  essential,  alone
and  unaided  by  farseeing  management,  it  will  scarcely  serve  to  meet  present ­
  and  future  needs. 10  What  is  necessary  in  higher  education  is  a  proper
financial  as  well  as  an  educational  program.  Such  a  program  must  not
only  budget  the  income  available,  but  should  budget  according  to  the
14  Quoted  by  C.  F.  Thwing  in  “Support  of  Higher  Education,”  School  and  Society,  March
19,  1921,  p.  356.
15  Editorial,  “Cost  of  Higher  Education,”  Educational  Review,  Sept.  1920,  p.  173.
10  Ibid.,  p.  173.
        <pb n="27" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

27

necessary  requirements  for  maintaining  a  progressive  Institution  and
without  reliance  on  an  uncertainty.  This  can  only  be  secured  by  the
allocaticm  of  costs  with  relation  to  the  purpose  and  motives  back  of  higher
education  and  the  building  of  a  budget  for  many  years  ahead  upon  this
cost  schedule.  The  sources  of  income  must  then  be  sought  in  the  channels
that  are  parallel  to  the  purposes  for  which  higher  education  exists.  The
need  of  economy  and  of  a  more  definite  financial  program  in  higher  education ­
  is  urgent  if  it  is  to  receive  the  proper  financial  support.
Philanthropie  Sources  in  1924-25
Taking  the  1921-22  figures  as  shown  in  Tables  1  and  2,  it  may  be
Seen  that  the  income  from  property  and  productive  funds  of  private
institutions  figured  at  four  per  cent.  amounted  to  $42,917,864.  Allowing
for  a  reasonable  increase  estimated  at  the  rate  of  increase  in  the  income
for  higher  education  during  the  past  twenty  years,  the  income  from  philanthropy
  should  reach  approximately  $50,000,000  in  1924-25.  Adding
to  this  an  estimate  of  the  gifts  of  philanthropy  in  1924-25,  amounting
probably  to  $150,000,000,  it  makes  a  total  contribution  of  $200,000,000  by
philanthropy  to  higher  education  in  1924-25.
Public  Sources
The  public  sources  of  income  for  higher  education  made  their  appearance
  with  the  advent  of  the  desire  for  training  in  better  citizenship.  If
higher  education  served  such  a  purpose,  it  was  therefore  imperative  that
the  state  contribute  toward  its  support.  Land  grants  were  made  to  private
institutions  already  in  existence  and  land  set  aside  for  state  institutions
to  be  established.  Support  to  both  state  and  private  institutions  was  also
rendered  through  funds  derived  from  taxation.  Later,  city  institutions
for  higher  learning  were  founded  which  means  that  there  are  now  both
city  and  state  taxes  levied  for  the  support  of  higher  learning  together
with  certain  funds  coming  from  the  Federal  government.
Incidence  of  Public  Revenue  for  Higher  Education
In  discussing  the  public  phase  of  support  of  higher  education  it  is
necessary  to  inquire  into  the  equity  of  the  incidence  of  such  revenues.
As  economic  conditions  change,  injustices  are  likely  to  arise  and  if  they
persist  without  remedy,  the  financial  support  of  these  state  institutions
of  higher  learning  will  be  greatly  hampered.  It  is  necessary,  therefore,
that  those  who  have  the  financial  policies  of  such  institutions  in  hand
should  study  the  social  import  of  the  sources  of  revenue  and  make  an
        <pb n="28" />
        28

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

effort  to  shift  the  incidence  of  such  revenue  to  make  it  conform  with  the
new  economic  conditions  and  the  changing  purposes  back  of  higher  education.
  It  can  hardly  be  said  that  the  general  property  tax  is  still  a  just
source  of  funds  for  higher  education.  It  has  been  found  to  be  an  inadequate ­
  form  of  taxation;  so  other  forms  have  been  resorted  to,  but  always
only  to  secure  the  required  revenue  and  without  regard  to  whether  the
incidence  was  equitable.  It  is  urgent  that  adjustments  be  made  if  the
necessary  revenues  are  to  come  from  this  source,  for  the  Capital  needs
for  higher  education  are  increasing  almost  proportionately  with  commodity
and  wage  prices  whereas  growth  of  assessment  values,  on  the  basis  of
which  these  must  largely  be  met,  has  decidedly  lagged. 17  18  19  Such  being  the
case,  there  must  be  a  readjustment  in  the  means  of  support  for  higher  education. ­
  The  mill  tax  which  is  still  used  as  a  foundation  gradually  became
inadequate  and  new  sources  of  revenue  were  sought,  generally  with  the
idea  of  securing  money  with  the  least  resistance  and  not  with  any  policy
of  forcing  those  persons  who  receive  the  benefit  of  university  training  to
pay  for  it.  In  1919-20  the  per  capita  share  of  public  contributions  to
higher  education  in  the  different  States  ranged  from  $3.12  to  $0.11. 1S  It
is  reasonable  to  conclude  that  these  contributions  bear  no  relaticm  to  the
benefits  received.  The  University  of  Nevada  with  its  income  of  $3.12
per  capita  in  the  state  undoubtedly  is  not  serving  the  public  any  better  or
more  extensively  than  the  University  of  Wisconsin  which  is  in  a  state
where  the  per  capita  tax  is  $1.21;  or  in  Ohio  with  its  $0.44  per  capita
tax  during  the  year  1919-20.  To  carry  out  a  policy  which  would  provide
for  taxation  in  accordance  with  benefits  received  would  be  a  difificult  task,
but  the  present  is  an  opportune  time  for  the  introduction  of  such  a  plan,
for  we  are  now  at  the  outset  of  that  state  of  government  activity  that  might
be  called  the  constructive  functions  of  government.  We  do  not  simply  build
upon  the  actually  existing  Situation  and  improve  it,  but  we  now  seek  to  create
entirely  new  conditions  and  to  make  something  exist  which  never  existed
before.“
There  is,  then,  but  one  alternative  in  this  matter.  The  state  expenses
for  higher  education  must  be  allocated  in  accordance  with  and  at  the  point
where  such  institutions  market  their  waves;  or  the  sources  must  be  left
as  they  are  now  and,  to  those  who  are  bearing  the  financial  bürden,  should
be  given  a  full  return  on  money  invested,  as  some  of  the  state  universities
are  attempting  to  do.  It  is  difificult  to  see  any  other  alternative.
11  For  full  discussion  of  this  subject  see:  D.  Snedden,  “Capital  Needs  for  Education  in  the
United  States,”  Annals  of  the  American  Academy  of  Political  Science,  Jan.,  1920,  pp.  71-82.
18  Including  Normal  Schools.  Taken  from  the  “Report  of  a  Survey  of  State  Institutions
of  Higher  Uearning  in  Kansas,”  U.  S.  Bureau  of  Education  Bulletin,  1923,  No.  20,  p.  143.
19  E.  R.  A.  Seligman,  “The  Financing  of  Education,”  Educational  Administration  and
Supervision,  Nov.,  1922,  p.  450.
        <pb n="29" />
        Public  Sources  in  1924-25
Referring  to  Table  1,  we  find  that  the  income  from  property  and  productive ­
  funds  in  state  institutions  amounted  to  $13,814,405  in  1921-22.
Allowing  for  the  same  proportionate  increase  during  the  last  three  years
that  has  taken  place  during  the  years  previous  to  1921-22,  this  source  will
yield  approximately  $25,000,000  in  1924-25.  Adding  to  this  the  current
appropriations  which  can  be  estimated  on  the  basis  of  the  figures  in  Table
1,  at  approximately  $110,000,000  in  1924-25,  the  total  income  from  public
sources  for  current  consumption  can  be  estimated  at  $135,000,000  during
this  year.
Student  Fees  for  Tuition  and  Other  Educational  Services
Student  fees  for  tuition  and  other  educational  Services  constitute  the
third  source  of  income  for  higher  education.  This  source  is-  by  far  the
smallest,  having  been  only  $64,296,212  in  1921-22  or  20%  of  the  total
income;  of  this  $64,296,212  from  students’  fees,  $50,602,128  or  79%
was  paid  in  private  institutions  and  $13,694,084  or  21%  in  public  institutions. ­
  Taking  into  consideration  the  rate  of  increase  from  1917  to
1922, 20  it  should  be  safe  to  estimate  an  income  from  this  source  of  about
$100,000,000  for  the  school  year  1924-25  as  against  $200,000,000  from
philanthropy,  and  $135,000,000  from  public  funds.  The  total  from
the  three  sources  amounts  to  $435,000,000  which  is  inclusive  of  new
Capital  Investments  and  which  represents  current  expenditures  for  higher
education  or  the  cost  of  maintaining  it  for  the  year  1924-25.  The  Student,
therefore,  bears  less  than  a  fourth  of  the  cost  of  higher  education  (taking
an  average  throughout  the  United  States).
This  does  not  take  into  consideration  that  a  large  proportion  of  contributions
  to  endowments  and  current  expense  funds  are  received  from
former  students.  The  fact  remains  that  the  average  Student  pays  less
than  a  fourth  of  the  cost  of  his  education,  for  those  who  have  given  endowments ­
  constitute  a  very  small  proportion  of  the  entire  number  who
attend  College.  This  is  true  of  the  public  sources  as  well,  for  they  also
fail  to  take  into  consideration  the  distribution  of  the  benefits  of  higher
learning.  A  large  number  of  graduates  of  state  institutions  bear  the
bürden  of  supporting  them  in  no  greater  proportion  than  do  those  individuals
  who  never  attended.  We  find  in  state  institutions,  as  in  private
institutions,  large  numbers  of  individuals  who  are  the  direct  recipients
of  the  benefits  of  higher  education  and  who  are  never  called  upon  to  reimburse
  the  institution  which  has  given  them  assets  at  a  price  far  below
cost.

20  See  Annual  Bulletins  of  the  U.  S.  Bureau  of  Education  on
Education.”

‘Statistics  of  Higher
        <pb n="30" />
        30

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

The  Increasing  Cost  to  the  Student
The  income  from  students  has  been  mounting  gradually,  but  only

in  absolute  figures.  Income  from  Fees  and  Tuition

Year

Total  Income

Absolute  Amount

Per  Cent,  of
Total  Income

1875

$7,960,569

$2,136,062

26.8

1880

7,980,128

1,881,350

23.5

1885

12,253,158

2,270,518

18.5

1890

16,808,734

3,764,984

22.4

1895

22,134,601

6,336,655

28.6

1900

31,676,572

8,375,793

26.4

1905

45,715,927

10,919,378

23.8

1910

80,438,987

19,220,297

23.9

1915

118,299,296

34,067,238

28.8

1920

240,141,994

65,604,128

36.9

1922

319,592,549

64,296,212

20.1

1925  (estimate)

435,000,000

100,000,000

22.9

However,  the  per  cent.  which  the  income  from  fees  and  tuition  is  of  the
total  income  of  higher  education  has  remained  relatively  constant  until
1920,  with  a  sudden  drop  in  1922  to  20.1,  the  lowest  since  1885.  The
per  cent.  which  Student  fees  and  tuition  is  of  the  total  income,  based
on  the  estimated  figures  for  1925,  is  22.9. 22  From  the  individual
student’s  standpoint  he  is  paying  approximately  the  same  proportion
  of  the  cost  of  his  education  as  he  was  in  1900.  A  comparison  of
1900  with  1922  shows  the  Situation  to  be  about  as  follows:  the  average
fees  and  tuition  have  doubled;  the  total  income  has  increased  nine  times  ;
the  income  from  students  has  multiplied  itself  eight  times;  enrollments
have  increased  five  times  and  the  cost  of  living  has  just  about  doubled.
This  means  that  the  Student  has  been  paying  a  slightly  decreasing  proportion
  of  the  cost  of  his  education  since  1900.  It  is  a  matter  of  common
knowledge  that  it  costs  more  to  attend  College  now  than  formerly.  But
these  higher  costs  are  not  due  to  larger  fees  and  tuition,  for  when
the  expenses  of  a  Student  are  analyzed,  it  is  evident  that  the  increasing ­
  costs  have  been  more  rapid  in  other  items  such  as  board,  room,
clothing,  and  social  expenses  than  they  have  in  purely  educational  expenses. ­
  The  Standard  of  living  in  the  university  community  has  mounted
very  rapidly  and  if  it  is  possible  for  the  Student  to  meet  the  demand  of
the  rising  costs  of  necessities  together  with  a  higher  Standard  of  living,
he  ought  to  be  able  to  meet  a  larger  share  of  the  cost  of  his  education.
21  Based  on  data  taken  from  Sears,  Op.  Cit.,  pp.  55-61,  up  to  1915  and  after_  1915  from
U.  S.  Bureau  of  Education  Bulletins  on  “Statistics  of  Universities,  Colleges  and  Professional
Schools”  for  respective  years.
32  Since  these  estimates  were  made  and  presented  to  the  Association  of  University  and
College  Business  Officers  of  the  Eastern  States,  December,  1925,  at  Pinehurst,  N.  C.,  the  U.  S.
Bureau  of  Education  has  given  out  its  figures  which  are:  Total  Income  $387,694,609  and  Income
from  Students  $81,168,998  which  is  20.9  per  cent  of  the  Total  Income.  This  is  only  .8  per  cent
higher  than  1921-22  and  is  still  lower  than  any  other  year  since  1885.  These,  however,  do  not
necessarily  invalidate  the  estimated  figures,  inasmuch  as  the  figures  of  the  U.  S.  Bureau  of  Education ­
  represent  only  those  institutions  reporting  and  do  not  include  some  of  the  larger  institutions,
many  of  which  are  privately  controlled  and  thus  receive  considerable  income  from  fees  and
tuition.
        <pb n="31" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

31

Nor  have  purely  educational  expenses  increased  as  rapidly  as  individual
incomes.  The  result  has  been  that  family  incomes  have  expanded,
students  have  been  given  more  money  for  College  allowances,  and  the
students  who  work  their  way  through  College  no  longer  pay  as  large  a
share  of  their  personally  earned  income  for  educational  purposes  as  formerly.
  In  short,  the  Student  has  been  paying  a  constantly  decreasing
Proportion  of  his  income  for  his  education  and  an  increasing  proportion
for  a  rising  Standard  of  living  while  at  College.
Comparative  Fees  and  Tuitions  in  State  Institutions
A  study  of  fees  and  tuition  charges  made  by  Dr.  C.  H.  Thurber  of
the  University  of  Buffalo,  reveals  some  interesting  facts  relative  to  this
source  of  income. 23  His  study  shows  that  from  1900-21  the  rise  in
average  fees  and  tuition  charges  was  as  follows:

Departments

1900-01

1920-21
Non-Per

  Cent.

Increase
Non-Resident



Resident

Resident

Resident

Resident

Resident

Arts  and  Science...

$16

$27

$47

$106

193

293

Dentistry

78

81

150

188

92

132

Medicine

79

83

139

182

75

120

Law

51

53

79

116

55

119

Pharmacy

35

43

69

90

97

109

Engineering

30

53

57

104

90

96

Ihis  should  not  be  surprising  in  private  institutions  where  specifications
in  endowments  may  cause  such  a  distribution,  but  in  state  institutions  it
is  most  amazing  because  nothing  could  be  more  subversive  to  the  public
interest.  It  is  not  easy  to  explain  why  the  fees  for  the  different  courses
were  changed  as  shown  by  the  above  data.  There  seems  to  have  been  no
fixed  policy  based  on  social  equity.  The  per  cent.  of  increase  is  not
sound  criterion,  examined  as  of  itself,  for  it  is  measured  from  the  basic
period  1900-01  at  which  time  the  distribution  was  as  shown  above  and
in  Tables  3  and  3A.  Whether  the  distribution  of  charges  in  1900-01  or
in  1924-25  is  the  most  equitable,  it  is  difficult  to  say.  But  it  is  equallv
as  difficult  to  defend  the  changes  in  charges  during  this  period.  Why
there  was  a  flat  increase,  for  residents  in  state  Colleges  and  universities,
of  $28  for  Arts  and  Science,  $24  for  Engineering,  $21  for  Law,  $55  for
Medicine,  etc.,  is  difficult  to  explain.  Nor  does  there  seem  to  be  any
underlying  principle  of  equity  involved.  It  can  be  attributed  only  to  a
“makeshift”  for  the  purpose  of  balancing  budgets.  In  general  most  people
in  Arts  and  Science  are  preparing  themselves  for  the  professions,  especially
the  teaching  profession  where  they  will  later  “cash  in”  on  their  educational ­
  investment  at  a  somewhat  nominal  sum.  Furthermore,  women
generally  form  a  large  proportion  of  these  students.  They  will  receive

23  Thurber,  Op.  Cit.,  pp.  48,  51,  55,  and  57.
        <pb n="32" />
        32

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

financial  returns  on  their  education  for  a  very  short  period  and  when  they
marry  will  give  the  benefits  of  such  an  education  to  society  in  the  rearing
of  children.
An  examination  of  Tables  3  and  3A  together  with  Charts  1  and  1A
reveals  what  has  been  happening  in  the  matter  of  fees  and  tuitions  in
public  institutions,  and  substantiates  what  has  been  said.  It  must  be
observed,  however,  that  the  figures  for  1924-25  present  some  evidence  of
the  fact  that  after  1920-21  an  effort  was  made  in  certain  institutions  to
right  matters  and  place  tuition  and  fees  on  a  more  just  basis.  In  this  year
(1924-25)  the  absolute  figures  change  the  former  order  considerably.
Arranged  according  to  decreasing  cost  to  students  in  state  institutions,  they
are  as  follows:

Resident  Non-Resident
Departments  1900-01  1924-25  1900-01  1924-25
Dentistry  $78  $171  $81  $223
Medicine  79  134  83  181
Pharmacy  35  69  43  121
Law  51  74  53  111
Engineering  30  54  53  93
Arts  and  Science  16  44  27  85

In  view  of  the  data  in  Tables  3  and  3A  and  the  above  Order  of  charges
it  is  evident  that  an  attempt  is  being  made  to  fix  charges  in  the  various
departments  in  proportion  to  benefits  to  the  individuals  and  society,  and,
no  doubt,  in  some  institutions  a  proper  ratio  in  this  matter  has  been
reached.  Other  institutions,  however,  are  still  far  from  attaining  anything
  like  a  scientific  ratio  in  the  imposing  of  fees  and  tuitions.
The  facts  that  have  been  set  forth  help  to  show  that  tuition  and  fees
within  state  institutions  are  not  yet  fully  in  harmony  with  the  benefits
received  by  the  individual  and  society.  In  fact,  if  we  are  to  judge  from
averages  and  take  all  public  institutions  into  consideration  collectively,
the  Situation  is  relatively  the  same.  The  distribution  within  the  institutions, ­
  however,  seems  to  be  worse.  Many  institutions  have  been  moving
toward  a  flat  rate,  while  others  are  trying  to  ad  just  costs  to  the  economic
value  of  the  education.  Therefore,  we  find  the  various  institutions  moving
in  opposite  directions.
Present  Schedule  of  Fees  and  Tuition
A  more  detailed  view  of  the  Situation  now  shows  that  the  distribution
of  fees  and  tuition  in  the  various  state  institutions  is  irregulär  and  in  most
cases  without  regard  to  value  which  the  training  has  to  the  individual  in
an  economic  sense.  Table  4,  which  is  made  up  of  the  data  gathered  by
members  of  the  Western  Association  of  University  and  College  Business
Officers,  shows  the  Situation  in  the  Western  institutions  as  of  June.  1925.
        <pb n="33" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

33

TABLE  3
AVERAGE  FIXED  CHARGES  FOR  RESIDENT  STUDENTS  IN  STATE
COLLEGES  AND  UNIVERSITIES,  UNITED  STATES  1900-25 1

rs  u.  ui
Department  Institutions  Charge  Per  Student  for  an  Academic  Year  Increase
1900-01  1905-06  1910-11  1915-16  1920-21  1921-22  1924-25  U900-25)
Average  $48  $50  $56  $61  $83  $90  $91  $43
Arts  &amp;amp;  Science..  24  16  20  22  24  39  47  44  28
Law  18  51  47  53  52  64  79  74  23
Medicine  14  79  68  83  91  140  139  134  55
Engineering  ....  16  30  34  33  33  49  57  54  24
Pharmacy  9  35  47  45  45  59  69  69  34
Dentistry  6  78  86  102  119  149  150  171  93

1  Compiled  from  data  adapted  front  Thurber,  Op.  Cit.,  pp.  48,  51,  52,  55  and  57  (and
brought  up  to  date).

TABIyE  3A
AVERAGE  FIXED  CHARGES  FOR  NON-RESIDENT  STUDENTS  IN
STATE  COLLEGES  AND  UNIVERSITIES
UNITED  STATES  1900-25 1

Departments  Institutions  Charge  Per  Student  for
1900-01  1905-06  1910-11  1915-16

an  Academic  Year
1920-21  1921-22  1924-25

Increase
(1900-25)

Average

$57

$61

$67

$77

$95

$131

$136

$79

Arts  &amp;amp;  Science..

24

27

42

44

52

75

106

85

58

18

53

49

63

67

93

110

111

57

Medicine

14

83

70

84

97

153

182

181

97

Engineering  ....

16

53

64

55

59

85

104

93

40

Pharmacy

9

43

51

49

55

70

90

121

78

Dentistry

6

81

88

108

134

177

188

223

142

1  Compiled  from
brought  up  to  date).

data

adapted

from  Thurber,

Op.  Cit.,

pp.  48,

51,  52,

55,  and

57  (and
        <pb n="34" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

35
        <pb n="35" />
        TABLE  4

COMPAUATIVE  FEE  SCHEDULE  OF  STATE  INSTITUTIONS
1924  -  1925’'”

Institution

Arts&amp;amp;Sdencss

Commerce  &amp;amp;
Business  Artnin

Law

Mediane

Engineering

Dentistry

Pharmacy

Agriculture

6raduateSchooi

Free  Scholarships  ln  Use

I

ä
1

ui
a&amp;gt;
QL

ä

ä

M
M

&amp;lt;/)
*&amp;gt;
QL

M
i

1

Non  Res

Ui
QL

1

vi
*0
QL

&amp;amp;
i

ui
&amp;lt;D
cd.

i

1

i
i

Numbet

Matriculation


Dipioma

Average

44

85

SB

85

74

///

134

184

S4

93

IV

223

69

121

43

85

85

65

Arkansas  (s-b)

50

60

90

40

90

30

30

25

800
Approx.

15

4

Cincinnati  (e)

ISO

200

200

300

300

150

200

(c)!00

(m

25

2SI0

io

Colorado  (to

45

30

45

90

IS

I0S

165

270

1945

0)90

45

90

(o)

(0)

23S

1041  S
Approx

5
10

s
10

Illinois

SO

75

SO

75

75

112.50

165

200

SO

75

'tä

n

125

ISO

SO

75

SO

75

1333

87297

10

10

Indiana

60

95

60

95

75

110

ns

250

60

95

140

8680

(015

5

Iowa

10
90

no
ISO

90

130

110

140

ns

3S0

90

130

ns

250

90

130

479

19169

10

10

Iowa  State  College

m

m

172

m

90

ISO

72

112

30

30

590

43600

Kansas

20

30

35

45

35
I0Ö

45
100

20

30

35

45

20

30

10
IS

10

Kentucky(d-b)

40

so

SO

80

40

so
70

40

so

(u-v)

(u-v)

Service

Miami-a

20
SO

20
SO

3
5

Michiqan(Men&amp;amp;  Women)

85
80

110
tos

85
80

110
I0S

110
tos

130
I0S

180
ns

260
255

100
95

125
120

180
ns

260
255

100
9S

125
120

es
80

no
I0S

Some

(r)IO
(nr)2S

to

Minnesota

60

90

90

120

90

120

180

210

90

120

180

210

I0S

135

60

90

30

30

0)S

Missouri

SO

70

SO

70

SO

70

so

70

SO

70

SO

70

so

so

106

5300

s

Montana

(q)30

flffi

30

75

S

5

Michigan^)  Agricultural

~0d4
h090

W29—
M35

78

123

(0  4

&amp;lt;t)4

S

S

Nebraska

-HTJ—
(Pb

OH
(1)3

(1)1
0  2

OH
(l&amp;gt;?

02
0  3

(in
0)5

IST

'1iS~
160

dH
0)2

dH.
0-2

ISO
no

150
no

(PI
(03

0/
05

01

01

(1)1
(03

tDl
(Pi

Some

S

5
10

North  Dakota

25

25

SO

SO

SO

100

35
2S

35
2S

(u)

N)

Ohio

45

150

100

205

ISO

765

45

ISO

ISO

2SS

AS

ISO

45

ISO

4S

45

10

5
10

Purdue

SO

100

SO

100

SO

100

SO

100

SO

100

104

1560

5

5

Texas

SO

30

20

20

45

ISO

30

30

40

ISO

16

3500

10
30

4

Utah(m)

38

63

98

123

113

138

38

63

88

113

Utah  Agricultural

28

53

28

51

28

53

28

S3

tMOpUx

Entrenofee

S

Washington

45

ISO

75

180

45

ISO

45

ISO

(u)

(v&amp;gt;

Service

S

Wisconsin

24

148

24

148

24

148

24

148

24

148

&amp;lt;v)

(»)

Wyommg-(b)

21S0

22.  SO

2150

11.50

2ZSO

2150

22.50

22.50

22.50

22.50

0)

(&amp;lt;j)

84

1872

2

S

a  Extra  formusic.
b  Extra  1vr  laboratory
c  Covers  all  Student  actMties
d  Feltorvships.
.  Cincinnati  tos  an  additional  fbeof*30
fcr  Miitns  arm  *40  rerNun  resident*.

f  Iw  Medice!  School  only.
s  included  n  regulär  tuitbn  totals  listed  in
coiumns  to  we  ieft.
h  industrial  Science
i  Vetinary  Mediane
i  norm  Economics

k  Special  large  dipioma  only.
I  Per  credit  hour.
m  Additional  incidental  fee.
b  Student  banüe.
o  Release  fron  Matriculation  fee.
f  AMIt'onal  tir  Migrant  StoAentr.

q  All  schools.
r  Includes  laboratory.
s  Also  Applied  Arts
t  Per  course.
v  The  samt  astte  College  m  which  the  imrk  is  taken.

i  Adopted  wrth  modificat/ons  from  mmutesofFifthAnnual
Meeting  of  the  Western  Association  of  University  and
College  Business  Officers  he  Id  at  the  University  of
Missouri,  Columbia  Mo..  May  22-23.1925.

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and
        <pb n="36" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

37

It  is  illuminating  to  examine  conditions  in  some  of  the  individual
institutions  as  shown  in  Table  4.  The  University  of  Arkansas,  for
instance,  asks  no  fees  of  resident  students  in  Arts  and  Science,  Engineering, ­
  or  Agriculture.  Courses  in  Law  and  Medicine,  on  the  other  hand,
are  charged  for,  though  these  fees  are  but  nominal.  The  charges  are
irregulär  and  no  valid  reason  can  be  assigned  for  their  imposition  from  a
scientific  standpoint.  Political  expediency  and  budget  deficits,  no  doubt,
are  the  causes  of  such  a  distribution  of  fees  and  tuition,  and  has  coincided
with  wisdom  in  the  case  of  Arts  and  Science.  Another  interesting  case
is  the  University  of  Wyoming  with  straight  charges  for  residents  and  nonresidents
  in  all  the  different  schools.  As  for  the  lack  of  distinction  made
between  residents  and  non-residents  in  these  institutions,  it  is  not  of  concern
  here,  for  it  is  due  more  to  political  factors  than  to  educational  policies.
The  fact  that  charges  are  the  same  in  all  schools  is  worth  noting  for  the
present  study,  and  with  Wyoming  must  be  included  Wisconsin,  Purdue,
Missouri,  and  Washington  (with  the  exception  of  charges  in  the  Law
School).  The  conclusion  is  self-evident.  In  many  cases  charges  are  not
in  proportion  to  economic  benefits  to  the  individual;  in  a  few  cases  there
seems  to  be  a  tendency  to  make  adjustments  in  this  respect,  such  as,  for
example,  in  Nebraska  and  Michigan,  although  even  in  these  cases  where
the  proportioning  of  charges  between  schools  seems  well-balanced,  there
is  little  upon  which  to  found  a  belief  that  there  is  a  proper  balance  of
charges  between  the  Student  and  the  state.  It  should  be  added  that  in
Arkansas,  Colorado,  Kentucky,  and  Wyoming  there  are  extra  fees  for
laboratorv  courses.  This,  however,  does  not  invalidate  what  has  been
set  forth.
Comparative  Fees  and  Tuitions  in  Private  Institutions
The  same  general  conditions  are  to  be  found  in  the  private  institutions. ­
  In  the  relationship  between  the  Student  and  the  Corporation,  the
former  is  far  from  bearing  his  share  of  the  expense.  He  does,  however,
bear  a  larger  proportion  than  in  the  public  institutions.  This  is  inevitable,
since  private  universities  receive  money  from  the  state  only  in  a  few
instances  and  the  sums  so  received  are  small.  It  may  be  seen  in  Table
5  that  charges  in  the  various  schools  in  private  institutions  bear  no  relation
to  the  economic  value  of  the  training.  In  1924-25  the  fees  and  tuition
Were  as  followS  :  Increase

Fixed  Charges

Since  1900-Engineering



$283

$71

Medicine

275

109

Arts  &amp;amp;  Science

247

163

Law

213

105

Graduate  School

127

—3
        <pb n="37" />
        38

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

TABLE  5
AVERAGE  FIXED  CHARGES  IN  PRIVATELY  ENDOWED
INSTITUTIONS,  UNITED  STATES  1900-25 1

Charges  Per  Student  for  an  Academic  Year  Increase
Department  1900-01  1905-06  1911-12  1915-16  1920-21  1921-22  1924-25  (1900-25)
Average  $129  $136  $136  $149  $187  $216  $229  $100
Arts  &amp;amp;  Science  118  125  121  130  192  229  247  71
Law 2  104  114  112  141  179  205  213  109
Engineering 3  120  130  141  162  184  225  283  163
Medicine  171  181  176  189  194  235  276  105
Graduate 4  130  130  130  125  184  186  127  —3

1  Adapted  from  Thurber,  Op.  Cit.,  p.  58,  with  changes  and  brought  up  to  date.
2  Johns  Hopkins  University  not  included.
3  Chicago  University  not  included.
4  Vanderbilt  University  not  included.
Harvard,  Columbia,  Chicago,  Deland-Stanford,  Johns  Hopkins,  Vanderbilt,  Cornell,  and
Bryn  Mawr  are  included  in  Arts  and  Science  and  Graduate  figures.

The  Order  here  is  somewhat  better  than  in  the  case  of  public  institutions.
There  is  no  reason  to  believe,  however,  that  it  is  a  calculated  result.  It
is  more  reasonable  to  believe  that  endowments  for  some  branches  of  learning
  have  not  been  forthcoming  as  abundantly  as  they  have  for  others.
This  is  undoubtedly  true  in  some  cases  and  is  an  unfortunate  Situation.
The  line-up  is  encouraging,  however,  and  shows  the  advantage  which
private  institutions  have  over  public  institutions.  Due  to  the  absence  of
state  politics  they  are  able  to  initiate  sounder  financial  policies.
If  the  years  prior  to  1924-25  are  examined,  it  is  found  that  the
Order  is  constantly  shifting  and  there  is  a  tendency  to  conclude  that
charges  in  the  different  schools  are  not  made  on  any  basis  of  economic
justice  to  the  individual  or  to  society  as  a  whole. 24  It  seems  quite  obvious
that  there  has  been  no  improvement  in  the  apportioning  of  fees  and
tuitions  within  the  institution,  even  in  the  private  universities  and  Colleges.
No  trace  of  a  definite  policy  involving  economic  justice  can  be  found.
Fees  and  Tuitions  in  Private  Institutions  in  1924-25
The  present  fee  and  tuition  schedules  in  private  institutions  show
more  consistency  than  those  in  public  institutions,  as  may  be  seen  in  Table
6.  There  is  less  difference  among  institutions  and  among  the  various
schools  within  these  institutions.  There  has  evidently  been  an  effort  on
the  part  of  each  institution  to  keep  within  the  limits  prescribed  by  other
institutions.

24  Thurber,  Op.  Cit.,  p.  62.
        <pb n="38" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

39

A!/£

?AC£  r/.

X£D  CM

C/Ms
WC/TC

77  2

-&amp;amp;Ctr

77?/t

'4TC/.Y  i

4
Z//&amp;amp;CYVC.
/900  ~

//
0  /MC  7
■/925

7T//T/C

A/M

j&amp;amp;O

/
-/uA

't
ic±

iw

—

T  \
\  \
\

l6th

/  '
/  .

//

\
\
\
\
V
1

■/£&amp;amp;

—r"'*'

—x  xtzß-




A
x—

C/£lfVlS
/s  £  Sciem
YVY
Q//7efjxaa~

e&amp;gt;

n

^
1  :
i  i
jj

'oftCt/t?
■craCa/e
?rape

/s

00  /$»

OS  /«

'0  /9/

f  /£

20  /&amp;amp;

V
        <pb n="39" />
        40

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

TABLE  6

COMPARATIVE  FEE  SCHEDULE  OF  PRIVATE
INSTITUTIONS—1924-2S 1

Institutions

Arts  and
Science

Faw

Medicine

Engineering ­


Matricula
Graduate  tion  Fee

■  Graduation ­
  Fee

Average

$247

$213

$274

$282

$127

$7

$12

Brown  Univ

300

300

300

10

Carnegie  Ins.  of  Tech.

300

180

5

Chicago  Univ

225

225

240

300

300

10

Columbia  Univ

300

300

300

300

300

12

20

Harvard  Univ

300

250

300

300

300

20

Lehigh  Univ

300

300

5

10

Univ.  of  Penn

275

275

325

325

200

5

20

U.  of  Pittsburgh

212

212

312

212

Princeton  Univ

350

100

5

12

Stanford  Univ

225

195

255

150

5

Syracuse  Univ

225

225

275

275

100

5

10

Yale  Univ

300

300

20

1  Compiled  from  the

announcements  of

the  various  institutions.

The  other  interesting  features  which  Table  6  discloses  are  that
tuition  and  fees  are  on  a  flat  basis,  or  nearly  so,  in  most  institutions,
and  that  charges  in  the  Graduate  Schools  are  much  lower  than  in  the  other
schools  with  the  exception  of  Brown,  Chicago,  Columbia  and  Harvard
Universities.  The  figures  for  Arts  and  Science  are  at  a  relatively  high
level  in  practically  all  institutions,  which  would  indicate  that  the  charges
for  these  courses  are  as  much  as  for  Law,  Medicine,  and  Engineering,
except  where  a  difference  is  caused  by  large  laboratory  fees.  It  is  fair
to  conclude  that  charges  are  neither  apporticmed  in  accordance  to  educational
  costs  nor  the  economic  value  of  the  training  to  the  individual.

The  Cost  of  Education  to  the  Student
There  has  been  much  said  about  the  rising  cost  of  education  to  the
Student,  but,  as  was  pointed  out  above,  the  purely  educational  item  in
the  student’s  budget  has  not  risen  proportionately  with  the  other  items,
such  as  clothing,  amusements,  and  future  earning  capacity.  It  is  of  little
use  to  examine  absolute  figures  in  this  manner.  The  rise  in  fees  and  tuition ­
  must  be  compared  with  the  rise  in  other  things  that  enter  into  the
cost  of  education.  The  major  factors  in  the  cost  of  education  from  the
student’s  standpoint  are  tuition  and  fees,  and  cost  of  living.  From  the
        <pb n="40" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

41

-275

T7//T/OA7

77/VD  F£.
wit/i

rs  ccm/

7 Aft£/D

C77A77T  JA

COi

^  i
N
is.

'W/VG

-

rw

7/0/7  S-ffiPO
H  //

LFCFA/L
(fosta/ent.
(JVo/i/fps..

7  State  7a
"

rt/tc/t/o/7o
*/

Co&amp;lt;

!/  V
;/  of  Liv/7

Frt'yate)
’9

//Mtttc/tl,

VJO
A

-2&amp;amp;0

/  \
/  '

"*

775

1
A

/  P
Li

y*—

—75H7

/
/
/
/

7
X  //
/  /
/  /
/J

—725

/  /
/  ,y
iS

~TOO

—  —

—75
APS

7900

7905

79.

’O

7975

7920

7925
        <pb n="41" />
        IS
gral

standpoint  of  the  institution  the  main  items  are  the  cost  of  physical  expansion,
  which  may  be  divided  into  building  wages  and  building  material,  real
estate  values,  salaries,  and  cost  of  equipment.  In  Table  7  may  be  found  an
index  of  some  of  these  factors,  showing  the  relative  change  in  price,  using
1913  as  a  base.  These  changes  in  prices  are  plotted  in  Charts  3A  and
3B  to  show  the  relation  between  tuition  charges  and  the  cost  of  living,
and  the  cost  of  building.  They  are  self-explana.tory  as  they  give  a  moving
picture  of  what  has  been  happening.

TABLE  7
INDICES  OF  COST  OF  EDUCATION,  COST  OF  BUILDING,
AND  COST  OF  LIVING  COMPARED

Year

Tuition  and
Fees  in  Private
Institutions  1

Tuition  and
Fees  in  State
Institutions  2

Cost  of
Building  3

Cost  of
Living  4

Resident

Non-Resident

1900..

90

81

78

1905..

95

85

84

1910..

95

95

92

1913..

100

100

100

100

100

1914..

96

103

1915..

104

104

105

98

105

1916..

114

118

1917..

138

142

1918..

152

174

1919..

179

199

1920...

131

141

130

234

216

1921..

151

153

179

175

180

1922..

174

166

1923..

194

172

1924..

19T

169

1925..

160

154

186

173

1
Bureau

Based  on  data  in  Sears,  Op.
of  Lducation,  “Statistics

Cit.,  pp.  55-61,
of  Universities.

up  to  1915  and
,  Colleges  and

after  1915  from  Bulletins  of  the
Professional  Schools”  for  the

respective  years.
2  Based  on  data  in  Sears,  Op.  Cit.,  pp.  55-61,  up  to  1915  and  after  1915  from  Bulletins  of
the  Bureau  of  Lducation,  “Statistics  of  State  Colleges  and  Universities”  for  the  respective  years.
3  Index  of  the  Federal  Reserve  Bank  of  New  York.
4  U.  S.  Department  of  Labor  Index.
5  First  nine  months  only.

Chart  3A  shows  that  the  cost  of  living  went  up  much  more  rapidly
from  1913  to  1921  and  reached  a  higher  point  than  did  any  of  the  fees
and  tuitions;  and  from  1921  to  1925  still  remained  higher  than  did  fees
and  tuitions  for  residents  in  state  universities  and  students  in  private
institutions.
        <pb n="42" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Education  al  Finance

43

TL//T/OA

'  MD  AZ
m/A

rs  comp.

CDA
4PCD

%
k
et

COS'.

'l
*
!

1

l£C£M

7

-----  Ttft.
.  .
/
Coi

Zmi/ees
//  "
..
/  cf  ßc//Za

(JVoa-Pes)
(Private)
i/tß

Oi&amp;amp;iJ?  //T&amp;lt;$i,
••
ArtMvAa

"/ufZ&amp;amp;TTf
W  j\
1  \
f  1

290

/  \
/  1
/  r

r-^
/
y-"'
/

-ftt

/  r
i

~~/56

7
/
/

-ir
✓./
/  ^
/  /

—/25

'-ZL

*—/&amp;amp;&amp;amp;

z

^  **

ZZ^

62S

/900

(905

/9

'0

(9/5

/920

(925
        <pb n="43" />
        _  ±

."•-W

V%S*

44  A  Study  of  Student  Loa  ns
Cost  of  Building
Comparing  the  same  curves  as  in  Chart  3A  with  the  cost  of  building,
Chart  3B,  we  observe  practically  the  same  relationship.  The  only
difference  is  that  the  cost  of  building  reaches  a  higher  peak,  has  a  gradual
rise  after  1921,  and  keeps  above  all  the  tuition  lines,  except  from  1921
to  1923,  whereas  the  cost  of  living  line  falls  below  one  cf  the  tuition  lines
in  1921  and  remains  in  that  position  up  to  the  present.

Sources  of  Income  versus  Benefits
Keeping  in  mind  that  Statistical  information  is  very  inadequate  and
unreliable,  we  may  nevertheless  formulate  certain  postulates.  First,  that
the  income  from  the  Student  body  has  not  risen  proportionately  to  that
of  the  income  from  other  sources.  This  is  a  matter  which  needs  serious
consideration.  Second,  that  the  educational  charges  in  the  various  schools
within  the  institutions,  both  public  and  private,  have  not  been  apportioned
with  due  consideration  given  to  the  differences  in  the  economic  value  of
the  training  to  the  Student  as  among  the  various  branches  of  leärning.  A
few  institutions  have  approached  such  an  arrangement,  but  there  is  no
reason  to  believe  that  this  has  been  done  in  a  calculated  way.  Third,  that
the  financial  policies  of  institutions  have  not  been  remodeled  in  accordance
with  the  changing  economic  conditions  and  the  new  purposes  for  which
higher  education  exists.  Fourth,  that  the  general  argument  or  contention
  that  higher  education  justifies  large  state  appropriations  from  the
subsequent  value  it  renders  to  society,  is  equally  applicable  to  any
form  of  training,  physical,  moral,  or  for  the  trades.  The  bricklayer  (on
the  average)  is  potentially  as  useful  to  society  as  the  average  writer,  poet,
artist,  musician,  or  even  lawyer  or  business  man,  as  well  as  a  large  Proportion ­
  of  those  engaged  in  the  many  forms  of  so-called  scientific  work.
Not  all  College  graduates  contribute  more  to  society  than  the  average  individual. ­
  It  is  only  the  exceptional  man  in  the  exceptional  position  who
contributes  more  to  society.  Fifth,  that  an  attempt  should  be  made  to
allocate  costs  of  higher  education  among  the  various  sources  of  revenue
in  proportion  to  the  benefits  which  institutions  of  higher  leärning  have
to  offer  to  these  different  individuals,  groups,  and  organizations  which
constitute  the  sources  of  income.  In  order  to  do  this,  it  would  be  necessary
to  measure  both  the  benefits  of  higher  education  which  the  different
parties  receive  and  also  the  cost  to  the  Institution  to  make  these  benefits
available.
        <pb n="44" />
        [45]

CHAPTER  III

ALLOCATION  OF  HIGHER  EDUCATIONAL  COSTS
Two  Phases
The  allocation  of  higher  educational  costs  ties  up  closely  with  the  purposes
  for  which  such  education  is  maintained.  The  three  purposes  which
have  been  found  to  be  cultural,  political,  and  economic,  bring  up  the  question
  as  to  what  the  sources  of  support  for  higher  education  are  and  how
these  sources  ally  themselves  with  the  purposes.  The  present  sources  of
support  together  with  the  proportion  that  each  bears  to  the  whole  and  to
each  other  have  just  been  examined.  The  question  now  arises  as  to
whether  they  and  their  present  interratios  are  satisfactory  in  view  of
the  purpose  for  which  higher  education  is  being  conducted,  and  if  not,
what  would  be  a  proper  ratio,  and  how  could  such  a  ratio  be  established  ?
In  the  allocations  of  higher  educational  costs  there  are  two  phases  to
be  dealt  with:
1.  The  allocation  to  society,  to  the  philanthropist,  and  to  the  individual
who  is  the  recipient  of  the  education.
2.  The  allocation  within  the  institution  among  the  various  schools,
faculties,  classes,  and  individuals  attending;  these  costs  to  be  allocated
  proportionately  to  the  purposes  which  such  education  serves.
Costs  and  Increased  Enrollments
The  number  who  have  availed  themselves  of  the  opportunity  for  a
College  or  university  education  has  been  steadily  growing  and  causing  our
educational  equipment  to  become  inadequate.  We  have  adhered  to  old
views  without  any  regard  for  the  changing  phases  of  our  social  and  economic ­
  organization.  The  increased  costs  due  to  greater  enrollment  and
more  expensive  educational  equipment  have  not  been  fully  taken  into
account  in  fixing  charges  for  educational  Services.  The  result  has  been  a
call  for  additional  endowments  and  larger  appropriations.  This  naturally
has  raised  questions  concerning  the  advisability  of  investing  more  money  in
higher  education.  It  has  resulted  in  developing  three  points  of  view  as  to
what  proportion  of  this  cost  society  and  philanthropy  should  bear  and  the
Charge  for  tuition  or  the  price  that  should  be  paid  by  the  individual  receiving
  the  university  or  College  education.  There  is  necessarily  a  ratio  here
between  the  benefits  received  by  the  different  parties  contributing  to  the
support  of  higher  education  and  the  proportion  of  the  cost  paid  by  each.
Whether  this  ratio  is  a  true  or  false  one  has  never  been  determined,  nor
has  the  problem  ever  been  scientifically  studied.
        <pb n="45" />
        46

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

Points  of  View 34
Examining  the  present  tendencies  of  thought  on  this  subject,  we  find
that  they  fall  into  three  categories.  At  one  extreme  we  find  those  people
who  think  that  society  should  furnish  higher  education.  By  this  is  meant
that  when  there  are  not  sufficient  funds  available  from  Philanthropie
sources,  the  state  or  community  should  become  responsible.  At  the  other
extreme  we  find  those  who  believe  that  the  direct  recipient,  that  is.  the
Student  attending  the  university  or  College,  should  pay  the  full  cost  of
education,  and  who  hope  that  means  can  be  found  to  maintain  the  present
type  of  enrollment  under  such  a  regime.
Between  these  two  extremes  we  find  the  large  majority  who  believe
that  society  as  a  whöle  and  the  direct  recipient  should  bear  jointly  the
financial  support  of  higher  education.  This  group,  of  course,  is  further
divided  as  to  what  per  cent.  of  the  total  cost  each  should  bear.  Let  us
examine  each  of  these  views  in  turn.
Society  Should  Bear  the  Cost
Those  who  advocate  that  society  should  bear  the  cost  take  their  stand
on  the  ground  that  education  is  not  only  beneficial  but  necessary  for  the
well-being  and  progress  of  society.  This  is  a  socialistic  or  institutionalistic
  point  of  view  toward  education—a  commodity  to  be  distributed
to  the  public  and  paid  for  by  it.  This  doctrine  had  its  roots  in  lower
education  and  not  in  higher  education.  The  essence  of  it  is  that  by  giving
all  individuals  an  opportunity  to  be  educated,  society  is  benefited  proportionately.
  This  was  true  at  one  time  and  may  still  be  claimed  of  lower
and  secondary  education,  but  higher  education  has  assumed  new  purposes.
Those  who  are  of  this  opinion  have  not  progressed  beyond  the  trend  of
thought  that  was  prevalent  when  universities  and  Colleges  were  first  established.
  The  early  institutions  of  higher  learning  were  privately  endowed
universities  and  Colleges.  They  trained  ministers  and  other  Professional
men  to  meet  a  social  need.  These  people  went  out  and  worked  for  very
small  fees  and.  their  efforts  were  in  large  measure  missionary,  whether
they  were  in  the  ministry,  in  teaching,  law,  or  medicine.  Education  did
not  have  the  same  economic  value  then  as  it  has  today.
34  Based  on  Interviews  and  correspondence  with:
Mr.  T.  C.  Carlson,  Bursar,  University  of  Arkansas.
Mr.  J.  C.  Christensen,  Ass’t  Secretary,  University  of  Michigan.
Mr.  Horace  S.  Ford,  Bursar,  Mass.  Institute  of  Technology.
Mr.  A.  J.  Lobb,  Controller,  University  of  Minnesota..
Mr.  M.  E.  McCaffrey,  Secretary,  Bd.  of  Regents,  Univ.  of  Wisconsin.
Mr.  W.  J.  Mathers,  Ass’t  Cashier,  University  of  Chicago.
Mr.  Lloyd  Morey,  Comptroller,  University  of  Illinois.
Mr.  J.  D.  Phillips,  Bus.  Mgr.,  University  of  Wisconsin.
Mr.  N.  C.  Plimpton,  Auditor,  University  of  Chicago.
Mr.  George  F.  Sheers,  Auditor,  Carnegie  Institute  of  Technology.
Mr.  Shirley  W.  Smith,  Secretary,  University  of  Michigan.
Dr.  S.  S.  Wilson,  Secretary,  Western  Reserve  University.
Dr.  C.  F.  Thwing,  President  Emeritus,  Western  Reserve  University.
        <pb n="46" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

47

Our  Colleges  and  universities  have  now  multiplied  their  courses  and
in  many  cases  the  training  received  enables  the  recipient  to  command  a
higher  salary  as  well  as  to  render  a  greater  Service  to  the  public.  Conditions
  have  altered  without  shifting  the  point  of  view  of  many  who  are
responsible  for  the  financial  policies  of  education.  A  large  proportion
of  the  public  does  not  as  yet  see  the  changed  purpose  of  a  higher  education.
The  young  man  who  enters  a  law  school,  medical  school,  school  of  journalism,
  or  school  of  business  is  no  longer  actuated  solely  by  the  Philanthropie ­
  motive,  but  hopes  to  make  more  money  and  thus  to  “cash  in”  on
his  investment  in  his  education.  Those  who  hold  the  view  that  society
collectively  owes  the  coming  generations  a  higher  education  at  a  nominal
cost  are  evidently  not  aware  of  the  changed  circumstances.  They  argue
that  no  cash  value  can  be  placed  on  an  education  since  it  is  a  legacy  which
we  have  received  from  our  ancestors,  the  value  of  which  cannot  be  estimated.
  They  further  hold  that  since  we  have  received  such  a  legacy,  we
in  turn  should  pass  on  a  like  one  to  posterity.  The  trouble  here  lies  in
viewing  higher  education  as  a  whole  rather  than  examining  it  in  the  light
of  the  various  purposes  for  which  it  exists.  They  do  not  recognize  the
three  major  purposes  of  all  Colleges  and  universities.  No  institution,
faculty  of  learning  or  individual  course  has  only  one  aim  or  purpose,  but
rather  combines  all  or  part  of  them  in  varying  ratios  depending  upon  the
type  of  information  expounded.  Only  in  proportion  as  a  brauch  of  learning ­
  serves  each  purpose  does  the  present  generation  owe  this  education  to
posterity.  It  should  be  recognized  that  certain  forms  of  training  and
varying  proportions  of  other  training  are  of  primary  importance  to  society
and  that  society  should  pay  for  them.  There  is  a  failure  to  allocate  costs
in  proportion  to  benefits.  Higher  education  is  available  for  a  large  number
  of  people  with  a  variety  of  aims.  Those  who  seek  it  are  increasing
in  number  more  rapidly  than  are  the  financial  resources  of  Colleges  and
universities.  The  philanthropic  sources  are  far  from  sufficient  to  keep
pace  with  the  new  demands,  so  that  public  institutions  must  be  supported
by  taxation.  Under  this  view  the  tax  bürden  for  higher  education  will
constantly  have  to  be  increased  or  higher  education  will  go  bankrupt,
unless  endowments  can  be  raised  to  talce  care  of  the  surplus  students.
It  is  obviously  unfair  that  the  poorer  classes,  which  are  only  remotely
benefited  by  some  branches  of  higher  education,  should  bear  the  bürden
of  its  support.  If  these  institutions  can  show  that  they  are  serving  all
persons,  the  present  state  of  affairs  must  not  be  disturbed.  But  few
of  them  are  able  to  do  this  and  so  the  view  under  discussion  is  constantly
being  abandoned  by  the  more  progressive  elements  which  are  striving
to  adopt  policies  that  will  allocate  cost  in  proportion  to  benefit.  It  is  not
equitable  that  the  young  man  be  educated  at  the  expense  of  those  to  whom
        <pb n="47" />
        48

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

he  will  later  Charge  a  price  for  his  Services,  based  upon  his  training.  The
advocates  of  this  view  would  ask  a  fee  that  is  just  sufficient  to  make  the
Student  appreciate  the  training  he  is  receiving.  Such  a  charge  would  bear
no  relation  to  the  economic  value  of  the  training.
Recipient  Should  Pay  Full  Cost
Those  who  hold  the  opposite  view  maintain  that  the  recipient  of  the
education  should  bear  the  full  cost.  This  is  an  individualistic  opinion
as  compared  with  the  socialistic  one  just  discussed.  There  is  some  difference
  within  this  group  as  to  what  is  to  be  included  in  the  cost.of  education.
However,  regardless  of  that,  they  believe  that  the  Student  should  be
charged  the  full  cost  of  giving  him  his  training.  This  is  based  on  a
philosophy  that  the  Student  is  the  one  who  gains  primarily  and  that
society’s  benefit  is  so  remote  that  it  should  pay  either  little  or  none  of
the  cost.  Many  who  speak  of  the  full  cost  have  their  own  interpretation
of  what  this  consists.  Some  interpret  it  to  be  current  expenses;  others,
both  current  and  fixed  expenses,  and  some  would  go  so  far  as  to  include
the  interest  on  invested  Capital,  leaving  out  only  the  element  of  profit.
This  means  an  attempt,  or  at  least  a  belief  that  the  whole  of  higher
education  should  be  put  on  a  purely  business  basis.  If  such  a  practice
were  followed,  it  might  result  in  serious  consequences.  It  might  disturb
  our  present  type  of  enrollment  unless  we  found  a  way  to  assist
the  less  well-to-do  Student  to  help  himself  in  the  way  of  loans.  It  would
also  mean  that  the  cost  of  instruction  would  rise,  since  if  education
were  on  a  purely  business  basis,  the  teaching  staff  would  demand  higher
salaries  and  there  would  be  a  danger  of  throwing  the  whole  of  education
on  a  bargaining  basis  and  thus  make  it  purely  a  money  proposition.  The
same  would  be  true  if  cost  were  interpreted  to  mean  current  costs  or
current  expenses.  It  would  mean  that  the  state  or  endowments  would
furnish  the  plant  and  the  Student  would  be  charged  the  cost  of  upkeep
and  Operation.  The  same  objections  enter  here.  It  is  an  arbitrary  way
of  allocating  costs  because  it  fails  to  take  into  account  aims  or  purposes
on  one  hand  and  the  direction  which  benefits  take  on  the  other.  It  is  an
attempt  to  apportion  costs  between  society  and  the  individual,  but  one
which  is  based  on  the  mechanics  of  accounting  rather  than  being  based
on  social  equity.
Dividing  Cost  Between  Recipient  and  Society
Between  the  two  extremes  we  find  more  sturdy  thinking  not  only
from  the  standpoint  of  College  and  university  finance,  but  from  the  broad
social  consequences  as  well.  This  group  believes  that  the  cost  should  be
        <pb n="48" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finänce

49
Bibliolh&amp;amp;J
divided  between  the  recipient  of  higher  education  and  society.  There  is
no  unity  of  thought  regarding  such  division.  It  brings  up  not  ot'.ly  a  qufstion,
of  accounting,  but  one  which  involves  social  and  financial
determine  how  much  each  should  pay,  it  is  necessary  to  estimate  just  the
Proportion  of  benefit  the  individual  and  society  receive  when  the  individual
is  given  a  College  education.  We  find  that  some  believe  in  drawing  a  line
between  fixed  and  operating  expenses.  Such  a  division  is  not  necessarily
in  proportion  to  benefits  received.  It  is  not  possible  to  obtain  equity  in
this  matter  with  any  mathematical  precision.  A  further  problem  presents
itself  here.  There  is  not  only  the  allocation  of  costs  between  society  and
the  Student  body,  but  further  adjustments  must  be  made  within  the  Student
body.  The  ratio  will  not  be  the  same  for  society  and  for  the  Student  in
different  courses.  It  is  evident  that  the  ratio  between  society  and  the  individual ­
  will  vary  depending  upon  the  economic  value  of  the  course  the
Student  follows.  This  does  not  mean  that  all  professions  and  other  endeavors
  are  not  necessary  to  our  social  organization,  but  the  cash  value
of  the  education  received  varies  depending  on  the  subjects  pursued.
According  to  the  theory  of  dual  benefit  in  higher  education,  the  next
step  is  to  find  the  ratio  of  benefit  as  between  society  and  the  individual,
and  also  the  difference  which  exists  in  this  ratio  in  the  various  schools
or  professions.  The  latter  should  be  based  on  the  cost  to  the  Institution
of  giving  education  and  the  cash  value  of  that  education  to  the  recipient.
The  finding  of  this  ratio  and  the  allocation  of  educational  costs  accordingly,
would  seem  to  be  the  starting  point  for  the  readjustment  of  College  and
university  finance  under  our  present  social  and  economic  organization.

The  Problem  of  Cost  Allocation
The  views  set  forth  above  are  illustrative  of  the  cross  currents  of
thought  that  exist  among  those  who  direct  the  financial  policies  of  higher
education.  The  reasons  for  the  divergent  views  are  obvious.  They  are
due  to  the  failure  to  take  a  long  ränge  view  of  higher  learning  and  the
failure  to  recognize  the  changing  aims,  or  purposes,  which  come  about  due
to  a  changing  social,  political,  and  economic  society.  Notice  has  not  been
taken  of  the  facts  that  in  some  fields  of  learning  the  political  motive,  in
others  the  cultural,  and  in  many  more,  the  economic  predominates;  that  in
most  fields  of  learning  all  three  are  present  in  varying  degrees  and  costs
should  be  allöcated  proportionately.  The  financial  house  of  higher  education ­
  needs  to  be  constantly  remodeled  to  meet  our  changing  economic
and  social  conditions.  This  readjustment  should  necessarily  Start  from
the  ratio  of  benefits  received  by  the  parties  concerned.  Just  how  such  a
ratio  can  be  established  and  costs  allöcated  accordingly  is  the  next  question
  to  be  determined.
        <pb n="49" />
        50

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

Arriving  At  the  Ratio
In  attempting  to  find  this  ratio  for  the  allocation  of  costs,  it  is
important  to  refrain  from  making  too  minute  divisions.  Classifying  the
aims  or  motives  of  higher  education  into  three  major  divisions  should
enable  us  to  arrive  at  the  part  of  the  total  cost  the  Student  should  bear
and  then  to  develop  a  policy  of  Student  financing  that  will  help  him  to
meet  these  needs.
The  Present  Situation
The  present  Situation  in  the  allocation  of  costs  may  be  represented
as  in  Diagram  I.  It  may  be  seen  that  the  individual  is  furnishing  slightly
more  than  one-fourth  of  the  total  cost  of  maintaining  higher  education,
or  approximately  $100,000,000.  Society,  on  the  other  hand,  is  furnishing
less  than  one-third  of  the  total  cost,  about  $135,000,000;  and  philanthropy
contributes  nearly  one-half  of  the  total  amount,  or  approximately  $200,-000,000.

In  Diagram  I,  which  represents  the  total  field  of  higher  educational
finance,  it  may  be  further  observed  that  the  three  main  purposes  or  aims
for  which  higher  education  exists  are  represented  as  equal,  each  receiving
  one-third  of  the  total  financial  support  which  goes  to  this  branch
of  learning.  This  is  but  a  rough  estimate  and  would,  no  doubt,  be  modified
considerably  if  it  were  possible  to  secure  accurate  data  on  the  matter.
However,  such  estimates  are  of  Service  as  a  basis  for  further  thought  and
study.
The  line  XY  divides  the  field  of  higher  educational  finance  into  two
parts,  one  of  which  is  given  to  the  dissemination  of  learning  and  the  other
to  the  advancement  of  learning,  as  the  diagram  indicates.  This  constitutes
  the  fourth  plane  from  the  standpoint  of  the  diagram.  The  first,
is  the  total  field  of  higher  educational  finance;  the  second,  the  same
divided  into  its  sources  of  support;  the  third,  the  field  again  divided  into
the  purposes  or  aims  toward  which  the  expenditures  are  made;  and  the
fourth,  divides  the  field  again  into  two  parts,  one  of  which  is  for  the  dissemination ­
  of  learning  and  the  other  for  the  advancement  of  learning.
It  may  be  observed  that  no  account  is  taken  at  present  of  the  difference
  in  relationship  as  between  purpose  and  support  of  higher  education.
Purposes  or  aims  have  no  influence  on  cost  (in  most  institutions)  and
there  is  no  distinction  made  as  to  how  much  should  be  expended  in  the
dissemination  of  learning  and  how  much  on  the  advancement  of  learning.
Money  is  being  spent  for  both,  but  without  any  definite  plan  based  on  an
intelligent  estimation  of  what  share  of  the  available  funds  each  should
receive  and  to  what  fields  of  learning  these  funds  should  be  applied.  In
        <pb n="50" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educationar  Finance

51

D/HOE4M  /
T//E  EÖUECES  OE  EETE/VDE  AND  THE  ASSt/MED
EXEEAVD/TDEED  ED/?  E/EEEE  EDECAT/O/V
/924  -Z925
        <pb n="51" />
        52

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

short,  it  appears  as  if  matters  have  been  in  an  unconscious  state  of  drifting
  and  as  a  result  some  branches  of  learning  have  leaped  far  ahead  of
others  and  money  has  been  used  to  disseminate  knowledge  in  some  quarters
  long  outworn  by  changing  conditions  whereas  a  larger  proportion  of
the  funds  available  should  have  been  spent  to  advance  knowledge  in  that
field.  It  is  urgent  that  we  study  carefully  the  relative  importance  of  the
different  fields  of  learning  and  ascertain  the  proper  source  for  financial
support  of  each.  That  is,  there  is  needed  a  redistribution  of  emphasis
in  learning  and  the  advancement  of  knowledge.  This  having  been  done,
a  reapportionment  of  costs  should  be  made  accordingly.
Basis  for  Cost  Allocation
Diagram  I  shows  roughly  how  the  allocation  of  costs  is  now  made  in
most  institutions.  Diagram  II,  following,  shows  a  basis  from  which  a
Start  could  be  made  for  a  more  ideal  System  of  cost  allocation.  It  is  not
proposed  as  a  final  solution  of  the  problem  of  allocation  of  cost,  but
rather  as  a  basis  for  further  thought  and  discussion.  With  such  a  policy
higher  education  could  be  placed  on  a  sound  financial  basis.  It  is  reasonable
  to  suppose  that  philanthropy  will  still  continue  to  give  higher  education ­
  as  much  support  as  it  has  heretofore.  Society  could  then  be  asked
to  match  philanthropy  which  would  mean  that  $200,000,000  should  have
been  forthcoming  from  this  source  in  1924-1925  instead  of  only  $135,-000,000.
  Philanthropy  and  society  together  would  have  furnished  $400,-000,000
  in  1924-1925.  According  to  the  proportions  set  down  in  Diagram
II  the  Student  would  be  asked  to  match  both  philanthropy  and  society.
His  share  would  be  $400,000,000  as  of  1924-1925,  making  the  total  income
for  higher  education  in  1925  $800,000,000  instead  of  $435,000,000.  To
sum  up:  philanthropy  would  continue  to  give  an  increasing  amount  of
money  to  higher  education,  society  would  at  least  match  it,  and  the
recipient  of  the  education  would  match  both  philanthropy  and  society.
In  this  way  higher  education  could  broaden  in  scope  and  push  forward
more  rapidly  into  both  the  old  fields  and  new  fields  of  knowledge.
In  Diagram  II,  the  whole  field  of  higher  education  is  represented  by
ABCD.  This  is  then  divided  into  three  equal  parts,  one  part  assigned
to  each  of  the  three  major  purposes  or  aims:  ABFH  to  the  political,
FHRK  to  the  cultural,  and  RKCD  to  the  economic.  The  field  is  again
divided  into  three  parts,  representing  the  proportion  of  the  cost  each  of
the  three  major  financial  sources  should  bear.  This  division  assigns  one
half  of  the  expenses  to  the  Student,  ACD  :  one  fourth  to  society,  AED:  and
the  other  fourth  to  philanthropy,  EBD.  The  last,  philanthropy  in  higher
education,  should  be  devoted  in  the  main  to  the  advancement  of  learning,
excepting  the  small  portion  EXT  which  should  be  given  to  the  dissemi-
        <pb n="52" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

53

D/AGPAM  I
//YP0T//P  T/CAL  ALLGCAT/O/V  OP  7PP  SW/PCPS’
OP  PPPPMi/P  AMD  OP  TA/JET  PXPPMD/  TU  REO
PO/?  P/OP£P  PDUCAT/OM
        <pb n="53" />
        54

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

nation  of  political  knowledge.  The  other  three  fourths  AECD  which
should  be  supported  by  society  and  the  Student  should  be  devoted  to  the
dissemination  of  learning,  excepting  a  small  portion  YTD,  which  should
go  toward  the  advancement  of  learning.  We  admit  here  that  an  arbitrary
Start  is  being  made,  but  only  such  an  arbitrary  start  as  can  be  readjusted.
If,  as  our  information  on  the  subject  increases  and  experiments  warrant,
too  large  a  portion  of  the  intellectual  endeavor  is  being  given  to  any  one
of  the  purposes,  the  lines  FH  or  RK  or  both  can  be  shifted.  This  also
applies  tö  the  other  lines:  AD  can  be  moved  at  its  A  end  towards  F  or
towards  E  and  ED  can  be  moved  at  its  E  end  towards  A  or  towards  B.
As  it  is  found  necessary  to  give  more  attention  to  the  different  purposes,
a  new  proportion  of  the  field  of  intellectual  endeavor  can  be  assigned  to
them,  and  as  it  is  found  more  advisable  to  give  more  attention  to  advancement ­
  of  learning  or  dissemination  of  learning,  the  line  XY  may  be
shifted,  and,  as  such  shifts  are  made,  the  three  major  sources  of  income
should  be  tapped  proportionately.

Reasons  for  Such  Allocations
The  question  which  arises  here  is  why  these  proportions  are  taken
as  a  basis.  The  reasons  are,  first,  that  the  proportions  are  not  meant  to
be  fixed,  but  adjustable,  and  so  can  be  adapted  to  changing  circumstances
and  the  type  of  the  institution  and  thus  form  a  permanent  basis  for  policy
and  action.  Second,  these  proportions  as  represented  are  believed  to  be
fair  approximations  of  ideal  conditions  and  in  fact  approach  existing
conditions  in  some  institutions.  Advancement  of  learning  has  been  given
mainly  to  philanthropy,  since,  if  left  to  the  individual,  little  progress  could
be  made  because  of  the  increased  cost  of  the  development  of  information
due  to  actual  cost  of  apparatus  and  salaries,  and  also,  because  as  our
society  becomes  more  complex,  there  are  more  fields  that  require  intellectual ­
  attention  and  inquiry.  In  a  more  intricate  society,  methods  of
inquiry  become  more  costly  and  therefore  more  money  must  be  spent
to  obtain  accurate  knowledge. 25  The  share  of  society  has  been  assigned
mostly  to  the  dissemination  of  learning  since  society  cannot  always  be
relied  upon  to  promote  the  advancement  of  learning  where  social  and
economic  factors  are  pitted  against  each  other  in  rivalry  and  such  rivalry
25  W.  C.  Mitchell  in  “Quantitative  Analysis  in  Economic  Theory”  American  Economic
Review,  March  1925,  p.  2,  in  speaking  of  the  increased  cost  of  the  acqui'sition  of  economic,  knowledge ­
  (and  it  should  be  true  of  any  other  fields,  especially  those  with  a  political  purpose)  says  in  part:
“*  *  *  prospects  are  improving.  One  of  the  chief  obstacles  in  the  way  of  quantitative ­
  analysis  in  economics  has  been  the  heavy  bürden  of  routine  labor  involved.  A  qualitative ­
  worker  requires  hardly  any  equipment  beyond  a  few  books  and  hardly  any  helper  except
a  typist.  A  quantitative  worker  needs  often  a  Statistical  laboratory,  a  corps  of  Computers,
and  sometimes  a  staff  of  field  workers.  Few  economists  command.  such  resources.  But  of
late  the  endowment  of  economic  research  has  begun  on  a  scale  which  reduced  this  handicap
upon  quantitative  research  and  promises  to  reduce  it  further  in  the  future.”
        <pb n="54" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

55

manifests  itself  in  politics.  It  is  impossible  to  get  a  wise  distribution  of
funds  among  the  various  fields  of  learning  because  of  group  interests  in
control  of  the  public  purse.

The  Individual
The  individual  in  our  ideal  scheme  is  asked  to  bear  practically  twothirds
  of  the  cost  of  the  dissemination  of  knowledge  and  one-half  of  the
cost  of  higher  education,  because  he  can  hardly  receive  less  than  half  of
the  benefits  which  such  trainiug  has  in  störe  for  him,  taking  education  as  a
whole.  If  the  training  is  in  dentistry  or  in  business,  the  individual  is  the
recipient  of  practically  all  benefits  and  so  such  training  should  be  placed
near  the  CD  line  in  Diagram  II,  which  shows  that  the  individual  pays
practically  the  entire  cost.  In  the  case  of  knowledge  with  a  political
purpose  the  individual  should  pay  very  little,  society  a  large  part,  and
much  of  the  income  from  philanthropy  should  be  at  present  spent  on  the
advancement  of  learning  in  such  fields.  The  political  organization  of
society  has  lagged  far  behind  the  cultural  and  economic;  therefore,  most
of  the  efforts  of  philanthropy  should  be  directed  toward  the  advancement ­
  of  learning  in  fields  of  political  knowledge.  In  the  wild  dash  for
economic  conquest,  the  political  and  social  organization  has  been  left  in
the  background  without  a  sufficient  amount  of  new  knowledge  to  be  used
as  a  guide. 26  Philanthropy  having  furnished  the  knowledge  in  political
fields,  society  should  bear  the  largest  share  of  the  cost  of  dissemination
since  the  benefit  to  be  derived  from  the  dissemination  of  political  knowledge ­
  is  largely  social.  Only  in  so  far  as  such  learning  has  a  slight  element
of  cultural  or  economic  benefit  to  the  individual  should  he  pay  for  it
directly.
That  knowledge  which  is  acquired  for  cultural  purposes  should  in
large  part  be  paid  for  by  the  individual.  Society  should  pay  a  fair  portion
  of  it  as  long  as  the  belief  continues  that  the  greater  number  of  cultured
individuals  there  are,  the  better  off  society  will  be.  Philanthropy  must
come  in  to  advance  knowledge  of  this  kind  because  society  collectively  and
the  individual  have  a  natural  tendency  to  be  dominated  by  economic
motives.  In  order  to  maintain  culture  therefore  philanthropy  must  preserve
  it  and  place  it  on  the  intellectual  market  at  a  reasonable  price,  thus
making  it  available  for  a  sufficiently  large  number  of  people.
20  Mr.  William  S.  Culbertson  says  on  this  point:  “The  conceptions  of  political  and  social
control  prevailing  in  Western  States  today  are,  if  not  Aristotelian,  at  least  those  of  the  eighteenth
Century.  The  material  progress  of  Western  civilization  has  been  effected  at  an  unprecedented  rate
and  is  still  rushing  forth  to  new  conquests.  Eiving  in  a  new  material  world,  we  lack  a  Science
of  government  capable  of  Controlling  lts  destructive  tendencies  or  of  turning  its  achievements  to
social  ends.”  International  Economic  Policies,  pp.  8-9.
        <pb n="55" />
        56

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

Knowledge  with  an  Economic  Purpose
The  third  division  is  knowledge  with  an  economic  purpose  which
primarily  benefits  the  individual  who  possesses  it.  Knowledge  of  such  a
nature,  whether  possessed  by  an  individual  or  Organization  has  a  commercial
  value  and  so  its  full  cost  should  be  paid  for  by  the  recipient.
Philanthropy  and  society  should  bear  only  that  portion  of  the  cost  of  such
knowledge  as  to  cover  only  that  part  of  it  which  is  cultural  and  political.
Business  organizations  can  be  depended  upon  to  furnish  the  funds  for  the
advancement  of  economic  knowledge,  and  society  and  philanthropy  can
organize  such  knowledge  in  suitable  form  to  be  placed  on  the  intellectual
market  for  the  individual  at  practically  the  full  cost.  Again,  it  must  be
realized  that  none  of  the  dividing  lines  are  hard  and  fast;  that  there  will
necessarily  be  some  overlapping;  that  different  fields  of  learning  will  have
to  be  assigned  to  relative  positions;  and  that  there  will  have  to  be  further
allocation  within  each  of  the  three  sources  of  income.
The  Share  of  Philanthropy
The  distribution  of  the  share  which  philanthropy  bears  will  necessarily
be  determined  by  the  conditions  imposed  in  restricted  endowments  and
gifts.  But  with  definite  financial  policies  the  funds  forthcoming  from
philanthropy  should  increase  if  they  are  guided  into  the  proper  channels
where  their  assistance  is  most  needed  and  where  the  greatest  benefits  will
be  derived.  A  certain  donor  in  a  recent  conversation  has  said:
Institutions  of  higher  learning  must  not  come  to  me  for  funds  until
they  can  show  a  wiser  use  and  more  eflicient  way  of  administering  the  funds
they  already  have.
The  Share  of  Society
In  the  interest  of  social  justice  there  must  be  a  reapportioning  of  taxes
for  higher  education.
If  the  educational  reformer  will  become  for  a  time  a  Student  of  taxation
and  finance,  the  path  will  be  cleared.  The  continued  reliance  upon  outworn
methods,  the  old  shibboleth-like  increase  of  assessments,  equalization  of
property  and  the  like  are  in  vain.  The  first  condition  of  progress  is  an
appreciation  of  the  real  secret  of  the  present  failure. 17
The  program  includes  two  remedies,  one  economic  and  the  other  political, ­
  which  means  the  development  of  a  fiscal  System  that  will  respond  to
modern  needs  and  that  will  tap  the  resources  of  the  community  according
to  the  relative  ability  of  the  individuals  and  an  apportionment  among  these
individuals  in  accordance  with  benefits  derived  from  the  existence  of  insti-  27
27  E.  R.  A.  Seligman,  “The  Financing  of  Education,”  Educational  Administration  and  Supervision, ­
  Vol.  8,  p.  456,  November,  1922.
        <pb n="56" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

57

tutions  of  higher  learning  in  the  community.  It  should  include  taxation  of
individual  incomes,  taxation  of  business,  and  taxation  of  inheritance. 28
This  method,  though  not  ideal,  is  a  better  way  of  calling  on  the  public  to
shoulder  its  share  than  the  one  in  use  at  present  since  it  embraces  both  the
principles  of  ability  to  pay  and  benefits  derived.  It  should  at  least  be  a
great  improvement  upon  methods,  in  vogue  in  many  States  today,  supported
by  arguments  no  longer  substantiated  by  existing  conditions.
The  Share  of  the  Student
As  the  share  of  society  must  be  reapportioned,  so  too  the  share  of  the
Student  must  be  reapportioned  within  the  Student  body.  It  is  folly  to  charge
a  flat  rate  for  all  courses.  The  greater  economic  benefit  which  the  individual ­
  derives  from  certain  courses  should  be  taken  into  consideration  and
charges  made  accordingly.  Not  only  the  cash  value  of  a  College  education
should  be  studied,  but  also  the  difference  in  cash  value  of  training
received  in  the  various  schools  within  the  university.  The  findings  should
then  be  used  as  a  basis  for  future  charges.  Some  of  the  institutions  have
already  realized  that  there  exists  a  different  economic  advantage  from  following
  certain  lines  of  study  and  have  adjusted  their  tuition  charges  accordingly. ­
  The  data  in  the  previous  chapter,  however,  show  that  further
adjustments  are  needed.  It  must  be  determined  what  portion  of  a  course
serves  the  public  purpose,  what  portion  serves  the  cultural  purpose,  and
what  portion  serves  the  economic  purpose  and  the  allocation  of  costs  made
to  these  various  sources  proportionately.
The  Results
What  would  naturally  be  the  results  of  such  cost  allocations?
1.  It  would  place  higher  education  on  a  sounder  financial  basis  by
balancing  costs  of  certain  educational  efforts  against  specific  sources  of
income.  This  would  enable  those  seeking  funds,  public  or  private,  to  give
specific  reasons  for  asking  for  aid  and  to  point  to  definite  benefits  which
such  funds  would  produce.  Individuals  and  legislatures  would  be  more
willing  to  help  higher  education  if  they  could  be  shown  how  and  along
what  lines  the  money  would  be  used  instead  of  just  receiving  an  appeal
for  funds  to  balance  the  entire  College  budget.  The  allocation  of  costs
as  shown  above  should  enable  an  institution  to  ascertain  what  amount  of
money  is  needed  to  carry  out  definite  ends.  This  having  been  determined,
those  in  control  of  the  sources  of  support  applicable  to  the  ends  could
then  be  approached  with  defensible  arguments.  Such  an  appeal  would  be

Ibid.,  p.  456
        <pb n="57" />
        58

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

stronger  than  the  arguments  for  educational  support  in  general,  because
it  would  show  definitely  what  was  to  be  accomplished,  what  interests  were
to  be  served,  and  who  was  to  be  benefited.  A  financial  program  of  this
kind  might  enable  higher  education  to  receive  support  commensurable
with  its  importance.  The  importance  of  higher  education  must  not  be
minimized,  for  the  day  is  not  far  off  when  a  nation’s  greatness  will  be
measured  by  the  hundreds  of  millions  it  spends  for  education  rather
than  by  the  millions  spent  for  the  maintenance  of  armies  and
navies. 29  If  business  methods  were  used  in  the  handling  of  educational
funds  and  if  its  support  were  sought  on  a  definite  basis  of  what  it  produces
rather  than  the  indefinite  basis  of  “benefits  to  society”  and  the  sentimental ­
  basis  of  “loyalty  to  one’s  Alma  Mater”  the  necessary  funds  would
be  obtainable.  It  would  mean  a  more  efficient  way  of  administering  funds
and  a  more  business-like  way  of  securing  the  necessary  financial  support
to  carry  out  the  various  purposes  and  aims  of  higher  education.
An  editorial  in  the  Educational  Review  on  “Costs  of  Higher  Education” ­
  referring  to  money  spent  for  this  purpose  states  : 30
While  the  amounts  of  money  appropriated  or  received  from  private
sources  for  education,  especially  higher  education,  have  increased,  the  needs
have  outrun  them  by  leaps  and  bounds,  and  accomplishment  seems  to  be
lagging  far  behind  opportunity.  It  is  doubtful  whether  the  Situation  can
be  possibly  met  merely  by  increased  endowments  and  appropriations.  Essential ­
  as  these  needs  are,  alone,  and  unaided  by  intelligent  management,  they
will  scarcely  serve.  The  economy  that  is  demanded  of  many  citizens  in
business  and  in  private  matters  is  no  less  needed  in  public  affairs  and  of  all
concerns  of  the  public  the  need  is  probably  the  greatest  in  higher  education.
We  cannot  continue  in  the  vicious  circle  of  constantly  striving  to  increase
academic  income  to  keep  pace  with  the  diminishing  value  of  the  dollar.  The
real  remedv  must  be  found  in  a  wiser  use  of  educational  funds.  Questions
of  wastefulness  and  duplication  are  not  confined  to  any  part  of  the  country;
the  need  of  an  economy  in  higher  education  is  everywhere  urgent.  All  institutions
  seeking  the  support  of  public  and  private  wealth,  especially  in  this
period  of  unprecedented  expansion  and  high  prices,  should  satisfy  both
themselves  and  others  that  their  existing  means  are  being  used  to  the  best
advantage.  Only  thus  can  further  stewardship  be  justified,  when  financial
demands  are  everywhere  so  large  and  insistent.
2.  Proper  cost  allocation  would  advance  the  educational  ends  of  institutions
  by  making  larger  funds  available  for  the  carrying  on  of  intellectual
endeavors  rather  than  having  the  intellectual  accomplishments  await  the
proper  financial  support.  Intellectual  activity  and  aims  of  institutions
would  be  less  dependent  upon  financial  strategy.  A  reversal  of  present
financial  policies  is  needed  in  Order  that  we  may  realize  from  the  untapped
sources  of  support  for  higher  education.
3.  Such  cost  allocations  would  mean  higher  tuition  and  fees,  which
present  a  perplexing  but  not  insurmountable  problem.  Having  decided

29  Seligman,  Op.  Cit.,  p.  450.
30  September,  1920,  pp.  173-176.
        <pb n="58" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

59

that  increased  tuition  and  fees  are  advisable  in  the  interest  of  higher  learning,
  what  reasons  can  be  advanced  for  the  carrying  out  of  such  a  policy
which  at  first  seems  inhuman  and  hard-hearted  ?  To  refuse  to  assist  the
young  person  to  “get  on  his  feet”  so  to  speak,  is  strictly  against  tradition
and  sentiment,  but  if  kept  within  reason  it  is  not  against  common  sense
and  clear  thinking.  The  task  should  not  be  made  so  difficult  that  the
Student  will  give  up,  but  sufficiently  difficult  to  make  him  appreciate  the
value  of  the  training  he  is  getting.  The  fact  that  he  has  been  paying
full  price  for  his  clothing  and  amusements  has  caused  him  to  give  no
less  attention  to  these  elements  of  his  College  life.  A  higher  price  for  the
academic  element  ought  not  to  lessen  his  zeal  for  it.  It  is  contrary  to
common  sense  to  have  the  Student  pay  full  price  for  everything  in  his
College  life  except  that  which  should  be  the  most  important  to  him
—his  intellectual  training.  In  speaking  on  the  cost  of  education  to  the
individual,  Dr.  Thwing  says:
There  is  a  fear  among  certain  College  people  in  America  that  the  race
of  rieh  men  will  die  out,  that  they  will  be  unable  to  give  in  large  sums.  For
one,  I  do  not  so  believe.  New  sources  of  revenue  are  to  be  discovered.  ‘New
forces  of  Nature  are  to  be  discovered.  The  creation  of  power  through  the
tides,  the  making  of  nitrogen  from  the  air,  and  new  sources  for  electricity
will  be  conditions  out  of  which  riches  will  be  earned  in  the  future.’  In
securing  larger  revenues  for  the  private  institutions,  the  movement  is  strong
in  charging  a  higher  price  for  tuition.  Fees  have  been  greatly  increased..  Such
merease  is  proper.  Distinction  should  be  made  between  the  fee  to  be  paid  in  the
undergraduate  College  of  liberal  learning  and  in  the  Professional  school.  Although
  students  do  not  enter  the  Professional  schools  in  order  to  become  rieh;
yet  the  Professional  school  is  a  tool  which  immediately  fits  them  for  self-support
  and  for  aiding  the  community.  The  undergraduate  College  has  for  its  purpose
  the  enlarging  of  the  mind  and  sympathies  of  the  graduate.  It  has  a
pecuniary  value  of  course—and  a  great  pecuniary  value.  But  this  value  is
not  so  significant  as  found  in  the  case  of  the  Professional  school  of  medicine
or  law.  Professional  education,  in  money,  is  extremely  costly.  It  is  now
costing  the  university  seventeen  hundred  dollars  ($1,700)  for  this  year  (1920-21)
  to  educate  each  of  its  students  in  the  medical  school,  for  which  the
Student  is  paying  two  hundred  dollars.  The  undergraduate  cost  is  four
hundred  dollars,  and  the  Student  pays  less  than  two  hundred  dollars.  The
endeavor  for  the  better  endowment  of  the  College  should  be  constant,  and
the  endeavor  also  for  the  Student  to  pay  as  large  a  share  for  his  education
as  possible  should  be  continued. 81
The  idea  here  is  not  necessarily  to  have  the  Student  pay  the  full
cost  of  his  education,  but  the  full  cost  of  that  portion  of  it  which  is  of
positive  benefit  to  himself  and  brings  a  direct  commercial  return  to  him.
No  argument  can  be  raised  against  such  a  policy  except  doubtful  and  false
sentiment  and  arguments  based  on  false  concepts.  All  other  products
which  an  individual  purchases  must  be  paid  for  at  full  value.  No  exception
  must  be  made  with  training  which  should  be  the  most  highly  prized  of
all  products.
31  C.  F.  Thwing,  ‘'Support  of  Higher  Fducation”  in  School  and  Society,  March  19,  1921,
pp.  356-7.
        <pb n="59" />
        60

A  Study  of  Student  Loans

The  objection  will  be  made  in  some  quarters  that  such  a  policy  would
make  it  impossible  for  the  less  well-to-do  Student  to  receive  a  higher  education.
  There  is  no  foundation  for  this.  The  policy  here  advocated  would
add  relatively  little  to  the  student’s  annual  expenses  and  the  desirable
Student  would  be  able  to  meet  these  additional  expenses  if  a  well  worked-out
program  for  aid  to  students  were  installed.  The  means  for  Student  aid  are
many  at  present  and  new  ones  can  be  devised.  For  instance,  a  higher  education
  is  the  only  product  having  a  commercial  value  which  has  not  availed
itself  of  the  opportunities  offered  by  the  modern  institution  of  credit.  The
type  of  enrollment  need  not  be  changed  by  increased  tuition  and  fees  if,
at  the  time  such  a  policy  is  introduced,  a  well  worked-out  plan  of  Student
assistance  is  put  into  Operation.
At  some  institutions  it  is  believed  that  with  a  sufificient  amount  of
endowments  and  a  limited  enrollment,  the  financial  ills  will  have  been  done
away  with  and  tuition  can  be  kept  at  a  fixed  and  nominal  level.  This  is,  no
doubt,  a  very  sound  view  and  perhaps  one  which  should  be  adopted  for
both  financial  and  educational  reasons.  But  the  fact  remains  that  there  is
a  growing  number  of  young  people  seeking  a  College  and  university  education
  who  must  be  cared  for.  This  is  necessary  in  the  interest  of  the
advancement  of  learning  and  a  progressive  society.  As  the  economic,
political,  and  cultural  phases  of  our  civilization  grow  and  become  more
complex,  there  will  be  need  of  an  increasing  number  of  trained  individuals
who  will  seek  to  understand  the  guiding  principles  of  our  civilization;  and
thus  be  in  a  position  to  direct  human  endeavor  accordingly.  The  increase
in  the  absolute  number  of  College  trained  people  is  not  the  criterion  of
sound  policy,  but  the  proportion  of  the  population  which  is  receiving  a
College  education  must  be  used  as  a  measure  to  determine  whether  institutions ­
  of  higher  learning  are  leading  civilization  or  merely  following  it.
It  is  the  common  error  of  thinking  in  absolute  terms  rather  than  in  terms
of  ratios.
If  the  institutions  of  higher  learning  now  in  existence  close  their
doors  against  the  increasing  numbers  that  seek  admittance,  new  institutions ­
  will  have  to  be  established  and  the  same  financial  problems  will  arise.
Or,  on  the  other  hand,  large  numbers  will  fail  to  get  the  necessary  training
to  be  in  a  position  to  guide  human  efforts  and  instead  of  progress,  Stagnation ­
  and  retardation  will  set  in.  It  is  therefore  a  problem  which  must  be
confronted  and  means  devised  to  solve  it.
        <pb n="60" />
        CHAPTER  IV

THE  STUDENT  AS  A  FINANCIAL  RISK
Education  as  a  Commercial  Venture
No  well  worked-out  policy  for  the  administration  of  Student  loans
can  be  arrived  at  without  examining  the  value  of  an  education  to  the  individual. ­
  The  easiest  way  to  measure  values  is,  of  course,  in  terms  of
money,  and  this  is  the  value  which  is  of  greatest  concern  to  those  making
the  loans.  In  a  general  way  it  may  be  said  that  no  bank  or  financial  house
of  any  kind  will  make  a  loan  without  some  estimate  of  the  ability  of  the
borrower  to  repay.  This  ability  is  measured  by  the  increased  earning
capacity  of  the  individual  or  Corporation  due  to  the  loan.  The  size  and
length  of  the  loan  is  proportioned  to  the  earning  capacity  of  the  concern
and  its  business  turnover.  Carrying  these  elementary  principles  of  lending
over  to  student  loans,  it  would  seem  that  the  amount  which  is  to  be  loaned
to  a  Student  and  the  length  of  time  of  the  loan  are  to  be  measured  by  the  cash
value  of  the  education  he  is  to  receive  and  how  soon  it  will  make  financial
returns  to  him.  When  a  bank  loans  to  the  XYZ  Corporation  it  has  a  fairly
accurate  estimate  of  the  additional  profits  which  this  loan  will  enable  the
XYZ  Corporation  to  make.  So,  too,  when  money  is  loaned  to  a  Student,
some  estimate  should  be  made  as  to  the  additional  earning  capacity  which
the  Student  will  receive  from  such  a  loan—or  the  cash  value  of  his  education. ­
  Care  must  be  taken,  however,  not  to  weigh  the  loan  against  the  entire
cash  value  of  the  education,  for  the  student  is  investing  other  funds  besides
what  he  borrows,  and  in  addition  to  this,  four  years  of  his  time  which
in  itself  has  a  monetary  consideration.
The  Cash  Value
The  cash  value  of  a  College  education  has  been  estimated  at  various
times  by  different  people.  The  most  careful  studies  are  perhaps  the  one
made  by  Dean  Lord  of  Boston  University  and  the  one  made  at  Northwestern ­
  University.  These  studies,  though  not  intended  at  the  time  as
a  basis  for  making  loans,  form  a  good  background  for  this  discussion.
Let  it  be  understood  that  each  university  would  have  to  make  such  a  study
for  its  own  use.  There  are  good  reasons  to  believe  that  the  cash  value
of  a  College  education  differs  in  the  various  institutions.  It  also  differs
in  the  several  schools  within  the  Institution  and  again  with  individuals.
  There  may  be  assigned,  therefore,  four  elements  which  go  to
make  up  the  cash  value  of  a  student’s  education:  (1)  the  individual,  (2)
the  field  of  learning,  (3)  the  Institution,  (4)  the  opportunities  which
[61]
        <pb n="61" />
        62

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

present  themselves  after  the  Student  graduates.  The  first  can  be  measured
by  an  estimation  of  personal  qualities,  the  second  and  third  by  past  experience
  of  the  graduates  of  the  Institution,  and  the  fourth  by  relying  on
averages.
It  is  not  a  simple  process  to  arrive  at  the  cash  value  of  a  College
education.  The  efforts  made  by  Dean  Everett  W.  Eord  of  Boston
University  and  those  made  by  statisticians  at  Northwestern  University
are  worthy  of  note  at  this  point.
In  Diagram  III  and  the  accompanying  explanation,  the  cash  value  of  a
College  education  is  placed  at  $72,000.  The  study  made  at  Northwestern
University  in  1913  places  it  at  $24,080. 30 .
The  manner  in  which  Dean  Lord  arrived  at  his  figures  can  best  be
told  in  his  own  words:
These  statistics,  as  indicated  in  the  note  on  the  following  sheet,  are
based  on  reports  of  the  Massachusetts  Department  of  Labor  and  Industry
and  on  statistics  of  earnings  of  students  and  graduates  of  the  College  of
Business  Administration  of  Boston  University,  the  latter  figures  compared
with,  and  to  some  extent  adjusted  by,  similar  reports  from  other  institutions.
The  Statement  carried  by  the  Associated  Press,  and  published  in  many  newspapers
  that  the  figures  are  ‘based  on  a  lengthy  study  of  the  earning  capacity
of  College  students’  will  then  be  seen  to  have  been  slightly  exaggerated.  I
believe,  however,  that  the  figures  will  be  found  reasonably  accurate  in  application
  to  College  graduates  in  general,  and  decidedly  conservative  in  relation
to  graduates  of  Colleges  of  business  administration.
Fig.  1,  The  Earnings  of  the  Untrained  Man,  based  almost  entirely  upon
statistics  published  by  the  Massachusetts  Department  of  Labor  and  Industry,
safely  represents  conditions  in  this  state.  It  is  probably  a  fair  representation
  of  conditions  elsewhere.
The  estimate  made  by  Northwestern  University  was  determined  in
the  following  manner:
In  1913  a  census  of  the  dass  of  1903  was  taken  by  statisticians  of
Northwestern  for  purposes  of  computing  the  worth  in  money  of  higher
education.  This  dass  was  taken  because  it  had  nearly  ten  years  “to  get
shaken  down”  and  to  realize  the  permanent  value  of  things  acquired  in
College.
Ist  five  years  after  graduation,  average  earning  power  $1,867
2nd  “  “  “  “  “  “  “  1,862
The  National  Census  Bureau  gives  the  annual  yearly  income  of  the
Chicago  salaried  man  during  that  period  at  $1,200;  $1,862  minus  $1,200
equals  $662  annual  cash  value;  40  times  $662  equals  $26,480,  forty  years
being  a  fair  estimate  of  a  man’s  productive  activity  after  he  leaves  College.
Deducting  cost  of  four  years  College  course  ($2,400):  $26,480  minus
$2,400  equals  $24,080  which  is  the  net  value  of  the  “sheepskin”,  so  to
speak.

30  “Educational  Values”,  Dial,  July  1,  1913.
        <pb n="62" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

63

Dl  AGR  AM  III'
THE  COLLEGE  OF  BUSINESS  ADMINISTRATION
OF  BOSTON  UNIVERSITY
Effect  of  Education  on  Average  Incomes  at  Different  Ages
and  Total  Life  Earnings
FiGURE  I.—The  Untrained  Man.  He  goes  to  work  as  a  boy  of  14—reaches
maximum  income  at  30,  on  the  average  less  than  $1,200.  a  year.  Since  his  income
is  largely  dependent  on  physical
strength  and  manual  dexterity,
it  falls  off  at  50  or  earlier,  to'a
poiut  below  the  level  of  seif
support.
More  than  60  out  of  every
100  untrained  workers  are  dependent ­
  upon  others  for  support
at  the  age  of  60.
Total  earnings  from  14  to  60,
about  $45,000.  Not  more  than
$2,000.  is  earned  in  the  four
years  that  would  have  given  him
a  High  School  education.
Figure  II.—The  High  School
Graduate.  He  goes  to  work  at
18,  passes  the  maximum  of  the
untrained  man  within  seven  years,
rises  steadily  to  his  own  maximum ­
  of  approximately  $2,200.
at  40,  and  continues  at  tliat  level
for  the  remainder  of  his  active
life.
Total  earnings  from  18  to
60,  about  $78,000.  The  $33,000.
more  than  that  earned  by  the
untrained  man  represents  the
cash  value  of  a  four-year  High
School  course—but  note  below
what  return  may  be  expected
from  four  years  of  Higher  Education. ­

Figure  III.—The  College  or
Technical  School  Graduate.
His  permanent  earnings  began
at  22,  although  a  considerable
amount  may  be  earned  during
the  College  course.  By  the  time  he  is  28,  his  income  equals  that  of  the  High  School
graduate  at  40,  and  it  continues  steadily  to  rise,  practically  without  a  break.
Since  his  income  is  dependent  upon  his  mental  ability  and  training  constantly
improved  by  practice,  it  increases  instead  of  diminishes  with  the  years.  The  average
of  $6,000.  at  60  is  offen  surpassed.
Total  earnings  from  22  to  60  (not  including  anything  earned  during  the  College
period),  $150,000.  The  $72,000.  more  than  that  earned  by  the  High  School  graduate
represents  the  cash  value  of  College,  or  technical  training.

1  Used  through  the  courtesy  of  Dean  Lord.
        <pb n="63" />
        64

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

Taking  into  consideration  that  these  studies  were  made  ten  years  apart
(1913  and  1924)  and  the  rise  in  incomes  since,  the  final  estimates  bear  a
close  relationship.  These  two  studies  bear  sufficient  evidence  that  a  College
education  has  a  cash  value.  This  value  is  sufficiently  important  to  be  taken
into  consideration  as  one  of  the  many  reasons  for  helping  the  Student
through  College.  However,  the  cash  value  as  set  forth  by  these  two  studies
lacks  certain  adj  ustments  which  should  be  taken  into  consideration:
1.  The  cost  of  a  College  education  includes  not  only  the  positive
expenditures,  but  what  the  Student  would  have  been  able  to  earn
if  he  had  been  engaged  in  a  remunerative  activity.
2.  There  are  not  a  few  young  men  whose  aims  and  ideals  are  so
raised  by  a  higher  education  that  they  themselves  are  rendered
much  less  efficient  as  money  rnaking  machines.  This  is  to  be  considered
  only  from  the  cash  value  standpoint  of  a  higher  education.
3.  Those  who  complete  a  College  or  university  education  are  in  most
cases  the  ones  who,  without  such  an  education,  would  have  earned
an  income  above  the  average.  The  comparison  of  a  selected  group
with  the  general  average  is  not  a  reliable  way  to  determine  this
cash  value.  It  must  be  observed,  then,  that  these  estimates  are
not  scientific  and  are  not  therefore  sufficiently  reliable  to  be  used
as  a  basis  for  credit  extension.
The  problem  of  arriving  at  the  cash  value  of  an  education  is  not  so
simple  as  the  above  studies  would  indicate.  It  should  be  determined  for
the  purpose  of  loans  in  an  entirely  different  manner.  The  earnings  of
graduates  the  first,  second,  third,  and  up  to  the  tenth  year  after  graduation
  should  be  ascertained.  This  would  be  divided  further  into  the
earnings  of  graduates  of  the  various  schools  of  learning.  A  comparison
would  then  be  made,  not  with  average  incomes,  but  with  the  incomes  of  a
group  having  the  same  ability  as  College  people;  the  difference  to  be
measured  not  being  the  ability,  but  the  difference  between  the  same  ability
when  untrained  and  trained  by  a  College  education.  A  man’s  College
training  cannot  be  considered  as  the  all  important  element  in  his  financial
success.  In  Order  to  secure  more  accurate  figures,  it  would  be  necessary
to  measure  the  amount  of  influence  which  a  higher  education  has  on  the
earning  capacity  of  an  individual.
Education  An  Investment
It  is  not  possible  to  conclude  what  the  exact  cash  value  of  an  education ­
  is,  but  it  can  be  accepted  with  certainty  that  education  has  some  cash
value.  This  value  warrants  not  only  the  loans  now  being  made  to  students,
but  loans  on  a  much  larger  scale.  If  acquiring  a  higher  education  is  the
securing  of  a  product  (training)  which  the  Student  will  later  be  able  to
“cash  in”  on,  then  there  is  as  justifiable  reason  to  secure  this  training  on
credit  as  there  is  to  buy  land,  Stocks,  bonds,  or  any  other  form  of  invest ­
        <pb n="64" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

65

ment  on  credit.  Higher  education  is  as  truly  an  investment  for  the  individual ­
  and  as  beneficial  to  the  public  as  the  buying  of  a  farm;  taking
part  in  a  cooperative  apartment  plan;  or  the  securing  of  any  other  form
of  property  on  the  installment  plan.  The  difference  lies  in  the  analysis  of
the  basis  of  credit,  and  the  method  of  payment  and  term  of  credit.
Analysis  of  Student  Credit
A  better  method  for  analyzing  this  form  of  credit  is  much  to  be
desired.  The  first  requisite  for  better  analysis  is  to  take  the  matter  out  of
the  hands  of  faculty  members  and  place  it  under  the  direct  supervision
of  the  business  officers  of  the  university.  This  Statement  is  warranted
by  past  experiences.  Where  members  of  the  faculty  are  in  authority  on
Student  loan  committees,  the  matter  has  been  handled  less  efficiently  than
when  the  business  officers  are  entirely  entrusted  with  it.  Lending  money
to  students  is  a  business  proposition  which  should  be  done  according  to
modified  business  Standards.  The  coupling  of  loans  with  the  academic
side  of  education  has  proven  unwise.  Loans  have  been  made  to  individuals
  without  due  caution  and  without  specific  terms.  Business  officers
in  most  instances  in  the  past  have  been  nothing  short  of  rubber  stamps  in
this  matter.  This  may  be  assigned  as  one  of  the  chief  reasons  for  the
unfortunate  experiences  in  the  field  of  Student  loans.  There  is  every
reason  to  believe,  and  experience  bears  out  the  fact,  that  where  loans  are
under  the  direct  supervision  of  the  business  officers,  they  are  better
administered.  The  second  step  in  this  analysis  is  to  estimate  the  individual. ­
  This  consists  of  two  parts:  present  character  and  the  promise
of  future  ability  to  “cash  in”  on  his  educational  investment.  Credit  can  be
wisely  extended  only  to  the  Student  who  can  show  some  evidence  of
reliability  and  determination  of  purpose.  His  past  record,  not  academic,
but  his  dealings  in  other  matters  is  the  fairer  basis  upon  which  to  estimate
his  reliability.  His  academic  record  is  what  keeps  him  in  or  puts  him  out
of  the  institution.  The  dass  work  is  no  accurate  measure  of  his  business
principles.  Let  the  Student  have  two  separate  and  distinct  relationships
with  the  institution:  his  academic  relationship,  which  will  be  cared  for  by
the  faculty,  and  his  business  relationship,  which  will  be  cared  for  by
the  business  officers. 81  His  academic  standing  is  of  importance,  but  this
information  can  be  made  available  to  the  business  officers  by  the  faculty
and  at  that  point  the  authority  of  the  faculty  should  cease  so  far  as  the
loan  is  concerned.
81  This  is  in  line  with  the  view  held  by  a  small  minority  of  the  men  interested  in  the
Administration  of  higher  education.  This  view  is  that  the  business  side  and  the  academic  side  of
Institution  should  be  kept  separate  and  distinct.  This  form  of  Organization  consists  of  a
Division  headed  by  a  vice-president  who  administers  the  business  side  of  the  institution;  and  a
second  division  also  headed  by  a  vice-president  who  administers  the  academic  side  of  the  institution. ­
  The  two  vice-presidents  are  then  each  fully  responsible  to  the  President  for  their  respective
or Sanizations.  The  University  of  California  is  at  present  conducted  under  a  similar  plan.
        <pb n="65" />
        66

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

The  other  factor  in  analyzing  the  Student  as  a  credit  risk  is  his  ability
to  cash  in  later.  In  extending  credit  to  an  individual  or  Corporation  the
all  important  point  is  whether  the  borrower  will  be  in  a  position  to  repay
the  loan  when  due  or  be  at  least  as  good  a  financial  risk  as  when  the  loan
was  made.  The  first,  character  and  definiteness  of  purpose,  is  but  a  basis
upon  which  to  estimate  the  second.  The  Student,  for  instance,  who  has
no  definite  plan  for  financing  himself  and  is  doing  nothing  to  help  pay
his  expenses  could  hardly  be  considered  as  a  good  risk.
Credit  As  Applied  to  Education
There  are  only  a  few  institutions  which  have  taken  over  business
credit  principles  in  the  administration  of  their  loans.  It  has  been  their
experience  that  even  though  they  were  eager  to  apply  such  principles  to
educational  credit,  it  was  not  possible  to  do  so  directly.  This  is  not
surprising.  Business  credit  methods  can  only  be  drawn  upon  in  working
out  an  educational  credit  System  and  not  applied  directly.  They  must  be
attuned  to  fit  the  purpose.  It  must  be  recognized  that  though  education
has  a  business  side,  it  also  has  the  academic  side,  which  by  its  nature
must  conform  to  other  Standards  than  those  merely  of  business.  Further,
those  seeking  educational  credit  are  young  people,  many  of  whom  have
had  few  responsibilities  and  are  not  in  an  advantageous  position  to  judge
the  future.  They  have  not  yet  learned  to  manage  their  personal  affairs.
The  Student,  therefore,  must  be  treated  differently  from  the  business
man  when  credit  is  being  extended.  But  this  treatment,  for  his  own
good,  cannot  be  lax  or  indefinite.  He  must  be  made  to  feel  the  responsibility
  he  is  undertaking  and  assisted  by  proper  administrative  methods
to  carry  out  his  contract.  The  commercial  business  methods  must  therefore ­
  be  readjusted  to  the  business  of  education;  the  analysis  of  the  risk
must  be  made  differently;  the  credit  term  must  be  longer;  the  methods
of  payment  and  collections  must  be  revamped.

Training  To  The  Student
When  credit  is  extended  to  a  Student,  the  transaction,  if  properly
administered,  has  three  values;  it  gives  him  a  valuable  business  training;
it  gives  him  a  credit  rating;  and  it  assists  him  to  make  a  good  investment.
The  average  Student  when  he  enters  College  has  had  very  little  experience
in  dealing  with  others  in  a  business  capacity.  The  institution,  therefore,
has  an  opportunity  to  give  him  a  training  in  practical  business  which  may
prove  as  valuable  to  him  as  his  academic  life.  It  follows  that  the  placing
of  Student  loans  on  a  business  basis  will  have  a  double  benefit.  It  will
give  the  Student  a  business  training  at  the  time  he  needs  it  most  and  it  will
        <pb n="66" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

67

mean  the  accommodation  of  a  larger  number  of  students  with  loans  if  the
funds  are  efficiently  administered.
The  value  of  properly  administered  loans  in  establishing  a  credit
rating  for  the  Student  is  not  to  be  overestimated.  If  he  is  made  to  meet
his  öbligations  on  time  and  in  accordance  with  his  agreement,  he  not  only
creates  for  himself  a  credit  rating,  but  comes  to  realize  the  importance  of
such  a  credit  Standing  in  his  dealings  with  others.  There  are  few  College
people  who  are  able  to  do  this  without  a  certain  amount  of  moral  pressure.
This  is  where  loans  to  students  are  bound  to  differ  somewhat  from  business
  loans.  The  Student  is  not  a  business  man  as  yet  and  therefore  must  be
assisted  to  grow  up  to  sound  business  principles  rather  than  have  these
principles  applied  to  him  directly  during  his  College  career.  This  does  not
mean  more  laxity  than  in  business,  but  a  sympathetic  sort  of  firmness.
The  third  element  of  value  which  loans  have  in  the  training  of  the
Student,  namely,  assisting  him  in  making  a  good  investment,  carries  with
it  an  economic  benefit  which  far  surpasses  the  value  of  the  loan.  The
institution  is  helping  him  to  invest  in  a  product  that  will  constantly  increase
in  value  and  which  will  net  him  not  only  cash  returns,  but  other  returns
as  well.  It  assists  him  to  make  the  best  use  of  his  time  and  trains  him
to  exchange  present  pleasures  for  greater  future  pleasures.
In  the  administration  of  Student  loans,  therefore,  the  institution  has
an  opportunity  to  render  the  Student  a  four-fold  Service:  selling  him  a
valuable  product  on  easy  terms,  making  him  realize  the  full  value  of  his
purchase,  assisting  him  to  purchase  this  product  in  an  honorable  way,  and
giving  him  a  training  in  business  methods.
Student  Security
The  administration  of  Student  loans  differs  from  commercial  loans
in  still  another  respect.  The  Student  does  not  have  a  fixed  line  of  credit,
but  has  possibilities  which  are  difficult  to  evaluate.  He  can  get  endorsements,
  but  not  always  bankable  endorsements;  he  has  no  collateral,  and
his  character  is  not  yet  definitely  formed.  Though  these  are  the  fundamentals
  of  credit,  still  the  very  foundation  of  credit  is  faith  in  another
and  this  is  the  very  element  upon  which  the  Student  can  claim  credit  and
upon  which  credit  must  be  extended  to  him.  This  is  the  one  security
which  he  has  to  offer—a  promise  to  make  good  and  not  to  break  the  trust
placed  in  him.  The  one  security,  then,  which  the  Student  has  to  offer  is
himself. 32
In  granting  credit  to  a  large  Corporation,  character  plays  a  minor  part,
the  finances  of  the  Corporation  must  be  separated  from  individualities.
32  .  .  credit  precedes  and  exists  independently  of  the  instrument;  contracts,  written  or
Pärol  (oral),  characterize  a  credit  economy  and  may  well  be  regarded  as  an  essential  attribute  of
p e djt,  but  emphasis  on  this  feature  is  likely  to  becloud  the  more  fundamental  element—confidence."
K.  B.  Westerfield,  Banking  Principles  and  Practice,  Vol.  1,  p.  36.
        <pb n="67" />
        68

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

In  the  small  business  concern  character  becomes  more  important;  a  loan  to
an  individual,  regardless  of  the  assets  he  has  at  the  time  of  the  loan,  is
based  primarily  on  character;  in  loaning  to  the  Student  character  is  the
fundamental  test.  But  it  becomes  more  than  an  estimation  of  character,
for  the  student’s  character  is  in  a  formative  period  and  so  the  loan  is  in
reality  based  upon  his  character  as  it  is  expected  to  be  rather  than  as  it
is.  This  is  what  makes  the  problem  of  Student  loans  a  unique  one.  It  may
therefore  be  said  that  the  Student  has  nothing  to  offer—not  even  character.
Business  principles  and  methods  cannot  be  applied  directly,  but  can  and
should  be  applied  in  a  modified  manner.  As  has  just  been  noted,  the
student’s  character  is  not  yet  fully  formulated,  but  with  a  careful  selection
of  the  individuals,  the  institution  can  bank  on  the  material  the  Student
has  for  the  formation  of  character.  Having  estimated  this,  it  can  then
proceed  to  advance  him  a  loan  and  administer  it  in  such  a  way  that
not  only  financial  Service  will  have  been  rendered,  but  also  a  Service  which
will  build  him  up  into  a  reliable  individual.
There  is  a  character  building  power  in  well  administered  financial
assistance  to  students  which  the  institutions  have  been  overlooking.  The
integrity  of  the  selected  Student  has  been  established  beyond  question  in  the
experience  of  institutions  and  individuals  who  have  loaned  money  to
students  on  a  quasi-business  basis. 33
Reasons  for  Lösses
Where  loans  to  students  have  been  a  partial  failure,  one  or  more  of
the  following  reasons  can  be  assigned:
1.  The  loans  have  not  been  properly  administered.
a.  Lack  of  a  definite  agreement.
&amp;amp;.  Student  was  not  made  to  realize  the  Obligation  he  was  undertaking—the
  institution  failed  to  develop  a  clear-cut  sense  of
responsibility.
c.  The  risk  was  not  properly  selected.
d.  There  were  no  systematic  collections.
e.  No  interest  or  too  low  interest.
2.  The  institution  failed  to  “see  the  student  through.”  Loans  were
made  in  the  early  part  of  the  College  career  and  additional  loans
were  refused,  which  kept  the  student  from  finishing  his  education.
3.  The  institution  missed  the  opportunity  to  use  loans  as  a  character
building  weapon. 34
33  See  article  by  Mary  B.  Brady,  “How  Students  Can  Borrow  Money  with  Character  as
Security”,  Independent,  Jan.  5.  1924.
34  “If  student  loans  are  conducted  on  a  strictly  business  basis,  their  character  building  value
may  be  many  times  greater  than  their  financial  value.  Traits  of  character  developed  and  strengthened
  as  a  result  of  receiving  such  assistance  will  do  far  more  towards  bringing  success  and
happiness  than  the  money  alone.  Self-respect  is  the  foundation  of  good  character  and  a  businesslike
  method  of  making  student  loans  fosters  this  trait.  However,  it  does  not  increase  a  student’s
self-respect  so  much  as  it  does  nothing  to  decrease  it.”
Pansy  G.  Glenn  of  Berea  College,  quoted  in  Harnion  Foundation  Bulletin,  June,  1925,  p.  1.
        <pb n="68" />
        Tiieir  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

69

Endorsements
Notwithstanding  that  it  has  just  been  pointed  out  that  the  Student
has  only  himself  to  offer,  there  are  many  institutions  which  require  different ­
  forms  of  endorsements.  These  ränge  all  the  way  from  the  endorsement
  of  a  guardian  to  bankable  collateral.  The  study  made  by  the  Student
Loan  Information  Bureau  revealed  the  following  information  on  this

Security  No.  Institutions
Note,  one  endorser  52
Personal  note  only  51
No  security  24
Note—no  endorsement  except  if  minor  8
Life  insurance  5
Unclassified  security  5
Note,  two  endorsers  4
Note,  collateral  and  endorsement  3
Note,  guardian  and  parent  guarantee  2
Bond  with  three  signatures  1
Endorsement  of  two  faculty  members  1
Life  insurance  or  real  estate  1
Bankable  note  1

It  is  difficult  to  understand  why  matters  should  be  as  they  are  and
what  value  is  to  be  derived  from  requiring  such  endorsements  and  collateral.
Where  bankable  collateral  is  required,  the  institution  is  really  rendering
the  Student  very  little  Service  unless  it  is  by  way  of  charging  him
a  lower  rate  of  interest  than  at  the  bank.  If  the  endorsement  is  that  of
a  property  holder,  it  has  value  as  security  and  in  helping  the  institution
to  form  a  judgment  of  the  borrower.  The  endorsement  by  faculty  members ­
  is  not  widely  used.  This  is  encouraging  since  such  a  practice  is
undoubtedly  unwise.  The  guardian  or  parent  guarantee  is  of  questionable
worth  even  where  the  borrower  is  a  minor.  It  shifts  the  responsibility
from  the  Student  at  a  time  when  he  should  be  acquiring  independence.
There  is  nothing  of  soundness  in  all  the  other  forms  of  guarantee  with
the  exception  of  an  endorsed  note  and  but  little  good  can  be  said  of  this.
Since  the  institutions  seldom  press  the  endorser  in  case  of  default,  the
requirement  of  such  an  endorsement  is  superficial  and  burdensome.  No
reason  can  rightfully  be  assigned  for  such  a  guarantee  since  it  is  a
foregone  conclusion  that  it  will  not  be  made  use  of.
On  the  other  hand,  it  is  harmful  in  that  it  denotes  a  lack  of  confidence
in  the  Student  and  insincerity  on  the  part  of  the  institution.  To  put  it
more  direct,  the  institution  is  simply  bluffing  the  Student.  It  is  just  as
dishonest  on  the  part  of  the  institution  to  fail  to  carry  out  parts  of  the
agreement  which  it  requires  as  it  is  for  the  Student  to  fail  to  pay  when  he
is  able  to  do  so.  This  phase  of  Student  loans  has  been  most  lacking  in
principles.  This  form  of  guarantee  is  the  most  widely  used  of  any  and,
as  presently  administered,  is  perhaps  the  most  increditable  one.
        <pb n="69" />
        70

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

The  next  most  widely  used  guarantee  is  the  personal  note  of  the
Student.  This  places  him  on  his  own  honor.  He  accepts  it  as  a  moral
Obligation  to  the  institution  and  feels  that  he  is  dealing  on  a  very
high  plane.  The  institution  places  confidence  in  him  that  spurs  him  on
to  do  the  right  thing.  If  he  fails  to  pay,  he  has  broken  a  high  trust.  This
is  a  more  powerful  and  honorable  weapon  to  hold  before  him  than  the
threat  (which  he  knows  will  not  be  carried  out)  of  collecting  from  his
endorser.  The  note  of  honor  where  properly  used  has  been  the  most
effective  way  of  administering  loans.
The  other  forms  of  guarantee  in  the  tabulation  above  are  not  in
sufficiently  wide  use  to  be  given  much  space  in  this  discussion.  The  same
objectiotis  can  be  lodged  against  a  band  with  signatures  as  against  a  bankable ­
  note.  All  such  forms  of  guarantee  are  too  burdensome  and  insincere
to  be  used  by  institutions  of  a  high  type.  Life  insurance  is  too  expensive
and  smacks  of  being  out  of  place.  It  is  good  only  in  case  of  death.  The
death  rate  among  students  is  very  low  and  it  is  extremely  questionable
whether  collections  should  be  attempted  under  such  circumstances.  The
Student  who  borrows  to  go  through  College  has  no  assets  and  a  loss  due
to  death  should  be  charged  off.  This  does  not  mean  that  young  people
should  not  be  encouraged  to  carry  insurance  when  able  to.  To  the  contrary,
  insurance  is  valuable,  but  it  may  be  unwise  for  a  young  man  to
take  on  this  additional  bürden  when  he  is  already  financially  handicapped.
This  is  not  the  place  for  insurance.  It  is  not  suited  as  collateral  for  a
Student  loan,  because  it  is  too  expensive  and  because  the  same  objections
may  be  raised  against  this  as  against  endorsements—it  is  required  only
as  a  pretense.
Group  Guarantee
The  group  guarantee  plan  of  lending  money  to  students  has  not  been
extensively  used  nor  has  it  been  used  for  any  length  of  time.  It  has  been
used  outside  the  educational  institution  by  organizations  which  affiliate
with  the  universities  and  Colleges  and  do  not  lend  directly  to  the  students
until  they  have  been  so  affiliated.  There  are  two  organizations  which
have  loaned  successfully  and  extensively  under  this  plan. 35  This  System,
as  all  Systems,  obviously  has  advantages  and  disadvantages.  It  is  perhaps
best  to  see  whether  there  is  a  purpose  to  be  served  by  such  a  plan  and  then
to  see  how  near  this  plan  comes  to  serving  the  purpose.
Purpose  To  Be  Served  By  Group  Guarantee
It  would  perhaps  be  possible  to  accept  it  as  a  foregone  conclusion
that  there  is  a  need  for  money  loaned  under  the  group  guarantee  plan.
85  The  Harmon  Foundation  of  New  York  City  and  Geschäftsbericht  der  Darlehnskasse  der
Deutschen  Studentschaft  in  Germany.  For  description  of  these,  see  Appendices  A  and  B  of  this
publication.
        <pb n="70" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

71

In  reality,  money  loaned  by  the  university  or  College  on  a  note  af  honor
is  under  a  group  guarantee.  The  Student  who  borrows  thus  feels  that
he  owes  it  to  the  Institution  and  to  those  who  are  to  come  after  him,  to  pay
the  money  back.  That  which  he  fails  to  repay,  other  students  must  pay
for  him  in  the  way  of  decreased  equipment  or  less  money  to  be  loaned  to
future  students.  It  is  the  “next  batch”  of  students  who  pay  for  the
defaults  of  the  “present  batch.”  Under  the  group  guarantee  it  is  the
“present  batch”  that  pays  for  the  defaulting  member  of  its  own  group.
The  question,  therefore,  must  not  be  whether  the  group  guarantee  is  sound,
but  rather  which  form  of  grouping  is  the  most  sound.  It  is  all  group
guarantee.  One  is  positive,  the  other  negative.  The  positive  is  to  be
preferred.  Shall  the  next  generation  pay  for  the  defaults  of  the  present
generation  or  shall  the  present  generation  pay  for  its  own  defaults?  There
should  be  no  need  for  argument  to  convince  the  thoughtful  individual
which  is  the  better  plan.  It  is  easier  for  a  group  to  use  pressure  upon  its
own  members  than  it  is  for  the  members  of  the  following  group  (in  point
of  time)  to  exert  pressure  upon  their  predecessors.  A  terse  way  of  disposing
  of  the  question  is  to  ask:  Shall  generations  pay  as  they  go  or  consume
  what  rightfully  belongs  to  posterity?  This  question  may  be  thrown
out  as  a  challenge  to  the  leaders  of  higher  education.  If  they  are  to  be
worthy  of  their  trust  as  leaders,  they  must  Start  from  the  roots  of  the
evil.  They  must  conserve  and  use  more  skillfully  the  instruments  of
higher  education. 36  The  first  step  towards  such  Conservation  is  to
encourage  the  present  generation  to  pay  full  price  for  what  it  consumes.
The  influence  of  such  a  program  practiced  by  higher  education  would  go
far  beyond  the  walls  of  the  institution.  It  would  ingrain  in  the  College
Student  a  quality  which  is  now  lacking,  namely,  the  sense  of  placing  a
higher  price  on  the  training  which  he  receives  and  the  willingness  to  pay
that  price.  The  influence  would  then  project  itself  into  future  time  so  that
when  the  Student  thus  trained  becomes  a  leader  in  the  community,  he  will
exert  an  influence  towards  the  ideal  which  is  fundamental  to  civilization—-that
  the  generation  of  present  time  must  leave  more  to  posterity  than  it
has  received  from  ancestry.
Service  of  the  Group  Guarantee
The  group  guarantee  therefore  serves  as  an  instrument  to  teach  the
“pay  as  you  go”  doctrine—speaking  in  terms  of  generations.  It  is  an
instrument  to  make  the  present  “batch  of  students”  look  after  their  own
30  This  Statement  is  based  on  the  thought  that  higher  education  is  produced  by  the  use  of
seven  instruments  or  what  may  be  called  the  seven  elements  of  higher  education.  Without  regard
to  their  order  of  importance  they  may  be  stated  as:  (1)  Buildings  and  grounds,  (2)  Physical
equipment,  (3)  Available  funds,  (4)  The  Student  body,  (5)  The  faculty,  (6)  The  Academic
Administrative  Staff,  (7)  The  Business  Administration  Staff.  The  efficiency  of  higher  education
depends  upon  the  proper  combination  or  proportioning  of  these  elements.
        <pb n="71" />
        72

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

members.  Many  students  when  introduced  to  this  scheme  are  more  in
favor  of  it  than  the  charitable  plans.  They  experience  a  feeling  of  independence
  for  their  group.  They  like  to  know  that  they  are  not  dependent
upon  their  elders,  but  can  battle  their  own  way.  It  comes  to  them  at  a
time  when  the  desire  for  independence  is  greatest  and  such  a  System  of
loans  is  a  source  of  real  pleasure  to  desirable  students.  Those  who
have  borrowed  under  a  plan  of  this  kind  have  expressed  themselves  in
such  a  manner.  The  following  quotation  is  worth-while  evidence  as  to
how  some  students  view  this  form  of  security:
Each  borrower  feels  that  he  is  in  a  measure  responsible  for  the  ongoing
of  the  plan  as  a  whole  and  thus  holds  himself  accountable  not  only  to  the
members  of  his  group,  but  to  students  who  will  in  the  future  need  help  such
as  he  himself  has  received.  He  is  no  longer  an  individual  borrower  accountable
chiefly  to  himself,  but  is  rather  a  link  in  an  endless  chain,  the  continuity  of
which  depends  upon  his  own  integrity.
Thus  the  sense  of  responsibility  at  first  centering  about  himself  has
through  his  participation  in  a  common  enterprise  passed  its  narrow  bounds
until  it  is  now  a  feeling  of  Obligation  to  countless  people,  most  of  whom  he
will  never  see.  The  Student  loan  is  therefore  a  powerful  instrument  in  developing
  character  because  it  operates  indirectly,  for  it  is  a  truism  that  when
character  is  made  the  object  of  conscious,  labored  effort,  the  purpose  is
defeated  by  the  selfish  nature  of  the  process  employed.  Character  is  truly
the  by-product  of  fine  living  and  can  best  be  developed  by  strengthening  personal ­
  integrity  and  quickening  that  sense  of  social  responsibility  which  transcends
  private  interest. 37
The  group  guarantee  plan  makes  use  of  the  only  asset  which  the
Student  has—present  and  future  character.  A  loan  made  on  this  basis
is  a  Service  to  the  individual  and  the  Community,  since  it  moulds  and
strengthens  the  element  which  is  the  best  kind  of  collateral  and  is  the
essence  of  credit—the  element  of  character.  The  group  guarantee  further
develops  a  spirit  of  group  responsibility  which  is  fundamental  in  our
present  institutional  society.  This  form  of  borrowing  helps  the  Student
to  acquire  financial  independence  because  it  takes  him  directly  into
the  field  of  finance,  making  him  realize  the  serious  and  definite  nature
of  his  contract  which  he  frequently  did  not  feel  when  borrowing  under
the  old  regime.  On  the  other  hand,  group  guarantee  releases  for  loans
the  principal  of  funds  rather  than  confining  loans  to  the  income  of  funds
only.  Needless  to  say  this  makes  it  possible  to  serve  a  much  larger  number
  of  students.  At  the  same  time  the  funds  are  just  as  safe  as  when
invested  in  gilt-edged  securities.
The  group  guarantee  plan  therefore  serves  a  purpose  and  fills  a  need.
The  funds  now  available  for  loans  to  students  are  inadequate  and  this
plan  should  attract  more  money  into  a  field  which  will  enable  students  to
borrow  more  and  in  a  manner  in  which  many  prefer.  An  estimate  made
on  the  basis  of  figures  jointly  compiled  by  the  Harmon  Foundation  and
37  Taken  from  an  essay  on  the  group  guarantee  plan  for  Student  loans  written  by  Martin  C.
E/ntorfF,  and  quoted  in  Harmon  Foundation  Bulletin,  June,  1925.
        <pb n="72" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

73

the  Student  Loan  Information  Bureau  reveals  that  the  annual  shortage
of  money  for  Student  loans  is  approximately  one  million  dollars.  If  we
figure  on  a  ten-year  cycle  for  revolving  loans,  it  means  that  at  least  ten
millions  of  dollars  more  could  be  effectively  used  in  this  field.  This  means
lending  on  the  conservative  basis  that  is  the  practice  today.  If  a  more
liberal  policy  is  to  be  extended,  which  is  believed  by  many  to  be  desirable,
this  amount  could  easily  be  tripled,  creating  a  need  of  something  like
$30,000,000  more  during  the  next  ten  years  in  the  United  States.  This
is  in  addition  to  funds  already  available.  The  maximum  average  amount
which  a  Student  can  borrow  today  is  about  $300  during  his  entire  College
career.  One  institution  is  contemplating  “seeing  the  Student  through”  by
lending  him  $500  annually  for  four  years,  after  a  careful  selection  of
the  rislc.  This  would  mean  $2,000  loaned  to  each  Student.  Such  a  sum
is  not  excessive,  compared  to  what  many  students  borrow  today,  if  all
his  loans  from  different  sources  were  added  together.  If  this
figure  is  used  as  a  basis,  the  above  figure  ($30,000,000)  then  rises  to
$190,000,000  which  could  be  used  in  the  next  ten  years  for  Student  loans
in  addition  to  funds  already  available.  This  would  permit  the  raising  of
fees  and  thus  increase  the  income  of  institutions.  It  would  also  make
money  available  from  outside  sources  for  loans  and  enable  institutions
to  use  for  other  purposes  the  funds  they  now  set  aside  for  loans,  fellowships,
  and  scholarships.  In  turn,  the  budget  deficits  of  Colleges  and
universities  could  at  least  be  met  in  part  by  funds  thus  released.
Where  such  a  fabulous  sum  (even  $30,000,000)  can  be  obtained  is  problematical.
  At  least  it  is  possible  to  say  that  present  funds  are  far  from
adequate  and  the  reason,  no  doubt,  is  because  past  funds  have  been  so
poorly  administered  that  confidence  in  Student  risk  has  been  destroyed.
The  result  has  been  that  individuals  are  reluctant  to  leave  money  for  this
purpose.  Students,  therefore,  have  borrowed  from  home  where  the  money
very  often  was  needed  for  other  useful  purposes,  or  from  friends  and  relatives, ­
  many  times  bringing  about  an  embarrassing  Situation.  Nor  have
such  funds  been  obtained  gratis,  for  many  students  pay  commercial  rates
of  interest  on  the  money  so  obtained  and  not  infrequently  an  even  higher
rate.  Any  College  can  raise  money  for  a  use  of  demonstrated  soundness
that  will  stand  the  test  of  economic  value.
Although  some  may  object  to  the  group  guarantee  scheme,  it  has  many
commendable  features  and  will  make  funds  available  to  help  students
finance  themselves  without  any  financial  or  social  embarrassments.  The
surplus  amount  charged  for  the  guarantee  is  the  one  feature  against  which
objections  have  been  lodged.  If  this  could  be  done  away  with,  the  scheme
would  be  self-defensible.  But  even  this  feature  has  a  worthy  element  if
viewed  from  a  broad  aspect.  It  is  the  phase  of  the  scheme  which  brings
        <pb n="73" />
        74

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

about  pressure  to  force  payment.  It  therefore  causes  the  delinquent  to  sit
up  and  take  notice  and  brings  him  to  the  full  realization  of  his  duty  to  his
social  group  and  in  turn  to  society.  It  is  believed  by  the  proponents  of  the
practice  of  the  group  guarantee  that  two  or  three  per  cent.  premium  is
sufficient  to  protect  the  principal  of  the  fund.

The  Guarantee  Fund
As  may  be  found  in  Appendices  A  and  B,  the  guarantee  fund  isderived
from  a  surcharge  to  students  who  borrow.  When  the  several  participants
of  the  group  have  all  paid,  as  under  the  Harmon  plan,  a  refund  is  made
deducting  losses  and  paying  six  per  cent.  on  the  funds  which  have  been
paid  in  as  a  surcharge.  Under  the  German  plan  every  Student  is  made  to
contribute  to  the  guarantee  fund.  The  objection  that  can  be  raised  to  the
Harmon  plan  is  that  the  group  is  too  small.  In  case  of  a  default  or
accident  to  one  or  more  members  of  the  group  the  other  members  are  too
severely  punished.  It  is  contrary  to  sound  principles  for  the  distribution
of  losses.  However,  cognizance  must  be  taken  of  the  fact  that  an  alternative ­
  is  difficult  to  find  while  the  funds  are  so  limited.  As  more  funds  are
loaned  the  risk  should  be  spread  over  a  larger  number  of  individuals.
This  can  come  only  with  time.
Under  the  German  plan,  on  the  other  hand,  we  find  the  opposite
extreme.  All  students  are  made  to  pay  into  the  guarantee  fund  whether
they  borrow  or  not.  This  is  no  doubt  unwise,  since  it  places  the  bürden  of
loss  on  those  outside  the  borrowing  group  and  should  be  objectionable
even  to  the  borrowers.
There  is  no  doubt  but  that  the  principles  underlying  the  group  guarantee ­
  plan  are  sound.  This  is  in  harmony  with  social  institutions  and
human  activity.  All  losses  must  be  borne  by  some  one  and  the  sound
method  should  be  to  have  a  group,  community,  or  generation  bear  its  own
losses  when  such  losses  are  the  result  of  its  own  activities.  The  objection
to  be  levied  against  the  plan  is,  therefore,  not  against  the  group  guarantee
itself,  but  against  the  grouping  for  such  guarantee  and  the  selection  of  the
risk.  Without  attempting  to  show  the  faults  of  the  present  grouping  and
selection  of  individuals,  it  should  be  in  order  to  discuss  a  more  favorable
form,  and  thus  make  self-evident  the  shortcomings  of  the  present  grouping
and  selection.
To  obtain  the  best  results  it  would  seem  that  a  grouping  by  classes
within  the  College  would  be  the  best  form.  Use  the  dass  as  a  group.  This
should  prove  effective  because  there  is  already  existing  a  certain  bond  in
the  dass.  The  members  of  the  same  dass  spend  four  years  in  College
together  and  perpetuate  this  grouping  in  their  alumni  association.
        <pb n="74" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

75

By  grouping  in  this  manner  those  administering  loans  could  reach
the  defaulting  borrowers  through  the  alumni  association  and  a  rivalry
could  be  set  up  between  the  different  classes  as  to  which  would  have  the
best  record  at  the  end  of,  say,  ten  or  fifteen  years.  The  assessment  for  the
guarantee  fund  could  be  placed  on  the  borrowing  group  in  the  dass,  the
borrowing  groups  in  the  entire  institution,  and  the  borrowers  of  the
corresponding  dass  in  all  institutions.
Thus  the  insurance  would  come  from  the  dass  group,  the  College
group,  and  the  intercollegiate  dass  group  in  the  case  of  funds  administered
  by  an  outside  or  intercollegiate  Organization.  If  it  is  a  College  fund,
the  intercollegiate  element  should  be  omitted.  Such  a  form  of  guarantee
should  be  more  effective  than  one  where  there  exists  no  connection  excepting
  the  loan  connection.
It  may  be  said,  then,  that  the  group  guarantee  plan  is  sound  both  in
principle  and  practice  and  is  the  most  effective  means  to  administer  funds.
As  used  at  present,  the  only  objections  are  the  form  of  grouping  and  the
allocation  of  charges  for  the  guarantee  fund.  The  groups  should  be  large
and  in  accordance  with  already  existing  groups—the  dass,  the  College,  and
those  of  the  corresponding  dass  in  the  different  Colleges  and  universities.
Organizing  a  certain  number  of  borrowing  members  of  a  dass  in  this
manner,  they,  in  conjunction  with  the  business  officers  of  the  university,
could  pass  upon  the  eligibility  of  other  members  of  the  dass  who
wished  to  borrow.  This  should  be  a  most  effective  manner  in  which  to
select  the  borrowers.  The  students  know  the  members  of  their  own  dass
better  than  the  faculty  or  business  officers.  It  would  also  eliminate  the
element  of  Unfairness  which  exists  under  the  present  group  guarantee
plan,  namely,  making  students  responsible  for  others  when  they  have  had
no  part  in  the  selection  of  the  risk.  If  all  the  members  of  the  group  are
to  be  responsible  for  individual  defaults  which  occur,  then  they  should
have  a  voice  in  the  selection  of  their  fellow  members.  Thus  with  a
different  form  of  grouping,  the  giving  to  the  members  of  a  group  a  voice
in  the  selection  of  additional  members  and  different  allocation  of  charges
for  the  guarantee  fund,  the  group  guarantee  should  be  most  commendable.
Disposing  of  the  Guarantee  Fund
After  having  decided  that  the  guarantee  fund  is  desirable  as  an  assurance
  and  as  a  source  of  pressure  to  force  payment,  it  becomes  necessary
to  provide  for  the  handling  of  such  a  fund.  The  amount  required
should  be  sufficient  only  to  cover  losses  and  the  remainder  should  be
refunded.  It  should  be  possible,  after  sufficient  experience,  to  make  the
surcharge  for  this  purpose  just  enough  to  cover  losses  with  perhaps  a  safe
margin.
        <pb n="75" />
        76

A  Study  of  Student  Loans

Under  the  plan  advanced  above,  there  are  two  alternatives  suggested  :
(1)  to  require  only  the  borrowers  to  contribute  to  the  guarantee  fund;
(2)  to  require  all  the  members  of  the  dass  to  contribute  to  it.  If  the
first  plan  is  followed,  then  the  money  should  be  refunded.  If  the  second
plan  is  followed,  then  the  sum  left  over  after  losses  are  paid  could  be
turned  over  to  the  alumni  fund  to  be  disposed  of  by  an  alumni  committee
composed  of  members  who  have  borrowed  in  the  past.  Or  it  could  be
left  as  a  surplus  guarantee  fund.  In  any  case,  after  experience  in
administering  funds  in  this  manner,  the  surcharge  for  this  purpose  should
be  such  that  few  refunds  would  have  to  be  made.
        <pb n="76" />
        CHAPTER  V
FINANCING  THE  STUDENT
After  studying  bcrth  students  and  loans  from  the  standpoint  of
the  institution,  it  is  well  to  look  at  the  student’s  problem  from  his  own
viewpoint.  This  problem  of  the  Student  has  various  phases  in  some
of  which  he  has  already  received  aid.  However,  he  has  received  little
systematic  assistance  in  his  financial  difficulties.  This  is  of  great  concern
to  him  and  in  Order  that  his  relation  to  the  institution  may  be  more
harmonious  it  is  important  that  the  institution  give  him  assistance  and
guidance  in  this  matter.
The  Student’s  Problem
There  is  in  university  life  not  only  the  problem  of  the  Student,  but
the  student’s  problem  as  well.  The  former  is  the  only  one  which  has
been  receiving  due  attention.  College  and  university  officials  and  faculties
have  looked  upon  the  mission  of  higher  education  as  one  which  should
help  the  Student  along  lines  intended  to  develop  his  character  and  to  mould
him  into  a  finished  product.  In  their  zeal  toward  this  end  the  academic
side  of  student  life  has  grown  rapidly,  while  ample  provisions  have  also
been  made  for  the  social,  moral,  and  physical  welfare  of  the  Student.
It  can  be  said  with  certainty  that  these  phases  of  his  College  life  have
received  more  and  better  guidance  than  have  what  may  be  called  his  personal ­
  economics.  Faculties,  ccmsisting  of  men  foremost  in  their  respective
fields,  have  been  built  up  to  care  for  academic  training;  much  religious  zeal
has  been  displayed  in  student  guidance;  most  social  activities  are  receiving
increased  attention;  physical  training  has  certainly  not  been  neglected;
but  financial  instruction  has  been  slighted.  Where  some  attention  has
been  given  to  such  training,  and  only  recently  has  this  been  true,  it
has  occupied  a  very  small  part  in  the  entire  policy  of  the  institution.  It  has
never  been  properly  studied  and  as  a  result  never  been  intelligently  cared
for.  This  is  the  phase  of  the  student’s  problem  which  relates  itself  closely
to  student  loans.  It  may  rightfully  be  called  “personal  economics”  or
“personal  finance”.
Personal  Economics  or  Finance
Education  in  the  management  of  his  personal  affairs  is  of  importance
in  making  the  student’s  training  more  complete. 38  The  institution  should
38  “If  we  really  could  know  our  students,  in  their  minds,  their  temperaments,  their  economic
situations,  their  health,  their  ambitions,  it  is  altogether  likely  that  we  could  admit  a  freshman  dass
P^^'tenths  of  which  would  graduate.  .  .  _  .  We  must  not  only  know  the  level  of  their  native
Intelligence  .  .  .  but  we  must  learn  their  biologic  and  economic  background,  their  significant
interest,  their  ambitions  and  their  characters.”  Dean  Herbert  E.  Hawkes  of  Columbia  College  in
his  Annual  Report  for  1925,  p.  17.  gC  ln
        <pb n="77" />
        78

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

formulate  definite  policies  of  this  sort  and  incorporate  them  with  its
general  educational  and  administrative  policies.  President  Venable  of
the  University  of  North  Carolina  made  the  Statement  in  1905  that  “the
proper  handling  of  money  and  the  responsibility  for  it  is  an  important
part  of  education”.  This  may  be  held  by  some  to  be  too  personal  a  matter,
but  since  it  is  so  vital  it  cannot  be  neglected.  Almost  every  subject  and
many  varied  qualifications  have  been  required  at  some  time  for  College
entrance.  It  has  never  been  considered  impertinent  to  inquire  into  a
student’s  academic  record  and  to  train  him  along  definite  academic  lines
to  bring  him  up  to  a  certain  Standard;  nor  has  it  ever  been  considered
unbecoming  to  inquire  into  his  religious  belief  and  at  times  to  make  certain ­
  requirements  in  this  matter.  His  physical  condition  and  social  Standing ­
  are  also  frequently  taken  into  consideration;  management  of  his
financial  affairs  has  seldom  been  considered  as  a  matter  of  concern  to
the  institution.  This  is  just  as  important  to  his  weif  are,  to  the  institution,
and  to  society  as  it  is  that  instruction  be  given  in  religious,  moral,  or
ethical  principles.
A  course  in  personal  economics  could  be  made  a  part  of  College
entrance  requirements.  This  would  force  training  along  these  lines  into
the  high  schools  and  the  grades  where  the  need  for  it  is  urgent. 39  The
higher  institutions  must  lead,  however,  by  guiding  and  assisting  their
students  in  financial  matters.  There  is  no  better  place  to  do  this
than  in  the  administration  of  Student  loans.  The  fear  that  such  a  step
would  place  undue  emphasis  upon  the  practical  side  of  life  is  unfounded.
It  is  a  self-evident  truth  that  students  (and  all  persons  for  that  matter)
who  are  efficient  in  the  handling  of  their  financial  affairs  are  the  only  well
rounded  individuals.  Their  minds  are  free  from  financial  worries  and
instead  of  becoming  more  materialistic,  they  are  free  to  grow  intellectually
and  spiritually.  This  guidance  in  personal  economics  is  not  planned  to
teach  the  Student  how  to  acquire  large  quantities  of  material  goods,  but
is  simply  intended  to  see  that  he  uses  more  efficiently  the  economic  and
financial  resources  which  he  has  at  his  command.  Teaching  young  people
how  to  manage  their  incomes,  directing  them  how  to  get  ahead  financially
in  life,  and  helping  them  to  develop  a  practical  economic  sense  is  not
necessarily  materialism,  as  some  would  hold.  Nor  is  it  materialism  to  the
detriment  of  other  “isms”.  The  primary  result  is  to  lead  the  Student  to
see  his  responsibilities  to  himself,  to  the  institution,  and  to  the  community
in  working  out  his  own  economic  salvation  and  financial  success. 40  It  is
30  The  author  is  in  part  indebted  to  O.  C.  Lester,  Vice-President  of  the  Bowery  Savings
Bank,  New  York  City,  for  this  concept.
40  O.  C.  Lester,  “How  to  Make  School  Savings  Banking  Permanent”,  News  Bulletin  of  the
Savings  Bank  Association,  State  of  New  York,  September  18,  1925.
        <pb n="78" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

79

urgent  that  such  training  be  made  a  part  of  the  College  and  university
education,  for  it  is  an  essential  element  in  our  national  life  and  vital  to
economic  and  intellectual  advancement. 41  There  is  no  reason  to  believe
that  training  the  Student  how  to  handle  his  personal  finance  will  act  as  a
drawback  to  his  moral,  intellectual,  or  physical  development.  In  fact,
it  will  act  as  a  Supplement  to  these  in  the  molding  of  a  well  rounded  out
life.
The  Student’s  Budget
The  best  approach  which  the  institution  has  for  training  the  Student
in  personal  finance  is  by  way  of  the  budget.  The  Student  has  often  been
asked  or  told  to  budget  himself,  but  he  has  never  been  taught  how  to  do  it.
It  is  even  a  difficult  matter  for  many  mature  people.  Therefore,  it  is
unreasonable  to  expect  this  of  young  people  who  have  never  before  been
thrown  on  their  own  resources  and  responsibilities.  The  estimated  costs
as  printed  in  university  and  College  catalogs  are  the  one  guide  which  the
Student  has  to  follow.  These  as  a  rule  are  underestimated  and  incomplete.
They  are  not  sufficient  to  carry  the  Student  through  on  the  Standard
of  life  that  his  environment  will  require.  They  are  based  on  what  he
could  get  along  on  if  his  equipment  were  complete  and  his  self-denial
perfect.  Seldom  are  provisions  made  for  clothing  and  amusements.  The
students  and  the  parents,  for  instance,  usually  forget  to  plan  on  these  items
which  are  bound  to  arise.  The  result  is  that  the  amount  set  aside  as  necessary
  to  carry  through  the  year  gives  out  and  the  Student  resorts  to  various
means  to  make  up  the  deficit.  Many  seek  employment  who  had  considered
themselves  provided  for  and  thus  the  Situation  becomes  all  the  more  acute.
The  Student  who  plans  to  work  his  way  through  finds  he  must  do  more
work  than  he  had  contemplated.  If  he  does  not  find  the  additional  work,
a  rush  on  the  loan  office  results.  The  loan  office  is  not  prepared  to  meet
the  Situation.  Large  numbers  of  students  become  disappointed  and  discouraged.
  This  then  reflects  itself  in  the  academic  work  and  on  the  Situation ­
  as  a  whole.  It  is  discouraging  to  students  and  officials  alike.  Lack  of
foresight  caused  in  part  by  ignorance  has  created  this  Situation.  More
loans  are  not  the  only  remedy,  but  more  reliable  figures  at  the  outset
should  be  given  the  Student.
The  Announcement  and  the  Student’s  Budget
It  would  be  well  to  have  the  estimated  costs  given  in  the  announcement ­
  cover  all  expenses  which  the  Student  will  have  for  the  entire  year

41  Ibid.,  p.  2.
        <pb n="79" />
        80

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

including  his  transportation  to  and  from  the  Institution  from  central
points.  Items  should  be  provided  for  liberally,  giving  as  at  present  a  low,
average,  and  high  estimate.  The  low  can  be  the  lowest,  the  high  the
highest  that  can  be  found,  and  the  average  should  be  liberal. 42  Let  the
estimate  be  itemized  more  in  detail  and  no  probable  expenditure  omitted.
The  student  or  his  parents  can  then  budget,  making  provision  for  all
necessary  items  and  omitting  those  that  the  Student  feels  he  can  do  without.
It  would  be  even  better  to  divide  these  estimates  into  necessary  and
optional  items.  The  latter  should  be  included  so  that  the  student  may
know  what  he  may  possibly  be  called  upon  to  spend  due  to  his  new
environment.  He  can  then  make  his  decision  approximately  as  to  what
he  will  or  will  not  spend.  He  will  then  be  prepared  to  govern  himself
accordingly.  His  choice  will  have  been  made  ahead  of  time  and  if  he
departs  from  it,  it  is  hoped  he  will  realize  that  something  eise  upon
which  he  had  definitely  planned  will  have  to  be  omitted  in  the  future.
The  following  is  a  fair  sample  of  expenditures  as  now  estimated  by
various  institutions:  (see  Tables  10,  11,  and  12.)

42  Not  necessarily  an  arithmetical  average.

TABLE  10
COMPARATIVE  COSTS  OF  EDUCATIONAL  SERVICES
AND  OTHER  EXPENSES—(1924-25)
Private  Institutions

Institution

Educational
Services 1

Eiving
Expenses 2

Total

Average

$294

$597

$908

Columbia  Univ

350

990

1,340

Chicago  Univ

245

680

925

Lehigh  Univ

350

600

950

Notre  Dame

275

525

800

Northwestern  Univ

250

500

750

Univ.  of  Penn

305

435

840

Univ.  of  Pittsburgh

212.50

576

788.50

Princeton  Univ

380

600

980

Stanford  Univ

335

645

980

Syracuse  Univ

260

400

660

Western  Reserve  Univ

500

714

Yale  Univ

615

965

1  Educational  Services  include  tuition,  registration  fees,  etc.,  and  books.
2  Eiving  Expenses,  exclusive  of  clothing  and  amusements.
        <pb n="80" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

81

TAB  LE  11

COMPARATIVE  COSTS  OF  EDUCATIONAL  SERVICES
AND  OTHER  EXPENSES—(1924-25)
For  non-resident  students  in  State  Institutions

Institution

Educational
Services

Eiving
Expenses

Total

Average

$142

$445

$587

Univ.  of  Colorado

ISO

585

735

Iowa  State  College

112  o

396  &amp;amp;

508

State  Univ.  of  Iowa

80

366

446

Univ.  of  Illinois

260

660

920

Indiana  Univ

115

472

587

Miami  Univ

SO

277

327

Univ.  of  Michigan

165

500  est.

665

Ohio  State  Univ

190

525

715

Univ.  of  Oregon

243.75

495

738.75

Purdue  Univ

150

400

550

Univ.  of  Washington

170

400

570

Univ.  of  Wyoming

22.50

265

287.50

a.  Tuition  fees  only.
b.  No  incidentals  included.

TABLE  12

COMPARATIVE  COSTS  OF  EDUCATIONAL  SERVICES
AND  OTHER  EXPENSES—(1924-25)
For  Resident  Students  in  State  Institutions

Institution

Educational
Services

Eiving
Expenses

Total

Average

$80

$445

$525

Univ.  of  Colorado

75

585

660

Iowa  State  College

72  a

396  b

468

State  Univ.  of  Iowa

40

366

406

Univ.  of  Illinois

125

660

785

Indiana  Univ

80

472

552

Miami  Univ

50

277

327

Univ.  of  Michigan

125

500  est.

625

Ohio  State  Univ

85

525

610

Univ.  of  Oregon

130

495

625

Purdue  Univ

90

400

490

Univ.  of  Washington

65

400

465

Univ.  of  Wyoming

22.50

265

287.50

ci.  Tuition  fees  only.
b.  No  incidentals  included.
        <pb n="81" />
        82

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

These  figures  are  the  highest  estimates  made  in  the  announcements.
If  a  canvass  were  made  of  former  students’  actual  expenditures,  it  is
safe  to  assume  that  the  above  estimates,  even  the  highest,  would  prove
insufficient.  However,  the  prospective  Student  does  not  understand  the
true  Situation  and  as  a  result  overlooks  many  expenditures  which  he  will
necessarily  make.
The  above  is  introduced  because  it  is  believed  that  student  loans  do
not  stand  alone  in  the  field  of  student  help.  Very  often  loan  funds  are
resorted  to  because  of  two  reasons;  first,  because  the  student  is  really  in
financial  straits,  and  second,  because  he  makes  unnecessary  expenditures.
If,  in  order  to  avoid  this  Situation,  precautions  were  taken  in  the  way  of
guidance  in  personal  financial,  self-help,  rearranged  programs,  and  so  on,
the  loan  phase  of  student  aid  could  then  be  adjusted  accordingly.
Making  the  Budget
It  would  be  a  good  plan  to  require  each  student  to  accompany  his
application  for  admission  with  his  plans  for  a  budget. 43  The  budget  should
be  complete,  including  the  expected  expenditures  and  the  sources  of  income
to  cover  such  expenditures  and  should  show  in  the  case  of  inadequate
budgets  just  how  much  the  Student  lacked  and  how  he  expected  to  cover
this  shortage.  This,  of  course,  could  be  done  in  two  ways  only:  by  borrowing
  and  by  earning.  The  institution  should  know  approximately  how
much  a  Student  will  be  able  to  earn  in  the  community  and  thus  be  able
to  see  to  what  extent  it  will  be  called  upon  for  loans.  If  it  is  not  prepared
to  grant  these  loans,  the  student  could  be  discouraged  from  registering
or  advised  to  do  part  time  academic  work  only.  Such  a  procedure  would
also  throw  light  on  the  fact  that  many  students  who  borrow  need  not  do
so.  They  borrow  in  order  to  be  able  to  spend  more,  thus  draining  the  loan
funds  and  leaving  an  inadequate  supply  for  the  more  needy  students.
Many  must  then  work  hard  just  to  keep  going.  A  vicious  circle  is  started
which  becomes  cumulatively  worse.
Kinds  of  Student  Aid
The  student  has  two  sources  from  which  to  draw  in  order  to  bring
his  budget  into  balance  when  it  is  not  balanced  at  home.  He  may  work.
This  is  commonly  called  self-help;  he  may  borrow  from  friends,  relatives,
organizations,  or  the  institution.  He  may  secure  various  other  forms  of
help  under  the  label  of  scholarships  and  fellowships.  All  these  sources
are  of  concern  to  the  institution  and  an  effort  made  to  bring  about  a  proper
43  The  “Institution  of  Honour  Loans”  in  France  requires  a  tpc  certificate  from  the  Maire  of
the  student’s  home  town  in  order  to  ascertain  the  financial  position  of  his  family  and  thus  see
whether  it  is  necessary  for  the  student  to  receive  a  loan.
        <pb n="82" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

83

balance  between  them  would  be  most  beneficial.  The  extent  to  which  the
community  offers  opportunity  for  self-help  and  the  amount  set  aside  for
scholarships  and  fellowships  are  of  importance  to  the  loan  problem.  When
the  work  available  to  the  Student  is  scarce,  more  money  is  needed  for
loans  and  more  loans  should  be  made.  Those  who  would  work  and  cannot
are  excellent  risks  and,  if  conditions  are  such  that  Student  work  is  scarce,
it  is  better  to  loan  money  to  many  of  these  students  than  to  allow  them  to
leave  the  institution.  If  large  amounts  of  money  are  set  aside  for  unproductive ­
  scholars  and  fellows  who  never  return  the  money,  a  smaller
number  of  students  are  thereby  being  served  than  if  these  funds  were
placed  in  revolving  loans.  An  understanding  of  these  various  phases  of
Student  help  is  vital  to  an  institution.

Self-Help
Self-help  is  the  method  used  by  many  students  to  put  themselves
through  College  and  in  some  institutions  as  many  as  80  per  cent.  of  the
students  finance  themselves  wholly  or  in  part.  It  holds  a  very  important
place  in  Student  finance.  However,
Most  of  the  things  which  have  been  written  of  boys  without  education,
like  Lincoln,  who  ultimately  became  President  of  the  United  States,  or
fellows  with  only  fifteen  cents  in  their  pockets  who  got  through  College  on
their  nerve  and  made  Phi  Beta  Kappa  are  romantic,  but  quite  misleading. 44

As  to  the  advisability  of  self-help  for  students,  authorities  disagree.
Dr.  Angell  of  Yale  says:
It  may  be  hard  work  and  in  some  cases  an  undue  strain—earning  a
living  and  getting  an  education  at  the  same  time,  but  in  the  majority  of
institutions  a  real  taste  of  economic  necessity  is  a  spur  to  study.  The  youth
who  must  work  his  way  through  College  cannot  afford  to  waste  time  joyriding
  and  jazzing  around. 45

On  the  other  hand,  the  London  Times  Bducational  Supplement  takes
the  opposite  view:
In  the  American  institutions  where  “working  through”  is  more  common
than  in  England  there  is  beginning  to  arise  a  certain  doubt  about  the  desirability
  of  the  plan.,  There  is  a  growing  conviction  particularly  in  the
Eastern  universities  that  this  independence  is  bought  at  too  great  a  price. 46
It  is  further  argued  by  some  that  the  function  of  a  College  or  university
  is  to  stimulate  study;  that  anything  which  reduces  the  potential
amount  of  study  (where  there  is  not  even  partial  Substitution  in  ways
of  health  or  of  zest)  such  as  extra-curriculum  activities  in  various  spheres
of  Student  undertaking,  deducts  largely  from  scholastic  achievement.  All
44  T.  A.  Clark,  “Discipline  and  the  Derelicts”,  p.  93.
45  Quoted  in  the  Alaska  Daily  Empire,  April  18,  1924.
46  “Poor  Men  at  the  Universities”  quoted  in  School  and  Society,  Dec.  22,  1923.
        <pb n="83" />
        84

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

these  views  are  no  doubt  justified.  Conditions  differ  in  the  various  institutions.
  The  fact  remains,  however,  that  many  students  do  outside  work
and  a  large  proportion  of  these  could  not  remain  in  College  if  such
remunerative  activities  were  not  found.  The  question,  then,  is  not  whether
work  is  beneficial  or  harmful  to  the  Student,  but  how  much  work  can  and
should  be  done.  How  can  self-help  be  better  managed,  how  can  it  be
fitted  into  personal  economics  and  the  financial  policies  of  higher  education
and  to  what  extent  can  loans  relieve  the  Situation?
Management  of  Self-Help
In  the  management  of  self-help,  the  student’s  welfare  should  be  held
foremost.  His  health  and  mental  capacity  have  to  be  kept  in  mind.
There  is  no  doubt  that  a  large  number  of  students  are  able  to  carry  outside ­
  work  and  do  full  justice  to  their  studies  at  the  same  time;  others
require  the  full  time  for  their  studies;  while  still  others  can  go  through
with  a  full  academic  program,  support  themselves,  and  even  take  part
in  extra-curricula  activities.  It  depends  upon  the  individual.  The
extent  to  which  the  Student  relies  upon  self-help  must  also  be  taken  into
consideration.  An  analysis  of  the  Situation  along  these  lines  would
improve  conditions.
It  is  well  to  aim  at  a  proper  balance  between  all  the  factors.  These
factors  are  the  Student,  his  academic  program,  his  health,  and  the  amount
and  kind  of  work  open  to  him.  If  it  is  possible  for  the  Student  to  find
work  that  contains  an  element  of  recreation  for  him,  then  a  part  of  the
time  which  rightfully  belongs  to  recreation  can  be  given  to  self-help.
It  is  rather  dangerous  for  a  man  to  support  himself  entirely  in  College;
something  is  likely  to  suffer;  either  his  studies  or  his  health. 4 '
However,  some  odd  job  would  perhaps  be  good  for  all  students  with
an  average  intellectual  aptitude,  but  it  is  difficult  to  defend  the  view  held
that  students  should  do  outside  work  regardless  of  financial  need.  This
deprives  those  who  are  in  need  of  the  work.  Students  who  have  sufficient
funds  can  well  use  their  time  more  profitably.  There  are  other  things
they  can  do  to  improve  their  future—browse  through  books,  cultivate
a  beneficial  hobby,—even  intellectual  loafing  may  be  of  benefit  to  themselves ­
  and  society.  If  an  institution  has  a  sufficiently  high  intellectual
Standard,  the  students  will  be  properly  equipped  and  guided  to  use  their
time  more  profitably  than  doing  the  work  which  they  are  generally
able  to  get.  In  the  administration  of  self-help,  therefore,  the  above
factors  should  be  taken  into  consideration  both  for  the  benefits  of  the
students  who  must  resort  to  self-help  and  for  those  who  do  not.  *

47  C.  F.  Thwing,  “Lending  Money  to  College  Students”,  Nation,  September  7,  1918.
        <pb n="84" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance  85

Self-Help  and  Student  Finance
Many  forms  of  self-help  are  not  of  any  value  in  themselves  and
should  not  be  resorted  to  by  the  Student  unless  it  is  financially  necessary.
Nor  should  the  average  Student  attempt  to  earn  all  his  expenses  and  at
the  same  time  carry  a  full  academic  program.  If  complete  self-help  is
necessary,  the  academic  program  should  be  re-arranged  so  that  the  College
course  will  be  covered  in  five  or  six  years  instead  of  four.  The  Student
needs  leisure  time  for  reflection  and  if  he  is  constantly  rushed,  there
will  be  certain  fundamental  values  of  a  College  education  that  will  be
lost.  It  is  impossible  for  the  average  conscientious  youth,  with  the  best
intent  in  the  world,  to  do  full  justice  to  the  purpose  of  his  College  days  and
to  himself  and  at  the  same  time  earn  all  his  expenses.  He  is  not  fully
able  to  grasp  his  opportunity;  to  expand  to  the  full  measure  of  his
enlarging  scope  and  vision,  and  to  profit  as  he  might  from  the  larger  life
of  the  College  or  university  in  the  extra-curriculum  opportunities. 48  If  the
Student  has  no  financial  source  but  self-help,  that  is  his  only  salvation.
This  type  of  individual  must  not  be  discouraged  from  going  to  College  for
he  is  a  great  asset  to  society.  He  should  be  given  aid—the  kind  that
will  help  him  to  help  himself.  Sentimental  help  would  be  dangerous  and
vicious.  He  can  be  credited  with  assets  that  may  be  of  great  value  in  the
future  and  thus  deserves  a  loan.
Nor  should  the  Institution  wait  until  a  Student  comes  to  apply  for
help.  He  is  a  good  risk  and  a  most  valuable  investment  and  the  fact  that
money  is  available  should  be  brought  to  his  attention.  Responsible
students  are  extremely  reluctant  to  get  into  debt.  They  seem  to  prefer  to
spend  their  valuable  time  at  a  job  instead  of  borrowing.  They  are  the
ones  who  would  benefit  the  most  by  a  loan,  for  the  time  of  such  a  Student
is  worth  far  more  at  his  studies  than  at  outside  work.  If  the  job  interferes
  with  his  study  in  any  way,  he  loses  money  even  though  he  earns
from  fifty  Cents  to  a  dollar  an  hour.  A  little  outside  work  is  sometimes
beneficial,  but  a  great  deal  is  almost  uniformly  fatal.  Other  means  should
therefore  be  found  to  assist  the  ambitious  and  worthy  Student  who  must
rely  entirely  or  in  large  part  on  self-help.
Self-Help  and  Loans
To  those  students  who  cannot  balance  their  budget  by  self-help,  loans
may  be  made.  Many  officials  have  been  unable  to  see  the  close  connection
between  self-help  and  loans.  Since  the  Student  can  spend  his  time  more
profitably  than  by  working  at  odd  jobs,  it  is  important  that  he  be  given
other  assistance  than  that  of  finding  work.  This  assistance  should  take
the  form  of  loans  or  fellowships  and  scholarships.

48  Editorial,  “College  Men  Who  Need  Help“,  Literary  Digest,  November  15,  1924.
        <pb n="85" />
        86

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and
The  point  which  should  be  kept  closely  in  mincl  is  the  maintenance  of
a  proper  balance  in  all  financial  dealings  with  the  Student.  When  no  work
can  be  obtained  by  the  desirable  Student,  or  when  he  must  do  outside  work
to  the  detriment  of  his  full  educational  development,  it  is  then  that  the
institution  itself  or  some  outside  Organization  should  Step  in  and  give
him  legitimate  assistance  in  the  form  of  well  administered  loans.  The
loan  should  come  in  as  the  final  weight  to  balance  his  budget  provided
always  that  his  future  possibilities  warrant  the  investment.  Loans,
therefore,  should  act  as  a  balance  in  Student  finance  and  should  not  be
made  unless  the  loaning  party  is  willing  to  “see  the  Student  through.”
When  money  has  once  been  loaned  to  a  Student,  he  should  not  be  abandoned
  unless  he  becomes  financially  hopeless.  When  a  loan  is  made,  it
is  not  enough  to  consider  whether  the  Student  will  be  able  to  repay;
it  is  also  necessary  to  know  how  much  money  in  addition  he  will
need  before  he  will  be  able  to  “cash  in”  on  his  investment  and  how
much  of  this  additional  amount  he  will  be  compelled  to  borrow.  If  he
is  likely  to  be  a  bad  business  proposition,  he  should  receive  no  loan;  but
if  he  is  to  get  a  loan,  he  should  be  carried  through  until  he  begins  to  “cash
in.”  If  a  man  must  borrow  in  his  freshman  or  sophomore  year,  the  chances
are  that  he  will  have  to  borrow  during  the  succeeding  years  of  his  College
course,  and  unless  the  loaning  party  is  ready  to  meet  his  reasonable
demands  during  these  succeeding  years,  no  loan  should  be  made  during
the  earlier  years.  It  is  contrary  to  göod  business  policies.  What  reliable
financier  or  bank  will  put  money  in  an  enterprise  and  then  abandon  it
before  the  first  turnover  has  taken  place?  Astonishing  as  it  may  seem,
it  remains  true  that  this  fundamental  principle  of  good  finance  is  rarely
found  in  the  administration  of  Student  loans.  Nothing  could  be  more
unbusiness-like.  If  money  is  once  placed  on  a  Student,  he  should  be
assisted  to  make  good  until  he  can  be  branded  as  an  ultimate  failure.
The  Postponement  of  Fees
The  postponement  of  fees  is  a  form  of  loan  and  is  here  referred  to
for  record  only.  Some  institutions  take  a  note  in  lieu  of  fees  and  tuition.
Others  extend  a  loan  and  then  take  the  proceeds  of  the  loan  for  fees  and
tuition.  There  is  absolutely  no  difference.  There  may  be  a  certain
psychological  effect,  but  in  the  last  analysis,  it  is  merely  accounting  tactics.
The  postponement  of  fees  and  tuition  should  be  governed  by  the  same
principles  as  loans,  for  it  is  in  fact  a  loan.
Fellowships  and  Scholarships
Fellowships  and  scholarships  can  hardly  be  said  to  have  been  administered ­
  more  wisely  than  loans.  This  is  unfortunate  since  so  much  money
        <pb n="86" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

87

has  been  disbursed  under  this  brand  of  Student  aid  and  since  tradition
has  assigned  to  it  so  much  prestige.  The  maladministration  of  these  funds
is  all  the  more  reprehensible  when  we  consider  the  length  of  time  which
this  sort  of  help  has  been  in  existence  and  the  amount  of  thought  which
has  been  given  to  it.  But  like  some  social  institutions  to  which  dignity
has  been  assigned  rather  than  acquired,  this  one  has  peacefully  rested
under  a  mass  of  unclear  thinking.  The  result  has  been  that  no  wellplanned
  policy  has  been  established  and  put  into  practice.  The  faults
have  been  two—the  purpose  for  which  these  awards  have  been  granted,
and  the  selection  of  the  recipients.
Unfortunately,  these  awards  have  often  been  given  without  any
justification.  Nothing  specific  has  been  required  of  the  Student  for  what
he  received. 49  In  many  cases  it  has  practically  amounted  to  paying  him
to  attend  classes,  and  no  attention  has  been  paid  to  the  sort  of  grades
received  while  holding  such  fellowships.  The  result  has  been  at  times  to
malce  Professional  loafers  out  of  otherwise  promising  young  people.  On
the  other  hand,  many  of  the  holders  of  these  awards  have  gained  prominence
  in  the  fields  of  business,  Science,  and  the  arts.  This  was  what  could
rightfully  be  expected  of  them,  for  the  young  person  who  has  such  an
honor  conferred  upon  him  should  go,  in  later  life,  far  beyond  what  was
expected  of  him  in  College.  It  is  evident,  however,  that  a  large  number
have  not  reached  even  the  heights  to  which  they  were  destined  by  those
who  conferred  the  awards,  and  some  have  failed  miserably  to  hit  the  mark.
These  observations  bring  to  us  in  a  startling  manner  the  faults  which
have  existed  in  the  making  of  these  awards.  Young  men  and  women  have
not  been  properly  estimated.  It  is,  of  course,  as  difficult  to  forecast  the
success  of  an  individual  ten  or  twenty  years  hence  or  even  less,  as  it  is
to  forecast  the  future  of  an  individual  enterprise  or  business  as  a  whole.
Nor  can  the  individual  himself  gauge  his  future  with  any  degree  of
accuracy.  So  those  who  determine  the  awards  cannot  in  any  way  be
called  to  task  for  errors  in  judgment.  But  it  should  be  possible  before
the  final  selection  to  require  of  the  candidate  something  specific  in  the
way  of  performance  which  is  better  than  that  of  the  average  Student.
If  it  does  not  seem  likely  that  he  will  contribute  to  the  Organization ­
  or  advancement  of  knowledge,  there  seems  to  be  no  reason  to  give
him  financial  support,  and  he  should  be  made  to  understand  that  unless
he  does  accomplish  something  tangible,  the  aid  will  be  withdrawn  or
converted  into  a  loan.  The  high-minded  young  person  will  not  want  to
accept  such  compensation  unless  he  is  determined  to  give  something  in
return.
40  “It  is  important  for  a  young  man  to  learn  that  the  larger  outside  worid  in  which  he  is  to
m . a *5 e  his  fight  will  not  carry  him  as  a  helpless  bürden,  but  will  demand  a  fair  return  in  the  way
labor  or  Service  for  all  that  it  gives.”  F.  P.  Venable,  President,  University  of  North  Carolina
address  before  the  National  Association  of  State  Universities,  1905.
        <pb n="87" />
        88

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

There  is  needed,  then,  a  more  careful  appraisal  of  the  individual;
not  once  but  frequently.  Better  gauging  of  the  individual  is  as  important
to  society  both  in  its  social  and  economic  aspects  as  it  is  that  the  future
of  business  enterprise  or  business  conditions  be  gauged.  This  is  necessary
to  social  progress  and  there  could  be  no  better  place  than  the  university
to  start  this  selective  process.  Some  work  is  already  being  done  along
these  lines  in  the  way  of  mental  tests  for  admission  to  Colleges  and  of
grouping  for  instructional  purposes.  Since  scholarships  and  fellowships
are  awarded  to  a  few  who  are  supposed  to  be  at  the  top  of  the
scale  in  the  university  community,  it  is  most  imperative  that  the  selection  of
these  be  made  with  certain  fundamental  principles  in  mind.  In  the  past
students  have  received  these  awards  principally  on  the  basis  of  scholastic
ability,  with  the  exception  that  some  scholarships  and  fellowships  were
granted  to  those  individuals  who  were  in  need.  There  have  been  many
variations  between  these  two  extremes,  which  makes  it  difficult  to  determine
  the  principles  which  should  prevail.
That  which  is  of  the  greatest  importance  in  this  consideration  of
scholarships  and  fellowships  is  what  part  they  should  play  in  Student  aid;
what  relation  they  should  bear  to  self-help;  what  ratio  should  exist
between  them  and  loans.  It  is  neither  possible  nor  prudent  to  go  into
detail  here  in  regard  to  the  administration  of  such  aid  to  students,  but
there  are  certain  guiding  principles  which  would  go  far  toward  setting
matters  aright.
The  first  Step  is  to  draw  a  sharp  line  between  scholarships  and  fellowships. ­
  They  do  not  and  they  should  not  mean  the  same  thing.  The  fellowship ­
  should  be  held  by  a  Student  with  a  high  order  of  scholastic  ability.
He  should  be  able  to  push  forward  into  the  field  of  knowledge  in  an  independent ­
  fashion.  If  he  is  incapable  of  this,  there  is  no  reason  why  he
should  be  supported  while  acquiring  knowledge  to  be  commercialized
later.  In  a  case  like  this  a  loan  should  be  made.  Appointment  as  a
fellow  does  not  necessarily  mean  that  financial  assistance  should  be  given.
A  fellowship  should  be  formal  recognition  of  intellectual  accomplishment.
Therefore,  universities  could  establish,  for  instance,  an  Adam  Smith
Fellowship  in  Economics  or  a  Barnard  Fellowship  in  Medical  Research,
not  necessarily  carrying  any  compensation,  but  denoting  an  honor  which
should  be  sought  by  those  who  are  scholastically  ambitious.  The  first
considerations  are  the  scholasic  attainment  and  promise  of  greater  future
development.  These  are  to  be  considered  regardless  of  financial  need.
After  the  selection  has  been  made  on  this  basis,  the  financial  element  should
enter  in  and  financial  assistance  given  to  those  who  need  it.  If  the  Student
is  to  commercialize  his  training,  he  should  be  given  a  loan;  if  not  a  periodical
  allowance.
        <pb n="88" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

89

A  scholarship,  on  the  other  hand,  should  indicate  less  than  a  fellowship. ­
  The  person  holding  it  need  not  have  proved  his  ability  so
conclusively,  but  should  have  shown  signs  of  promised  scholastic  ability.
The  award  should  be  made  in  the  same  way  as  the  fellowship,  first  as  an
honor  and  then  as  a  financial  aid.  The  financial  consideration  should  be
the  same  as  with  fellowships,  that  is,  it  should  be  secondary  to  other  considerations
  and  brought  in  only  when  the  recipient  of  the  award  needs
monetary  assistance.
In  both  cases  the  performance  of  something  specific  should  be
required.  Actual  performance  as  well  as  potentialities  should  be  deciding
factors  in  the  granting  of  these  awards.  However,  actual  performance
should  weigh  more  heavily  than  potentialities  in  the  question  of  renewing
the  funds.
There  may  be  established  certain  guiding  principles  for  the  administration
  of  scholarships  and  fellowships:
1.  A  fellowship  should  be  an  honor  awarded  for  proved  scholastic
ability  with  a  promise  of  greater  development  of  that  ability.
2.  A  scholarship  should  be  an  honor  awarded  for  promised  scholastic
ability.
3.  The  financial  consideration  should  be  of  secondary  importance.
Money  should  be  given  only  to  those  fellows  and  scholars  who
need  it  in  Order  to  do  their  best  work.
4.  If  the  training  received  and  the  work  done  has  an  economic  value,
the  financial  assistance  should  be  in  the  form  of  a  loan;  if  not,  it
should  be  in  the  form  of  a  periodical  allowance.
5.  The  fellowship  and  scholarship  should  be  retained  only  so  long  as
the  holder  produces  something  specific  in  the  way  of  advancing
or  of  organizing  knowledge.
        <pb n="89" />
        [90]

CHAPTER  VI

THE  ADMINISTRATION  OF  STUDENT  LOANS
The  survey  of  Student  loans  made  by  the  Student  Loan  Information
Bureau  during  the  past  year  and  by  the  Harmon  Foundation  during  the
previous  year  shows  that  there  is  no  uniformity  in  the  administration
of  Student  loans  in  the  various  Colleges  and  universities.  In  formulating
policies  for  the  administration  of  loans,  it  has  not  been  possible  to  be
guided  by  prevailing  methods,  for  each  institution  seems  to  have  a  procedure
  peculiarly  its  own.  No  two  institutions  are  guided  by  the  same
set  of  principles.  There  exists  no  distinguishable  trend  of  thought,  no
well  worked-out  policy  making  for  a  definite  purpose  or  end.  The
administration  of  loans  to  students  has  never  been  given,  nor  is  it  given
even  today,  the  proper  attention  and  place  in  the  financial  policies  of
higher  education.
In  the  working  out  of  a  policy  for  the  administration  of  Student
loans,  it  is  desirable  therefore  to  lift  all  that  is  best  from  the  various
methods  in  use  and  with  this  material  construct  a  workable  plan  which
will  approach,  as  near  as  possible,  the  ideal.  There  is  no  “yard  stick”
with  which  to  measure  that  which  is  best  in  the  various  plans.  The  selection
  of  the  best  elements  from  the  different  Systems  in  use  must  be  made
judiciously  rather  than  scientifically  and  supplemented,  where  necessary,
with  theoretical  conclusions.
Methods  of  Administration
Loan  funds  are  administered  in  two  ways:  the  restricted  method,
loaning  the  income  from  the  fund  only;  and  the  revolving  method,  loaning
  both  income  and  principal.  Taking  the  institutions  as  a  whole,  there
are  many  more  funds  administered  under  the  restricted  method  than
there  are  under  the  revolving  method.  These  conditions  do  prevail  notwithstanding
  the  fact  that  of  the  93  institutions  which  answered  an
inquiry  sent  out  by  the  Student  Loan  Information  Bureau,  69  replied
that  they  favored  the  revolving  fund.  The  replies  are  personal  opinions
of  the  iijdividuals  who  are  familiär  with  and  in  most  cases  responsible
for  the  administration  of  loans.  The  replies  revealed  opinions  as  follows:
69—favored  revolving  fund.
5—preferred  restricted  fund.
1—no  experience  with  revolving  fund.
1—doubtful.
16—no  answer.
        <pb n="90" />
        A  Study  of  Student  Loans

91

As  against  these  opinions  there  stand  the  actual  conditions  as  follows:
AMOUNT  OF  FUNDS  AVAILABLE  1924-1925

Revolving  $187,253  10  funds
Restricted  704,754  12  “
Emergency  5,000  2  “
Not  specified  3,205,786  288  “

$4,102,793

Revolving
$60,000
3,500
28,100
4,300
11,353
10,000
50,000
10.000
5,000
5,000

$187,253

Restricted
$1,000
25,000
10,000
25,000
32,000
1,000
2,754
50,000
27,000
25,000
500,000
6,000
$704,754

Ivmergency
$3,000
2,000

$5,000

The  above  data  is  most  illuminating  and  shows  that  even  though  a
large  number  of  university  officers  prefer  the  revolving  loan  fund  to
the  restricted,  the  amount  of  money  administered  under  the  latter  method
far  surpasses  that  administered  under  the  formen  There  is  only  $187,253
in  revolving  funds  as  against  $704,754  in  restricted  funds.  If  the  “not
specified”  funds  ($3,205,786)  are  taken  to  be  restricted,  as  it  is  safe  to
suppose,  the  proportion  becomes  even  more  favorable  to  the  restricted
fund.  Much  of  this  money  was  left  in  the  restricted  form  and  must
continue  to  be  administered  thus.  However,  it  is  safe  to  assume  that
there  are  many  of  these  funds  that  could  be  placed  on  a  revolving  basis.
An  effort  should  be  made  to  have  future  funds  established  in  the  same
way.  Weightier  arguments  and  the  sentiment  of  a  large  majority  of  officials
  favor  the  revolving  fund.
It  is  not  well  to  be  guided  by  unweighted  statistics  which  would  lead
us  to  advocate  the  restricted  fund.  The  revolving  fund  has  in  its  favor
the  support  of  those  who  have  given  both  Systems  a  trial.  The  greater
efficiency  of  the  revolving  fund  is  indisputable.  If  we  should  take,  for
instance,  a  fund  of  $100,000  and  see  what  can  be  done  with  it  under  the
restricted  plan  and  on  the  other  hand  see  what  can  be  done  with  it  under
the  revolving  plan,  the  results  are  most  instructive  and  lead  us  to  wonder
why  this  plan  has  been  so  long  in  coming  into  practice.  One  hundred
thousand  dollars  at  5%  yields  $5,000  annually  and  would  be  sufficient  to
make  a  loan  of  $250  to  20  students  for  each  of  the  first  five  years,  25
        <pb n="91" />
        92

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

students  for  each  of  the  following  five  years,  and  30  students  for  each  of
the  next  five  years,  and  so  on.  Over  a  period  of  fifteen  years,  375  such
loans  could  be  made.  On  the  other  hand,  $100,000,  turned  into  a  revolving

  fund,  allowing  $20,000  of  the  principal  to  be  loaned  annually  for  the
first  five  years,  would  be  sufficient  to  make  1,475  such  loans,  which  means

that  it  would  serve

practically  five  times

as  many

students.

It  would

operate  as  follows:

Number  of

Number  of

Interest

Students

Principal  and

Students

only

Served

Interest

Served

Ist  year

$5,000

20

$20,000

80

2nd  “

“

&amp;lt;&amp;lt;

24,000

96

3rd  “

“

“

23,000

92

4th  “

«(

U

22,000

88

Sth  “

“

21,000

84

6th  “

6,250

25

22,000

88

7th  “

tl

li

25,200

100

8th  “

u

“

24,150

97

9th  “

u

“

23,100

93

lOth  “

u

“

22,050

88

1  Ith  “

7,812

30

23,100

93

12th  “

&amp;lt;&amp;lt;

Ci

26,460

105

13th  “

“

25,357

101

14th  “

&amp;lt;&amp;lt;

it

24,255

97

15th  “

&amp;lt;&amp;lt;

IC

23,152

93

Totad

$95,310

375

$348,824

1,475

The  above  figures  should  be  convincing.  One  hundred  thousand  dollars
  administered  as  a  revolving  fund  will  help  1,475  students  over  a
period  of  fifteen  years,  whereas  it  will  help  only  375  students  during  the
satne  period  if  administered  as  a  restricted  fund.  Besides  helping  a  greater
number  of  students,  it  would  attract,  where  well  administered,  more
money  to  be  handled  in  this  manner,  whereas  the  amount  forthcoming
when  administered  under  the  restricted  plan  is  far  from  sufficient  to
meet  the  needs.  If  individuals  who  have  money  to  give  can  be  shown  the
good  that  can  be  derived  by  the  establishment  of  revolving  loan  funds,  they
will  be  more  willing  to  leave  money  for  this  purpose.  Speaking  of  administering
  money  under  the  revolving  method,  Mr.  G.  C.  Wintringer  of
Princeton  University  said:
A  fund  of  this  kind  makes  a  particular  appeal  to  me  personally  and  I
have  a  feeling  it  should  find  favor  with  others.  If  an  institution  can  demonstrate
  to  a  prospective  donor  that  any  money  given  for  Student  aid  will  be
administered  in  a  very  business-like  manner  and  can  be  used  over  and
over  -  again,  perhaps  adding  to  the  principal  by  the  collection  of  interest,
this  should  make  a  very  strong  appeal.  It  will  likewise  relieve  the  budget
of  the  institution  of  the  inclusion  in  it  of  a  certain  sum  of  money  each  year
to  be  used  for  this  purpose.
Some  officials  and  donors  fear  that  if  the  principal  as  well  as  the
inconie  is  loaned,  the  fund  will  eventually  disappear.  This  fear  is  well
founded  only  if  we  admit  inefficiency  in  the  administration  of  the  funds.
        <pb n="92" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Einance

93

It  is  true  that  some  funds  in  the  past  have  greatly  diminished  or  disappeared
  entirely  when  the  principal  was  loaned  out.  This  was  due,  almost
always,  to  the  method  of  administration  and  not  to  the  dishonesty  of
students.  Students,  as  all  individuals,  are  honest  if  they  are  made  to  be.
The  trouble  has  arisen  because  of  the  lack  of  a  definite  agreement  with
the  Student  when  he  first  secures  a  loan,—the  “pay  when  you  can”  attitude,
and  lack  of  a  collection  System.  Those  who  administer  Student  loans
can  well  afford  to  borrow  some  of  the  principles  from  the  business  world
that  make  lending  in  small  sums  successful.  The  managers  of  credit
departments  in  concerns  in  New  York  City  which  make  small  loans  and
others  who  seil  on  the  installment  plan  are  of  the  opinion  that  99%  of
the  people  are  honest.  When  they  do  not  pay  on  time,  it  is  either  because
of  circumstances  over  which  they  have  no  control  or  a  fault  in  the  credit
department  itself.  The  fault  in  the  credit  department  may  be  a  slip-up
in  the  selection  of  the  risk,  or  a  failure  to  handle  the  customer  tactfully.
In  both  the  selection  of  the  risk  and  the  collection  of  the  money,  cases
are  to  be  handled  individually  and  each  in  accordance  with  its  own
peculiarities.  Colleges  and  universities  that  have  tried  these  elementary
principles  of  business  lending  have  been  remarkably  successful  in
administering  Student  loans.  Even  where  the  selection  of  the  risk  was
not  made  with  any  great  degree  of  care,  but  where  the  collection  of  the
loans  was  undertaken  systematically  the  results  have  been  most  satisfactory.
  That  it  is  possible  to  administer  a  loan  fund  not  only  without
loss,  but  in  such  a  way  that  the  fund  will  increase  of  itself,  is  evidenced
by  the  following  figures  which  represent  an  actual  fund  that  has  grown
of  its  own  momentum.

Date  Principal
1905  $6,927.76
1906  6,899.76
1907  7,059.56
1908  7,714.96
1909  8,319.32
1910  8,455.37
1911  8,692.37
1912  9,048.37
1913  9,702.73
1914  11,622.83
1915  12,612.58
1916  13,414.91
1917  14,587.12
1918  15,478.97
1919  16,255.10
1920  17,185.57
1921  18,480.57
1922  19,049.21
1923  20,010.84
1924  20,885.88
1925  22,038.91
        <pb n="93" />
        94

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

This  fund,  which  is  in  a  state  Institution,  was  originally  started  in
1874  and  in  1905  was  merged  with  other  funds.  The  repayment  of  loans
made  previous  to  1905  and  since  has  enabled  the  loan  fund  to  grow  as
the  figures  indicate.  An  experience  of  this  kind  should  help  to  convince
the  most  skeptical.  It  is  evident  that  there  is  no  more  risk  involved  in
Student  loans  than  there  is  in  commercial  loans  where  as  great  care  is  taken
in  the  selection  of  the  risk  and  the  funds  are  administered  in  a  firm  business-like
  manner.  The  figures  represent  a  restricted  fund,  but  the  fact
that  it  has  been  able  to  grow  as  it  has  proves  that  there  is  no  reason  why
the  principal  could  not  have  been  loaned  out  to  students  as  well.  The
Student  has  proved  himself  as  reliable  a  risk  as  a  person  in  commercial  or
industrial  ventures  and  so  deserves  to  have  like  confidence  placed  in  him.

Past  Experience
The  experience  of  institutions  in  general  has  not  been  so  encouraging
as  the  individual  case  discussed  above.  However,  many  of  the  institutions ­
  have  been  successful  in  the  administration  of  their  funds.  The
following  Compilation,  jointly  prepared  by  the  Harmon  Foundation  and
the  Student  Loan  Information  Bureau,  shows  funds  established,  amount
available,  amount  outstanding,  and  amount  overdue  in  various  institutions.

Amount  of

Institutions

Fund  Fstabüslied

Available  1923

Outstanding

Overdue

Total  135

$4.609,088

$944,905

$1,634,795

$386,816

1

672  814

84,821

2

454,390

49,347

130,094

3

345,394

76,878

268,515

4..

290  000

14,000

5

251,500

13,900

48,928

18,386

6

206,876

9,535

70,231

35,721

7

153,922

8,697

91,830

8

105,656

16,644

53,000

5.000

9

101,000

8,907

6,482

10

100,000

5,000

11

96)821

18,423

25,000

12

96,500

10,000

107,791

78,773

13

88,165

54,265

26,815

11,744

14

76,257

53,565

54,836

10,689

15

68,165

4,000

16

62,503

5)700

17,538

17

55,000

5,897

8,619

1,924

18

54,500

11,500

7,369

19

52,524

2,710

25,027

15,509

20

50,500

6,332

26,435

21

50,000

6,500

22

50,000

2,500

23

45,792

29)320

17,365

24

45,000

2,400

25

45,000

11)300

8,699

500

26

35,000

1,800

3,000

27

34,446

1,722

2,427

957
        <pb n="94" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

Amount  of

Institutions

Fund  Established

Available  1923

Outstanding

28

32,471

8,584

13,656

29

29,332

19,332

30

26,971

6,158

023

31

26,909

1,687

1,700

32

26,669

1,993

5,449

33

26,370

2,271

4,492

34

26,000

1,500

8,600

35

25,559

3,800

17,160

36

24,000

2,000

12,000

37

22,006

2,300

38

21,500

10,000

11,500

39

20,000  (Newly  est.)

20,000

40

18,800

12,900

23,850

41

17,250

1,700

4,658

42

17,243

4,890

12,952

43

17,400

5,300

2,400

44

17,055

20,581

18,403

45

16,259

1,760

7,168

46

15,774

8,530

14,864

47

15,580

8,741

7,109

48

15,561

2,000

17,093

49

15,472

5,940

7,669

50

15,350

15,350

5,108

51

15,220

700

4,378

52

15,000

3,750

15,218

53

15,000

4,800

21,427

54

14,575

7,763

8,662

55

13,518

2,942

5,759

56....

13,205

1,505

4,379

57..

13,000

2,500

12,500

58

12,700

1,790

1,623

59

12,650

2,100

5,150

60

11,600

4,602

7,738

61

11,500

6,750

11,000

62

11,490

11,548

8,609

63

11,353

695

10,658

64

11,256

23,564

17,304

65

11,100

1,510

1,445

66

11,000

14,000

9,233

67

11,000

6,150

88,823

68

10,900

1,800

9,306

69

10,070

11,776

8,893

70

10,000

8,000

2,000

71

10,000

1,500

17,000

72

10,000

3,500

1,335

73

9,669

1,538

125

74

9,070

2,117

25,310

75

9,040

8,081

8,262

76

8,742

2,831

7,808

77

8,419

3,083

7,713

78

8,378

9,241

6,387

79

8,000

400

100

80

7,853

1,050

6,772

81

7,525

2,295

3,955

82

7,504

1,999

98

83

7,000

5,000

2,000

84

6,900

2,975

7,290

85

6,860

1,800

5,175

86

6,850

4,460

8,921

87

6,776

3,299

1,213

Overdue

S.153

1,165

1500

7,000

2,900

16,695
1,866
iöö
4,957
6,695
3,736
768
6,778
1,479
515
1,979
6,766
5,165
1,332
2,376
87
650
126
900
1,300
'  1,529

907
482
1,900

12,000
12,515
25,3iÖ
89

5,437
’  1,872
1,605
5
3,860
775
6,752
        <pb n="95" />
        96

A  Study  of

Student  Loans

AND

fff

Amount  of

Institutions

Fund  Fstablished

Available  1923

Outstanding

Overduc

88

6,000

2,825

365

89

5,906

6,930

6,930

■

90

5,700

1,305

3,534

510

1  n

91

5,635

2,459

92

5,300

1,520

2,398

2,019

93

5,300

849

1,365

380

94

5,000

3,000

3,600

350

95

4,965

904

3,300

2,100

96

4,315

6,815

4,711

766

97

4,039

1,870

2,170

927

98

4,000

2,450

1,550

1,150

99

4,000

200

700

100

3,719

4,282

3,675

1,570

101

3,700

942

2,432

102

3,525

3,525

2,705

103

3,474

1,291

1,540

250

104

3,300

1,100

2,200

132

10S

3,250

2,575

17,682

5,249

106

3,189

627

2,563

779

107

3,150

2,600

1,450

108

3,000

3,000

2,550

200

109

3,000

1,450

2,500

75

110

3,000

1,750

1,870

285

111

3,000

3,535

12,134

4,173

112

3,000

3,000

27,890

20,555

113

3,000

1,030

114

2,944

5,089

1,865

115

2,800

2,550

2,937

180

116

2,600

2,600

313

BH  .

117

£500

11,344

2,945

118

2,442

2,442

1,590

sh

119

2,220

850

1,370

250

120

2,075

575

575

H  ■

121

2,065

2,792

2,464

450

122

2,000

1,500

1,500

123

2,000

3,100

3,100

124

2,000

2,000

150

40

B

125

1,800

1,800

1,400

126

1,650

1,650

127

1,300

356

1,903

914

128

1,250

285

495

70

129

1,200

252

390

130

1,115

200

1,045

440

131

1,107

1,107

275

132

1,084

3,658

9,399

■

133

1,000

805

400

134

1,000

400

400

135

1,000

1,000

4,105

As  may  be  seen  from  the  above  data  some  of  the  institutions  have
been  most  unsuccessful;  but  as  has  been  saicl  before,  it  is  due  in  general
to  the  administration  of  the  funds  rather  than  the  nature  of  the  transaction.
  On  the  other  hand,  a  large  number  of  institutions  have  been
surprisingly  successful.  Taking  the  entire  group,  the  proportion  of
funds  overdue  is  far  from  alarming  if  the  method  of  administration  in
many  institutions  is  taken  into  account,  and  the  fact  that  these  funds  that
        <pb n="96" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

97

are  overdue  will  eventually  be  paid  in  large  measure.  Sotne  institutions
have  been  successful  in  collecting  money  after  it  has  been  out  for  as  long
a  period  as  twenty  years.  The  relative  proportions  between  the  columns
tabulated  above  are  interesting.  The  total  amount  of  money  overdue  in
135  institutions  in  1923  was  $386,816,  which  is  approximately  one-fourth
of  $1,634,795,  the  total  amount  outstanding.  To  be  exact,  23  per  cent.
of  the  total  amount  of  funds  was  overdue.  This  is  not  surprising  when
we  consider  that  most  institutions  have  no  systematic  method  of  collecting ­
  due  and  overdue  accounts.  The  total  amount  outstanding  ($1,634,795)
is  almost  double  the  amount  available  in  one  year  (1923).  In  other
words,  a  sum  equal  to  57  per  cent.  of  the  total  amount  of  funds  outstanding ­
  was  available  for  the  purpose  of  loans  in  1923,  which  is  an
exceedingly  high  proportion.  It  means  a  very  favorable  turnover  in
loans.  One-fifth  ($944,905)  or  20  per  cent.  of  the  total  amount  of  funds
originally  established  ($4,609,088)  for  the  purpose  of  making  loans  to
students  was  available  in  1923,  which  would  indicate  a  turnover  approximately ­
  every  five  years.  Taking  into  consideration  that  some  institutions
have  been  administering  their  loans  very  poorly,  it  means  that  other
institutions  must  have  been  most  efficient  in  order  to  bring  the  average
up  to  this  favorable  level.
Selecting  The  Risk
Since  the  selection  of  the  risk  is  important  in  the  successful  administration
  of  loans,  it  is  well  that  this  element  of  Student  loans  be  fully
elaborated  here  even  at  the  risk  of  repetition.  The  supposition  is  that
Student  loans  will  be  administered  under  the  same  principles  as  commercial
  loans  with  but  a  slight  change  in  these  principles  in  order  that  they
may  be  applied  to  the  student’s  peculiar  problem.
No  mechanical  device  can  be  put  forward  and  no  set  of  rules  can  be
established  to  guide  those  who  are  to  decide  which  students  are  to  be
granted  loans.  The  proper  selection  of  the  risk  is  something  that  can
come  only  as  the  result  of  experience  in  dealing  with  students.  The
student’s  present  needs,  future  ability,  and  willingness  to  pay  are  the
deciding  factors.  His  present  needs  can  be  determined  by  the  analysis
of  his  Statement  as  to  his  present  financial  circumstances.  His  present
income  consists  of  what  he  is  able  to  receive  from  home  without  depriving
other  members  of  his  family  of  a  just  share  of  the  family  income.  If
his  family  is  in  comfortable  circumstances,  there  is  no  reason  why  the
Institution  should  help  him  financially.  If  his  family  is  not  able  or
is  unwilling  to  assist  him,  he  is  then  eligible  for  a  loan,  provided  that  his
probable  future  financial  success  warrants  it.  Here  lies  the  difficulty.
His  future  financial  success  is  hard  to  estimate,  but  if  a  Student  has  a
        <pb n="97" />
        98

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

reasonable  amount  of  intelligence,  initiative,  good  health,  and  possesses
a  reputation  for  integrity  and  for  reliability,  there  is  no  reason  why  he
should  not  get  a  loan  if  he  needs  the  money.  His  intelligence  can  be
judged  by  his  academic  Standing;  his  enterprise  by  what  he  is  already
doing  to  help  himself;  his  health  can  be  ascertained;  and  his  integrity
and  reliability  can  be  judged  by  his  past  performances  both  in  his  home
community  and  the  university  community.  These  are  the  measures  which
are  available  to  those  who  must  select  the  risk.  They  are  not  fool-proof,
but  if  used  with  caution  and  discretion,  they  are  valuable  and  furnish
sufficient  data  on  which  to  take  a  chance.  There  will  be  misjudgments
and  consequent  losses,  of  course,  but  the  losses  can  be  reduced  to  a
minimum.  There  will  be  further  losses  due  to  deaths,  but  losses  due
to  deaths  and  the  force  of  circumstances  will  constitute  a  very  small  part
of  the  total  money  loaned.  Notwithstanding  such  losses,  by  not  loaning
more  than  the  Student  will  be  able  to  repay,  by  charging  a  fair  rate  of
interest,  and  by  adopting  some  form  of  group  guarantee,  Student  loan
funds  should  not  only  be  kept  intact,  but  should  increase  of  their  own
momentum.
Size  of  Loan
There  is  at  present  a  wide  Variation  between  the  amounts  of  money
that  different  institutions  will  loan  to  one  Student.  Some  will  give
him  a  loan  during  each  of  his  last  three  years  in  College,  others  will  make
him  a  loan  in  both  his  junior  and  senior  years,  and  still  others  will  extend
a  loan  but  once  during  his  College  career.  The  size  of  the  loan  varies  with
the  number  of  times  that  the  institution  is  willing  to  extend  a  loan  to
the  same  Student.  The  following  figures  compiled  by  the  Student  Loan
Information  Bureau  show  the  maximum  amount  which  an  institution
will  lend  to  a  Student:

Maximum  Amount  Loaned
to  One  Student  Number  of  Institutions
$1,000  (during  whole  of  College  career)  2
500  2
450
400  2
350  4
300  14
250  18
200  36
150  17
100  48
50  7
25-50  (emergency  loan)  4

No  guiding  principle  can  be  deducted  from  this  Compilation.  If  it  is
possible  to  loan  $1,000  to  each  borrowing  Student  in  two  institutions,  no
        <pb n="98" />
        Tiieir  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

99

reason  can  be  found  for  making  $100  the  limit  in  48  institutions,  other
than  a  lack  of  funds.  In  spite  of  the  fact  that  only  two  institutions  extend
loans  to  the  amount  of  $1,000  to  one  Student,  this  would  seem  a  sound
practice.  A  student  who  is  worth  helping  at  all  should  be  “seen  through”
and  it  is  not  conceivable  that  anything  below  $500  would  be  of  much
assistance  to  him  during  his  four  years  of  College  life  unless  it  be  for
emergency  purposes.  To  know  how  much  money  should  be  loaned  a
Student  in  accordance  with  the  principles  of  commercial  lending,  it  would
be  necessary  to  ascertain  the  cash  value  of  his  training  and  what  Proportion ­
  of  such  cash  value  would  come  to  him  during  the  immediate  successive
years  after  leaving  College.  The  amount  of  the  loan  should  also  be
adjusted  to  the  cost  of  living  and  the  cost  of  education  in  the  community.
For  instance,  it  will  be  necessary  for  the  loans  to  be  larger  at  Columbia
University  in  New  York  City  than  at  Oberlin  College  in  Ohio.  No  reliable
figures  on  the  cash  value  of  an  education  are  available,  but  it  should  be
possible  to  compile  them.  Such  figures,  however,  could  serve  as  a  guide
only  because  they  would  be  averages  and  the  individual  cases  would
still  have  to  be  estimated  in  the  light  of  past  experiences  and  costs  in  the
individual  communities.  At  any  rate,  it  may  be  said  with  certainty  that
if  a  Student  is  loaned  money  at  all,  the  amount  should  be  sufficient  to
relieve  him  of  his  financial  burdens  to  such  an  extent  that  he  may  do
justice  to  his  academic  work  without  impairing  his  health.  Two  thousand
dollars  should  not  be  too  much  of  a  loan  to  extend  to  a  Student  who  has
good  health,  is  reliable  and  ambitious,  and  shows  signs  of  a  promising
future.  One  institution  now  has  plans  under  way  to  do  this.  Other
institutions  should  be  able  gradually  to  raise  the  amount  of  money  loaned
to  one  Student  as  they  become  more  skilled  in  the  selection  of  the
risk  and  as  experience  with  their  funds  proves  that  additional  money  can
be  profitably  used  for  this  purpose.  Funds  will  always  be  forthcoming
when  it  can  be  demonstrated  that  a  useful  purpose  is  being  served  and
that  the  money  can  be  used  over  and  over,  thus  perpetuating  an  enterprise
  which  is  socially  profitable.  More  funds  have  not  been  made  available ­
  for  student  loans  because  funds  in  hand  have  not  been  administered
so  as  to  show  that  they  served  a  useful  and  specific  purpose.  The  only
argument  therefore  which  prevents  the  granting  of  larger  loans  to  worthy
students  is  the  lack  of  funds  and  this  argument  has  been  met.  As  has
been  said,  if  loans  are  properly  administered,  sufficient  funds  can  be
obtained  eventually  and  once  a  student  has  been  granted  a  loan,  he  should
be  “seen  through“  to  the  extent  of  $1,000  to  $2,000  unless  it  is  discovered
in  the  meantime  that  the  estimate  made  of  him  at  the  time  of  granting
former  loans  is  no  longer  justified.
        <pb n="99" />
        100

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

101

Interest  Rate
The  Variation  between  the  rates  of  interest  charged  on  loans  is  as
great  as  the  difference  in  the  amounts  of  money  loaned  to  one  Student.  At
present  the  Situation  is  as  follows:
RATE  OF  INTEREST  CHARGED
Rate  Number  of  Institutions
Total  254
8%  2
7%  7
6%  118
5%  36
4%  43
3%  9
2%  13
No  interest  26
Thirteen  institutions  have  a  progressive  rate  as  follows:
3%  Ist  term  and  6%  thereafter  1
No  interest  unless  not  paid  when  due  1
6%  and  8%  if  not  paid  annually  1
2%  Service  Charge  and  5%  after  graduation  1
4%  from  date  of  note  and  5%  after  graduation  1
4%  and  5%  while  in  College  and  6%  after  graduation  1
4%  first  four  years  after  graduation  and  6%  thereafter...  2
2%  to  4%  after  graduation  and  6%  on  overdue  installments
  1
No  interest  until  three  years  after  graduation  and  4%
thereafter  1
6%  or  4%  if  note  is  paid  before  maturity  1
5%  before  graduation,  6%  after  graduation,  and  8%  after
maturity  1
5%  first  year  after  graduation  and  10%  after  maturity....  1
It  is  evident  that  there  is  no  similarity  of  practice  in  regard  to  interest
charges  among  the  various  institutions.  The  time  at  which  interest  Starts
can  be  taken  into  consideration  along  with  the  rate  charged.  The  254
institutions  reporting  sum  up  as  follows:
Interest  from  date  of  loan  193
Interest  from  date  of  leaving  school  35
No  interest  26
Total  254
What  deductions  can  be  made  from  present  practices?  There  is  no
uniformity  as  to  rate  of  interest  nor  as  to  time  of  starting  interest  charges.
There  seems  to  be  no  reason  for  exempting  students  from  paying  interest
on  loans  granted.  The  Student  takes  out  a  loan  because  he  thinks  it  is  a
good  business  venture  to  borrow  so  that  he  may  have  more  time  to
devote  to  his  intellectual  pursuits.  Not  paying  interest  or  paying  anything
        <pb n="100" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

101

loan  without  interest  he  is  in  fact  accepting  a  gift  of  $6,  in  addition  to
getting  a  loan  without  collateral.  Six  dollars  is  not  a  very  large  sum
to  add  to  his  indebtedness  and  still  it  would  change  the  color  and  put
backbone  into  the  whole  transaction.  If  the  interest  charged  is  lower
than  the  commercial  rate,  the  Student  is  given  the  difference  between  what
he  pays  and  the  commercial  rate  unless  it  can  be  shown  that  he
is  a  better  risk  than  the  average  commercial  risk.  To  Charge  less  than
the  commercial  rate  of  interest  therefore,  is  the  same  as  to  make  a  gift
of  the  difference  and  brings  in  the  same  objections  which  can  be  lodged
against  making  outright  gifts.  No  able-bodied,  self-respecting  Student
wants  to  receive  that  kind  of  help.  The  experience  of  the  Loan  Association ­
  of  the  German  Student  Body,  which  has  recently  come  into
existence  in  Germany,  has  shown  that  students  as  a  rule  prefer  to  borrow
any  necessary  money  rather  than  to  receive  it  as  charity.  This  sentiment
is  growing  among  American  students  and  there  are  groups  of  students  in
some  of  the  American  institutions  that  prefer  loans  at  a  commercial  rate
rather  than  anything  less  than  that  rate.  The  more  enterprising  Student
almost  invariably  prefers  a  loan  on  a  business  basis  to  one  made
otherwise  and  also  prefers  such  a  loan  to  a  fellowship  or  scholarship.  If
such  a  sentiment  is  not  already  ingrained  in  the  Student,  the  university
has  a  duty  to  perform  in  helping  him  to  develop  it,  for  when  he  encounters
the  outside  world,  this  quality  is  one  which  will  help  him  to  succeed.
The  same  reasons  hold  true  in  regard  to  the  time  at  which  the  interest
should  Start.  There  is  no  reason  why  the  interest  should  not  Start  from
the  time  the  loan  is  made.  So  far  as  the  rate  of  interest  and  the  time
at  which  it  begins  are  concerned,  Student  loans  should  be  handled  in
exactly  the  same  manner  as  commercial  loans.
Security  for  Student  Loans
The  different  forms  of  security  required  for  Student  loans  has  been
discussed  in  Chapter  V  and  is  referred  to  here  for  the  sake  of  emphasis
and  completeness.  As  already  stated,  the  only  security  which  the  Student
has  is  himself  and  the  only  measure  of  his  ability  to  pay  is  an  estimate
of  his  future  financial  success.  To  arrive  at  a  decision  as  to  whether
a  student  should  be  granted  a  loan  or  not  is  a  difficult  task  and  one
which  can  be  efficiently  performed  only  after  much  experience  in  judging
people  and  especially  in  judging  young  people.  Requiring  collateral  or
endorsements  is  not  good  because  the  Student  should  be  placed  on  his
own  responsibility;  an  honor  note  is  much  to  be  preferred  to  a  collateral
or  endorsed  note.  In  order  to  insure  the  loan  fund  against  heavy  losses
due  to  poor  loans,  some  form  of  group  guarantee  should  be  brought  into
use.  This  will  not  only  decrease  the  losses,  but  will  give  a  means  of
        <pb n="101" />
        102

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

bringing  about  pressure  in  cases  where  Collection  is  difficult.  If  the  members
  of  the  group  are  to  be  responsible  for  their  fellow  members,  they
are  entitled  to  a  voice  in  the  selection  of  those  composing  the  group.  This
arrangement  will  be  much  more  effective  if  it  is  done  arnong  groups
already  in  existence,  such  as  the  College  dass,  the  callege,  the  corresponding
  dass  in  different  Colleges  and  the  alumni.  So  far  as  can  be  seen  at
present,  such  a  group  guarantee  plan  when  well  administered  is  the  best
and  soundest  method  by  which  to  administer  loans.  It  is  the  only  form
of  security  which  lends  itself  effectively  to  Student  loans.

Term  of  Loan

The  term  for  which  loans  are  granted  differs  widely  in  various  institutions.
  According  to  information  made  available  on  this  point  the  present
policies  are  in  effect:

Term  of  L,oan
Total
5  years  after  graduation
4  i&amp;lt;  «  ii
^  ii  ii  ii
2  “

Repayment  before  graduation
10  years  from  date  of  loan..
9
8
7
6
S
4
3
2
1

Number  of  Institutions
Reporting
110
14
2
4
4
31
2
!.!!  2
i
1
2
1
6
2
6
10
12

The  Situation  as  revealed  by  this  data  is  astonishing.  What  is
apparently  a  simple  problem  is  being  handled  in  sixteen  different  ways  in
110  institutions.  Regardless  of  what  local  conditions  are,  they  ought  not
to  influence  greatly  the  term  of  the  loan.  Loans  to  students  are  in  part
investment  loans  and  in  part  commercial  loans.  In  determining  the  term
of  the  loan,  it  is  therefore  possible  to  apply  the  same  principles  that  prevail
in  investment  banking  and  in  commercial  banking.  Accordingly  both
long  term  and  short  term  loans  are  made  to  students.  The  short  term
loans  are  for  emergency  purposes  and  should  constitute  a  small  Proportion ­
  of  all  those  made.  The  long  term  loans  are  made  to  assist  the
Student  to  finance  himself  through  school  and  therefore  repayment  in  the
near  future  cannot  and  should  not  be  expected.  If  the  loan  is  to  be  successful
  and  the  terms  of  the  contract  complied  with,  it  is  necessary  that
such  terms  be  in  conformity  with  the  period  of  turnover  in  the  business
        <pb n="102" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

103

in  which  the  loan  is  made.  The  period  of  turnover  in  education  is  neither
one  nor  ten  years,  but  is  in  fact  five  years  and  loans  to  students  must  be
made  on  this  basis  to  be  successful.  The  Student  must  not  be  given  terms
with  which  it  may  be  concluded  in  advance,  he  will  not  be  able  to  comply.
Five  years  from  the  date  of  the  loan  is  the  best  period.  What  he
borrows  in  his  freshman  year  he  will  not  be  able  to  pay  before  one  year
after  graduation.  On  the  other  hand,  if  he  is  planning  for  a  successful
career  he  must  manage  to  pay  his  freshman  loans  within  two  years  after
graduation.  The  obligations  which  he  incurs  during  his  sophomore  year
likewise  can  and  should  be  paid  at  the  end  of  three  years  after  graduation.
So,  too,  loans  made  in  the  junior  year  can  be  paid  four  years  after  graduation ­
  and  those  contracted  for  in  the  senior  year  paid  five  years  after
graduation.  If  the  Student  is  planning  a  College  course  of  more  than
four  years,  the  term  of  the  loan  should  be  adjusted  accordingly.  Some
will  need  six  year  loans,  some  seven  year  loans,  and  perhaps  a  few  will
require  loans  for  a  longer  period.  In  all  cases  the  term  of  the  loan  is  not
to  depend  on  the  institution,  but  on  the  number  of  years  that  the  Student
will  remain  in  College  and  how  soon  he  will  begin  to  “cash  in”  on  his
training  after  leaving  College.  This  will  depend  on  what  profession  or  field
of  endeavor  he  enters.
By  far  the  largest  number  of  loans  are  long  term  loans,  but  it  is  also
necessary  that  institutions  be  prepared  to  help  the  students  over  emergency
periods  of  a  few  weeks  or  months.  A  short  term  loan  can  be  handled  in
the  same  manner  as  a  commercial  loan,  its  duration  being  no  longer  than  is
necessary  for  the  Student  to  obtain  funds  to  cancel  the  note.  In  no  case
should  it  extend  over  one  semester.  If  the  money  is  needed  for  a  longer
period  than  this,  it  would  be  well  to  consider  it  a  long  term  loan  and
handle  it  as  such.
Methods  of  Repayment
The  policy  of  institutions  on  the  question  of  repayments  has  been
varied.  Much  laxity  is  to  be  found  in  this  respect  and  especially  is
there  a  lack  of  definiteness  as  to  how  and  when  the  loans  are  to  be  paid.
Three  reasons  may  be  assigned  for  this:  first,  sheer  neglect  of  entering
into  a  definite  agreement;  second,  entering  into  agreements  which  will  be
impossible  for  the  Student  to  carry  out;  and  third,  not  understanding  how
collections  can  best  be  made,  or  not  making  such  knowledge  efifective.
Of  one  hundred  and  five  institutions  answering  an  inquiry  sent  out
by  the  Student  Loan  Information  Bureau  in  regard  to  methods  of  making
repayments,  sixteen  institutions  reported  that  payment  was  required  in
full  when  the  loan  became  due,  sixty  reported  the  installment  method  of
        <pb n="103" />
        104

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

repayment,  and  twenty-nine  reported  that  it  was  optional  with  the  Student
as  to  which  method  he  wished  to  adopt.

The  same  may  be  said  of  the  method  of  repayment  as  has  been  said

of  the  term  of  the  loan.  There  is  no  reason  for  different  institutions  to
adopt  opposite  methods  of  repayment.  That  workable  method  which  is
best  for  one  institution  is  usually  best  for  the  others.  Students  of  all
Colleges,  as  a  group,  go  through  similar  experiences  after  leaving  College
and  the  method  of  repayment  which  is  the  most  convenient  and  effective
for  the  students  of  one  institution  is  equally  practical  for  the  students
of  other  institutions.
A  Student  who  must  borrow  to  go  through  College  will  not,  for  several
years,  be  in  a  position  to  pay  off  a  note  of  a  few  hundred  dollars  all  at
once.  When  an  institution  requires  payment  in  full  at  a  specified  time,  it
is  requiring  the  impossible  unless  the  note  falls  due  four  or  five  years
after  graduation.
Even  then  it  is  a  bad  policy  from  the  standpoint  of  the  institution
because  although  the  student  cannot  pay  the  entire  amount  before  several
years  have  elapsed,  he  would  be  able  to  pay  small  periodical  installments.
This  would  keep  his  interest  in  the  loan  alive,  would  render  repayment
easier  for  the  student,  and  would  make  some  of  the  funds  available  to  be
reloaned  sooner.
The  installment  method  of  repayment  is  by  far  the  best  and  it  need
not  entail  as  much  accounting  as  might  be  supposed.  There  are,  however,
  several  kinds  of  installment  payments,  some  of  which  can  be  adjusted
to  meet  the  student’s  peculiar  needs.  The  amortized  form  is  no  doubt  the
best.  It  is  peculiarly  adopted  to  the  student’s  economic  progress.  After
leaving  College,  the  student  will  be  able  to  work  off  increasingly  larger
payments  as  he  becomes  better  established  and  his  income  increases.  The
interest  on  the  loan  can  thus  be  included  in  each  payment  and  will  not
fall  due  in  a  large  amount  at  an  inopportune  time.  Since  the  student  will
be  able  to  make  increasingly  larger  payments,  it  is  right  that  he  be  required
to  do  so  in  order  that  the  money  be  released  sooner  to  be  reloaned  to  new
students.  It  may  be  said  in  passing  that  graduates  who  are  able  to  turn
their  College  loans  into  commercial  loans  should  be  encouraged  to  do  so
in  order  to  make  the  money  available  sooner  for  more  loans.  It  would
not  be  difficult  to  carry  out  such  a  policy  if  graduated  students  were  approached
  in  the  right  manner,  individually  or  through  the  alumni.
The  size  of  the  payments  should  be  very  small  at  first  and  gradually
rise  each  successive  month.  Monthly  installments  are  perhaps  the  best.  It
is  a  good  plan  to  arrange  that  payments  fall  due  only  during  the  ten
academic  months.  There  are  two  reasons  for  this:  first,  the  student  is
better  able  to  pay  during  these  months  since  he  must  provide  for  vaca-
        <pb n="104" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

105

tion  during  the  summer  months;  second,  the  loan  would  be  easier  to
administer  in  this  manner  since  it  could  be  extended  in  monthly  allowances
  during  the  academic  year  and  repaid  on  the  corresponding  dates  five
years  later  deferring  a  certain  per  Cent,  of  each  monthly  allowance  to  the
corresponding  dates  of  a  later  year,  the  amount  deferred  being  in  accordance
  with  the  amortized  plan  for  repayment.  It  may  seem  involved  to
attempt  such  a  method  but,  with  the  working  out  of  suitable  tables,  it
would  become  practically  automatic  and  require  very  little  bookkeeping.
It  would  be  highly  commendable  if  the  amounts  loaned  were  made  in
multiples  of  $10  in  all  institutions.  Ten  dollars  is  sufficiently  small  to
meet  all  requirements.  If  a  Student  wants  $25  he  can  either  get  along
on  $20  or  use  $30  to  advantage.  The  adoption  of  such  a  unit  would
simplify  matters  considerably  and  institutions  could  then  cooperate  in
the  printing  of  tables,  record  blanks,  and  necessary  forms  for  the  carrying
  out  of  such  a  System.  Using  $10  as  the  basic  unit,  ten  months  as
the  unit  of  time  and  five  years  as  the  period  of  the  loan,  an  almost  ideal
System  could  be  set  up  that  would  be  much  more  practical  than  any  now
in  use  or  as  yet  devised.  With  the  necessary  printed  tables  the  System
would  be  simple  to  operate.

Collections
It  has  been  found  that  there  exists  no  consistency  of  thought  in  regard
to  the  selection  of  the  risk,  the  size  of  the  loans,  interest  rates,  security,
the  term  of  the  loans  or  methods  of  repayment.  In  so  far  as  the  Collection ­
  of  Student  loans  is  concerned,  a  certainty  of  System  is  lacking.
Very  little  attention  has  been  given  to  this  side  of  the  question  in  most
institutions.  In  general,  they  have  had  no  collection  Systems;  those  that
have  attempted  to  collect  have  done  so  only  after  loans  were  long  overdue
and  the  borrower  had  grown  callous  in  his  attitude  toward  his  College
loans.  In  many  cases  he  has  found  it  good  business  not  to  pay  his  College
loan  on  which  he  paid  little  or  no  interest  and  instead  to  put  his  money
into  commercial  and  investment  ventures  which  net  him  a  good  return.
After  the  loans  have  been  permitted  to  lapse  for  some  time  without  reason,
collection  is  all  the  more  difficult.  A  sound  System  must  aim  not  only  at
collecting  loans  overdue,  but  must  take  the  matter  in  hand  soon  enough
so  that  loans  will  be  paid  when  due.  This  is  another  side  of  Student  loans
where  business  principles  can  be  taken  over  bodily.  The  final  stage  in  a  loan
transaction  is  to  induce  payment  on  time.  Institutions,  even  where  otherwise
  successful,  have  not  properly  analyzed  this  end  of  the  loan  contract
and  seldom  have  they  undertaken  to  close  the  transaction  in  a  businesslike
  manner.  Their  appeals  for  the  payment  of  loans  overdue  have  not
        <pb n="105" />
        106

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

been  sufficiently  exacting  and  have  often  taken  an  apologetic  form.  Some
institutions  have  looked  upon  a  rigid  System  of  collection  of  outstanding
funds  as  below  their  dignity  and  strangely  enough  have  seemed  to  prefer
seeking  funds  from  outside  sources  to  collecting  debts  that  are  rightfully
due  to  them.  So  lacking  in  sound  principles  is  this  that  under  our  present
economic  and  commercial  Organization  it  can  persist  only  to  the  detriment
of  higher  education.  It  is  mockery  for  an  institution  to  teach  principles
which  it  does  not  practice,  for  while  on  the  one  hand  it  attempts  to  instill
ideals  into  youths  at  the  same  time  it  undermines  these  teachings  by  its
business  dealings  with  the  Student  body.
An  effective  System  must  be  exacting,  precise,  and  prompt.  It  must
be  sympathetic  only  when  the  circumstances  warrant  sympathy.  The
borrower  must  be  approached  at  the  right  moment,  which  is  just  before
the  loan  falls  due.  The  longer  the  payment  lapses  the  more  hardened
he  becomes  to  his  obligations  and  the  more  difficult  it  is  to  collect.  The
borrower  should  be  sent  a  notice  that  his  payment  is  soon  to  fall  due.
This  notice  should  be  sent  sufficiently  in  advance  so  that  he  may  have  time
to  make  provision  to  pay  the  installment.  If  he  fails  to  pay  and  offers
no  explanation,  a  second  notice  should  be  sent  him.  Both  notices  can  be
printed  or  in  mimeographed  form.  If  these  two  reminders  fail  to  bring
in  a  payment  or  an  explanation,  he  can  be  notified  in  a  personal  way  which
will  be  suitecl  to  his  peculiar  case.  This  third  notice  would  cliffer  in  each
case,  depending  on  whether  delinquency  has  been  characteristic  of  all
previous  installments  or  whether  it  has  occurred  after  several  payments
have  been  promptly  made.  In  any  case,  the  delinquent  should  be  followed
up  closely  in  a  tactful  but  firm  manner.  If  the  borrower  is  made  to  meet
his  first  payments  on  time,  he  will  find  it  easier  to  meet  the  other  payments ­
  in  the  same  manner.

Organization  to  Administer  Loans
Having  discussed  the  administration  of  loans  and  the  principles
which  should  guide  such  administration,  it  is  important  that  something
be  said  as  to  what  Organization  can  best  undertake  it.  There  are  four
types  of  organizations  that  could  take  up  this  task  and  see  it  to  a
successful  end.  Higher  educational  officials  are  at  variance  as  to
what  Organization  can  best  administer  Student  loans.  Some  are  of  the
opinion  that  all  loans  can  and  should  be  administered  best  by  the  institution ­
  while  others  believe  that  an  outside  Organization  can  perform  the
task  more  effectively.  Still  others  believe  that  the  Organization  which
constitutes  the  source  of  the  funds  should  either  take  care  of  them
itself  or  make  provisions  for  their  administration.  These  are  poor
        <pb n="106" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educationae  Finance

107

methods  of  approaching  the  subject  because  it  is  not  who  should
administer  the  funds  that  must  be  considered,  but  which  organizations
can  administer  them  in  the  most  effective  way.  The  organizations  which
fall  under  consideration  in  regard  to  Student  loans  are:  the  educational
Institution  itself,  the  philanthropic  and  semi-philanthropic  foundations,
banks  and  trust  Companies,  and  charitable,  religious,  and  fraternal  organizations. ­

Charitable,  Religious,  and  Fraternal  Organizations
The  religious,  charitable,  and  fraternal  organizations  which  have
made  provisions  to  grant  scholarships,  fellowships,  and  loans  to  students
in  most  cases  administer  the  funds  themselves.  This  is  as  it  should  be.
No  funds  should  be  accepted  for  administration  by  institutions  unless
they  are  turned  over  unconditionally.  If  numerous  restrictions  and
qualifications  are  made  by  those  making  funds  available,  Provision  should
be  made  for  their  administration.  Where  the  College  or  university  has
a  well  worked-out  System  of  Student  loans,  funds  turned  over  to  it  should
be  received  with  the  understanding  that  they  will  be  administered  as  all
other  funds  in  the  institution.  The  numerous  funds,  with  the  various
provisions  that  now  exist  in  institutions,  are  a  drawback  to  an  efficient
System  of  loans.  They  multiply  the  work  and  complicate  the  bookkeeping
connected  with  loans.  It  would  seem  a  wise  policy  for  institutions  to
refuse  to  administer  funds  from  such  organizations  unless  given  a  free
hand  in  directing  them.  If  organizations  refuse  to  accept  such  conditions,
they  should  make  provision  to  handle  the  funds  themselves.
Banks  and  Trust  Companies
Loans  may  also  be  administered  by  banks  and  trust  Companies  either
as  a  semi-philanthropic  venture  or  as  a  purely  business  proposition.  Some
banks  and  trust  Companies  have  been  loaning  money  to  students  on  a
purely  business  basis  and  have  been  very  successful.  In  some  cases  they
have  required  insurance  or  other  collateral,  in  others  organizations  or
individuals  stood  ready  to  make  good  the  losses,  but  up  to  date  this  has
not  been  necessary.  The  most  notable  examples  of  such  ventures  have
been  in  New  York  City,  California,  Texas,  and  in  some  European  countries. ­
  In  all  four  localities  it  has  proven  an  effective  way  of  assisting
students.  There  is  no  question  but  that  such  a  venture  on  the  part  of
financial  institutions  is  sound.  Trust  Companies  should  be  well  adapted  to
handle  Student  loans.  Such  funds  would  render  valuable  Service  to
students  and  Supplement  well  the  loan  funds  handled  by  other  organizations. ­
        <pb n="107" />
        108

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

There  is  a  question,  however,  as  to  whether  it  would  be  wise  for
educational  institutions  to  turn  over  loan  funds  to  financial  organizations
for  administration.  Those  who  are  in  doubt  as  to  the  wisdom  of  such
a  Step  believe:  first,  that  the  educational  institution  can  handle  the  matter
as  well  as  the  financial  institution;  second,  that  if  the  students  do  not
repay,  it  will  reflect  on  the  university  and  the  university  will  have  to  make
good  the  defaults;  third,  since  the  university  would  have  to  make  good
these  defaults  the  bank  or  trust  Company  might  not  use  its  utmost  efforts
to  press  collection;  fourth,  that  it  is  questionable  whether  some  financial
institutions  could  administer  such  funds  more  efficiently  than  educational ­
  institutions;  fifth,  that  some  officials  are  reluctant  to  relinquish  their
power  over  the  administration  of  Student  loans;  sixth,  that  many  of  the
funds  are  so  tied  up  that  provisions  must  be  made  to  administer  them  at
the  institution  and  since  this  must  be  done  machinery  may  as  well  be
developed  to  administer  all  of  the  Student  loans.
We  conclude  that:
1.  Institutions  must  make  provisions  to  administer  the  funds
intrusted  to  them  for  Student  loans.
2.  Banks  and  Trust  Companies  are  well  adapted  to  lending  money
to  students  and  due  to  the  legal  restrictions  placed  upon  them,
there  is  little  danger  that  they  will  go  to  extremes  in  this  matter.
Their  efforts  should  be  a  valuable  Supplement  to  those  made  by
the  educational  institutions.
3.  Universities  and  Colleges  must  develop  higher  Standards  and
more  efficiency  in  the  administration  of  Student  loans.
Philanthropie  and  Semi-Philanthropic  Organizations
The  administration  of  Student  loans  by  those  organizations  which  fall
under  this  dass  is  much  to  be  desired.  Organizations  such  as  the  Harmon
Foundation,  can  well  administer  funds  to  students  and  in  that  way  be
of  great  Service  to  higher  education.  The  Service  is  of  two  kinds:  first,
that  actually  rendered  in  the  making  of  loans,  which  enable  young  people
to  finance  themselves  through  College  in  an  independent  and  business-like
way;  and  second,  that  of  raising  the  Standards  in  loan  administration
since  organizations  of  this  type  are  not  hampered  by  institutional  views
as  are  Colleges  and  universities.  The  first  is  a  direct  benefit,  the  second
is  a  benefit  derived  through  wholesome  influence.  Such  foundations  are
therefore  of  Service  in  their  influence  and  work  and  their  loans  form  a
valuable  Supplement  to  loans  made  by  educational  institutions  and  other
organizations.
        <pb n="108" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

109

The  Educational  Institution
Colleges  and  universities  must,  therefore,  administer  at  least  some
of  the  Student  loans,  but  there  exists  no  unanimity  of  opinion  as  to  how
they  can  best  do  this.  Past  experience  does  not  prove  a  valuable  source
from  which  to  draw,  so  it  is  necessary  to  turn  to  organizations  other  than
the  universities  and  Colleges.  The  most  fruitful  fields  from  which  to
draw,  as  this  thesis  indicates  throughout,  are  those  of  commercial  and
investment  lending.  Higher  educational  institutions  need  to  work  out  new
policies  and  develop  a  System  for  the  administration  of  Student  loans.  Such
policies  and  System  can  be  built  by  taking  over  the  most  effective  elements
to  be  found  in  commercial  and  investment  banking;  in  the  Harmon
plan;  in  Systems  used  in  Europe;  and  also  by  making  use  of  the  principles
which  are  set  forth  in  this  study  as  the  results  of  an  inquiry  conducted  by
the  Student  Loan  Information  Bureau.
        <pb n="109" />
        [110]

A  STUDY  OF  STUDENT  LOANS  AND  THEIR  RELATION  TO
HIGHER  EDUCATIONAL  FINANCE

DIGEST
1.  Changing  Basis  of  Higher  Education  and  its  Financial  Support
Throughout  the  entire  development  of  higher  education  we  find  that
the  purpose  for  which  it  existed  and  its  sources  of  financial  support  were
closely  related.  There  are  three  reasons  for  the  existence  and  liberal
support  of  educational  institutions:
A.  Cultural—which  seeks  the  religious  or  spiritual  welfare  and  also
the  advancement  of  knowledge  in  unremunerative  fields.
B.  Political—which  aims  at  training  for  citizenship.  The  cultural
aims  of  education  also  bear  directly  on  the  training  for  citizenship.
C.  Economic—which  seeks  the  increase  of  the  physical  wealth,  comfort, ­
  and  happiness  of  the  individual  and  of  humanity  through  the
advancement  and  dissemination  of  knowledge.
2.  Three  Sources  of  Higher  Educational  Income
A.  Endowments  and  gifts,  or  the  philanthropic  sources.
B.  Appropriations  and  gifts  from  city,  state,  and  national  governments,
  including  land  grants.
C.  Fees  and  tuition  paid  by  students,  or  income  from  students’  fees
for  tuition  and  other  educational  Services.
3.  Income  According  to  its  Source  Compared  with  Benefits  Derived
from  Higher  Education
A.  Income  from  Student  fees  has  not  risen  proportionately  to  that  of
income  from  other  sources  but  has  in  reality  decreased.
B.  Educational  charges  in  the  various  schools  or  higher  educational
institutions,  both  public  and  private,  have  not  been  apportioned
with  due  consideration  of  the  differences  in  the  economic  value  of
the  training  the  Student  receives  from  the  various  schools  or
departments.
C.  The  financial  policies  of  institutions  must  be  gradually  remodeled
in  accordance  with  the  changing  economic  conditions  and  the  new
purpose  for  which  higher  education  exists  which  will  necessitate  a
change  of  policy  in  regard  to  Student  finance.
D.  The  general  claim  that  higher  education  justifies  large  state  appropriations ­
  because  of  the  subsequent  value  to  society  of  the  persons
it  trains,  is  equally  applicable  to  any  form  of  training,  physical,
cultural,  or  vocational.
        <pb n="110" />
        1  '  \  '  ;

A  Study  of  Student  Loans

111

E.  An  attempt  should  be  made  to  allocate  costs  of  higher  education
to  the  various  sources  of  revenue  in  proportion  to  the  benefits
which  institutions  of  higher  learning  have  to  offer  to  the  individuals,
  groups,  and  organizations  front  which  the  revenues  are
derived.

4.  The  Allocation  of  Costs
A.  The  allocation  to  society,  the  philanthropist,  and  the  individual  who
is  the  recipient  of  the  educational  benefits.
B.  The  allocation  within  the  Institution  among  the  various  schools,
faculties,  classes,  and  individuals  attending;  these  costs  to  be
allocated  proportionately  with  the  purposes  which  such  education
serves.

5.  Assumed  Results  Under  Cost  Allocation  As  Above
A.  It  would  place  higher  education  on  a  sounder  financial  basis  by
balancing  costs  of  certain  educational  efforts  against  specific
sources  of  income.  This  would  enable  those  seeking  funds  public
and  private,  to  give  specific  reasons  for  asking  for  financial  Support ­
  and  to  point  to  definite  benefits  which  such  a  support  would
produce.
B.  The  financial  program  of  higher  education  should  be  such  as  to
enable  it  to  receive  support  commensurate  with  its  importance.
C.  If  business  methods  were  used  in  the  handling  of  educational  funds
and  the  support  of  higher  education  were  sought  on  a  definite
basis  of  what  it  produces,  the  necessary  funds  would  be  obtainable.
D.  Proper  cost  allocation  would  advance  the  educational  aims  of  institutions ­
  by  making  larger  funds  available  for  the  carrying  on  of
educational  projects,  and  thereby  hasten  their  realization.
E.  Such  cost  allocation  would  mean  higher  tuition  fees,  which  present
a  perplexing  but  not  insurmountable  problem.  Well  administered
Student  finance  would  furnish  one  way  to  meet  these  new  demands.
6.  The  Amount  of  Money  Loaned  to  a  Student  Should  Depend  Upon:
A.  The  individual.
B.  The  type  of  education  desired.
C.  The  institution  and  its  reputation  for  turning  out  high  grade  men.
D.  The  known  opportunities  which  present  themselves  to  each  group
of  students  after  graduation  according  to  type  of  training.
E.  The  extent  to  which  the  training  will  increase  the  student’s  earning
  capacity.
        <pb n="111" />
        112

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

7.  Reasons  for  Lösses  in  the  Past
A.  Loan  Funds  have  not  been  properly  administered.
(1)  Lack  of  definite  agreements  with  borrowers.
(2)  Student  was  not  made  to  realize  the  Obligation  he  was  undertaking—the
  institution  failed  to  develop  a  clear-cut  sense  of
responsibility.
(3)  The  risk  was  not  properly  selected.
(4)  There  were  no  systematic  collections.
(5)  The  charging  of  no  interest  or  too  low  interest.
B.  The  institution  failed  to  “see  the  Student  through”.  Loans  were
made  in  the  early  part  of  the  College  career  and  additional  loans
were  refused,  which  kept  the  Student  from  finishing  his  education.
C.  The  institution  failed  to  realize  how  a  right  kind  of  loan  policy  can
be  made  a  means  of  character  building.
8.  Expenses  Listed  in  Announcements
There  should  be  a  more  accurate  estimate  of  what  students  need  to
spend  so  as  to  relieve  the  loan  office  of  unexpected  demands  for  loans.
9.  Students  Should  be  Helped  to  Budget  More  Accurately  in  Order
that  necessary  provision  may  be  made  for  loan  demands.
10.  Fellowships  and  Scholarships  would  be  Administered
most  advantageously  if  the  following  guiding  principles  were  adhered
to:
A.  A  Fellowship  should  be  an  honor  awarded  for  proved  scholastic
ability  with  a  promise  of  greater  development  of  that  ability.
B.  A  Scholarship  should  be  an  honor  awarded  to  those  who  give
promise  of  scholastic  ability.
C.  The  financial  consideration  should  be  of  secondary  importance.
It  should  be  given  only  to  those  fellows  and  scholars  who  need  it
in  order  to  do  their  best  work.
D.  If  the  training  received  and  the  work  done  has  an  economic  value,
the  financial  assistance  should  be  in  the  form  of  a  loan;  if  not,  it
should  be  in  the  form  of  a  periodical  allowance.
E.  The  Fellowship  and  Scholarship  should  be  held  only  as  long  as
the  holder  produces  something  specific  in  the  way  of  advancing
or  of  organizing  knowledge.
        <pb n="112" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

113

previous  year  shows  that  there  is  no  uniformity  in  the  administration  of
Student  loans  in  the  various  Colleges  and  universities.
In  working  out  a  policy  for  the  administration  of  Student  loans,  it  is
desirable  to  incorporate  all  that  is  best  from  the  various  methods  in  use.
12.  Methods  of  Administration
Loan  funds  are  administered  under  two  methods.  The  restricted
method,  which  is  loaning  only  the  income  from  the  fund,  and  the  revolving
method,  which  is  loaning  both  income  and  principal.  There  are  many  more
funds  administered  under  the  restricted  method  than  there  are  under  the
revolving  method,  notwithstanding  the  fact  that  of  the  93  institutions
which  answered  an  inquiry  sent  out  by  the  Student  Loan  Information
Bureau,  69  replied  that  they  favored  the  revolving  fund.
The  actual  conditions  reported  show:
CHARACTER  AND  AMOUNT  OF  FUNDS  AVAILABLE  1924-1925

Revolving  $187,253  10  funds
Restricted  704,000  12  “
Emergency  5,000  2  “
Not  specified  3,205,786  288  “

If  a  large  part,  the  “not  specified”  funds  ($3,205,786),  is  “restricted”,
as  it  is  safe  to  suppose,  the  proportion  of  available  funds  actually  to  be
classified  as  “restricted”  is  overwhelming.  Much  of  this  money  was  left
in  the  restricted  form  and  must  continue  to  be  thus  administered.  However,
  it  is  safe  to  assume  that  there  are  many  of  these  funds  that  could  be
placed  on  a  revolving  basis.  The  revolving  fund  has  the  more  weighty
arguments  in  its  favor  besides  having  the  favorable  sentiment  of  a  large
majority  of  officials.
The  greater  efficiency  of  the  revolving  fund  is  indisputable.  For
example,  a  fund  of  $100,000  at  5%  yields  $5,000  annually  and  would  be
sufficient  to  make  a  loan  of  $250  to  20  students.  Over  a  period  of  fifteen
years  it  would  be  able  to  make  300  such  loans.  On  the  other  hand,
$100,000  if  turned  into  a  revolving  fund,  allowing  $20,000  of  the  principal
to  be  loaned  annually  for  the  first  five  years,  and  revolved  for  an  additional
ten  years,  would  be  sufficient  to  make  1,475  such  loans  which  means  that
it  would  serve  practically  five  times  as  many  students.
Some  officials  and  donors  fear  that  if  the  principal  as  well  as  the
income  is  loaned,  the  fund  will  eventually  disappear.  This  fear  is  well
founded  only  if  it  is  admitted  that  funds  cannot  be  efficiently  administered.
Those  who  administer  student  loans  can  well  afford  to  borrow  some  of  the
principles  from  the  business  world  that  make  loaning  in  small  sums  successful.
  Colleges  and  universities  that  have  tried  these  principles  of  busi ­
        <pb n="113" />
        114

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

ness  loaning  have  been  remarkably  successful  in  administering  Student
loans.  There  is  no  more  risk  involved  in  Student  loans  than  there  is  in
commercial  loans,  where  as  great  care  is  taken  in  the  selection  of  the  risks
and  the  funds  are  administered  in  a  firm  business-like  manner.
13.  Past  Experience  of  Institutions  with  Loan  Funds
The  experience  of  institutions  in  general  has  not  been  encouraging.
However,  many  institutions  have  been  successful  in  the  administration  of
their  loan  funds.
Taking  the  entire  group,  the  proportion  of  overdue  loans  is  far  from
alarming  if  some  allowance  is  made  for  the  inadequate  method  of  administration ­
  in  many  institutions.
14.  Selecting  the  Risk
No  set  rules  can  be  established  to  guide  those  who  are  to  decide  which
students  are  to  be  granted  loans.  The  student’s  present  needs,  future
ability,  and  willingness  to  pay  are  the  deciding  factors.  His  present  needs
can  be  determined  by  the  analysis  of  his  Statement  as  to  his  present  financial
circumstances.  His  future  financial  success  is  hard  to  estimate,  but  if  a
student  has  a  reasonable  amount  of  intelligence,  initiative,  good  health,  and
possesses  integrity  and  reliability,  there  is  no  reason  whv  he  should  not  get
a  loan  if  he  needs  the  money.  By  not  loaning  more  than  the  Student  will
be  able  to  repay,  by  charging  a  fair  rate  of  interest,  and  by  adopting  some
form  of  group  guarantee,  Student  loan  funds  should  not  only  be  kept
intact,  but  should  increase  as  any  productive  investment.
15.  Size  of  Loan
There  is  at  present  a  wide  Variation  between  the  amounts  of  money
that  the  different  institutions  will  loan  to  one  student.  In  spite  of  the  fact
that  only  two  institutions  (out  of  153  reporting)  extend  loans  to  the
amount  of  $1,000  to  one  student,  this  would  seem  the  soundest  practice.  A
student  who  is  worth  helping  at  all  should  be  “seen  through”  and  it  is
not  likely  that  less  than  $1,000  will  be  sufficient  to  see  him  through  four
years  of  College  life  unless  it  be  for  emergency  purposes.  The  amount  of
the  loan  should  also  be  adjusted  to  the  cost  of  living  and  the  cost  of  education
  in  the  community.
Also,  if  a  student  is  loaned  money  at  all,  the  amount  should  be  sufficient ­
  to  relieve  him  of  his  financial  burdens  to  such  an  extent  that  he  may
do  justice  to  his  academic  work  without  impairing  his  health.  Two  thousand
  dollars  should  not  be  too  much  of  a  loan  to  extend  to  a  student  who
has  good  health,  is  reliable  and  ambitious,  and  shows  signs  of  a  promising
future.
        <pb n="114" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

115

16.  Interest  Rate
The  Variation  between  the  rates  of  interest  charged  on  loans  is  as
great  as  the  difference  in  the  amounts  of  loans;  254  institutions  report
rates  of  frora  no  interest  to  8%.  Thirteen  institutions  have  progressive
rates.
The  time  at  which  interest  Starts  can  he  taken  into  consideration  along
with  the  rate  charged.  The  254  institutions  reporting  sum  up  as  follows:

Interest  from  date  of  loan  193
Interest  from  date  of  leaving  school  35
No  interest  26
Total  254

There  seems  to  be  no  reason  for  exempting  students  from  paying
interest  on  loans  granted.  Not  paying  interest  or  paying  anything  below
the  commercial  rate  is  the  same  as  accepting  a  gift.  No  able-bodied,  selfrespecting
  student  wants  to  receive  that  kind  of  help.  There  is  no  reason
why  the  interest  should  not  start  from  the  time  the  loan  is  made.  So  far
as  the  rate  of  interest  and  the  time  at  which  it  begins  are  concerned,
Student  loans  should  be  handled  exactly  in  the  same  manner  as  commercial
loans.
17.  Security  for  Student  Loans
The  only  security  which  the  Student  has  is  himself,  and  the  only
measure  of  his  ability  to  pay  is  an  estimate  of  his  future  financial  success.
The  requiring  of  collateral  or  signatures  is  not  good  because  the  Student
should  be  placed  on  his  own  responsibility;  an  honor  note  is  much  to  be
preferred  to  a  collateral  or  endorsed  note.  In  order  to  insure  the  loan
fund  against  heavy  losses  due  to  poor  loans,  some  form  of  group  guarantee
should  be  devised.  The  grouping  will  be  much  more  effective  if  it  is  done
among  groups  already  in  existence  such  as  the  College  dass,  the  College,
the  corresponding  dass  in  different  Colleges,  and  the  alumni.  It  is  the  only
form  of  security  which  lends  itself  effectively  to  student  loans.
18.  Term  of  Loan
The  term  for  which  loans  are  granted  differs  widely  in  institutions;
110  institutions  report  maturities  from  graduation  to  five  years  after  and
from  one  year  from  date  of  loan  to  ten  years  after.
In  determining  the  term  of  the  loan  it  is  possible  to  apply  the  same
principles  as  prevail  in  investment  banking  and  in  commercial  banking.
The  short  term  loans  are  for  emergency  purposes  and  should  constitute  a
small  proportion  of  the  loans  made.  The  long  term  loans  are  made  to
        <pb n="115" />
        116

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

assist  the  Student  to  finance  himself  through  school  and  therefore  repayment
  in  the  near  future  cannot  and  should  not  be  expected.  If  the  loan
is  to  be  successful  and  the  terms  of  the  contract  complied  with,  it  is  necessary
  that  such  terms  be  in  conformity  with  the  period  of  turnover  in  the
business  where  the  loans  are  made.  The  period  of  turnover  in  education  is
five  years  and  loans  to  students  must  be  made  on  this  basis  to  be  successful.
Five  years  from  the  date  of  the  loan  is  the  best  period.
By  far  the  larger  number  of  loans  are  long  term  loans,  but  it  is  necessary
  that  institutions  be  prepared  to  help  the  students  over  emergency
periods  of  a  few  weeks  or  months.  These  loans  can  be  handled  in  the
same  manner  as  commercial  loans.  The  term  not  to  be  longer  than  is
necessary  for  the  Student  to  obtain  funds  to  cancel  the  note.  In  no  case
should  it  extend  over  one  semester.

19.  Methods  of  Repayment
Out  of  105  institutions,  16  reported  that  payment  was  required  in
full  when  the  loan  became  due,  60  reported  the  installment  method  of
repayment,  and  29  reported  that  it  was  optional  with  the  Student.
There  is  no  reason  for  different  institutions  to  adopt  divergent
methods  of  repayment.  Any  workable  method  that  is  best  for  one  institution
  is  usually  best  for  others.  When  an  institution  requires  payment  in
full  at  a  specified  time,  it  is  requiring  the  impossible  unless  the  note  falls
due  four  or  five  years  after  graduation.
The  installment  method  of  repayment  is  by  far  the  best,  and  it  need
not  entail  as  much  accounting  as  some  suppose.  There  is,  however,  more
than  one  kind  of  installment  payment  plan,  and  it  is  necessary  to  adjust
the  one  used  to  the  student’s  peculiar  needs.  The  amortized  form  is  no
doubt  the  best.  After  leaving  College  the  Student  will  be  able  to  work  off
increasingly  larger  payments  as  he  becomes  better  established  and  his
income  increases.  The  filterest  on  the  loan  can  thus  be  included  in  each
payment  and  will  not  fall  due  in  a  large  amount  at  an  inopportune  time.
Since  the  Student  will  be  able  to  make  continuously  larger  payments  it  is
right  that  he  be  required  to  do  so  in  Order  that  the  money  be  released
sooner  to  be  reloaned  to  new  students.
It  may  seem  involved  to  attempt  such  a  method  but  with  the  working
out  of  suitable  tables  it  could  become  practically  automatic  and  involve
very  little  bookkeeping.  It  would  be  highly  commendable  that  the  amounts
loaned  be  made  in  multiples  of  $10  in  all  institutions.  The  adoption  of
such  a  unit  would  simplify  matters  considerably  and  the  institutions  could
then  co-operate  in  the  printing  of  tables,  record  blanks,  and  necessary
forms  for  the  carrying  out  of  such  a  System.  Using  ten  dollars  as  the
        <pb n="116" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance  117
basic  unit,  ten  months  as  the  unit  of  time  and  five  years  as  the  period  of
the  loan,  an  almost  ideal  System  could  be  set  up  that  would  be  much  more
practical  than  any  System  now  in  use  or  as  yet  devised.
20.  Collections
Very  little  attention  has  been  given  to  this  problem  in  most  institutions.
  A  sound  collection  System  must  aim  not  only  at  collecting  loans
overdue  but  must  take  the  matter  in  hand  soon  enough  so  that  loans  will
be  paid  when  due.  This  is  another  side  of  Student  loans  where  business
principles  can  be  taken  over  bodily.  The  final  stage  in  a  loan  transaction
is  to  induce  payment  on  time.
An  effective  collection  System  must  be  exacting,  precise,  and  prompt.
The  borrower  should  be  sent  a  notice,  sufficiently  in  advance,  that  his  payment ­
  is  soon  to  fall  due.  If  he  fails  to  pay  without  explanation  a  second
notice  should  be  sent.  Both  can  be  in  printed  or  mimeographed  form.  If
these  two  reminders  fail  to  bring  in  a  payment  or  an  explanation  of  his
failure,  he  can  be  notified  in  a  personal  way  that  will  be  suited  to  his
peculiar  case.  If  the  borrower  is  made  to  meet  his  first  payments  on  time
he  will  find  it  easier  to  meet  the  other  payments  in  the  same  manner.
21.  Organization  to  Administer  Loans
It  is  important  to  determine  what  Organization  can  best  administer
such  funds.  There  are  four  types  of  organizations  that  could  take  up  this
task  and  see  it  to  a  successful  end.  They  are  the  educational  Institution
itself,  the  Philanthropie  and  semi-philanthropic  foundations,  banks  and
trust  Companies,  and  charitable,  religious  and  fraternal  organizations.
22.  Charitable,  Religious  and  Fraternal  Organizations
In  most  cases  these  organizations  administer  the  funds  themselves.
No  funds  should  be  accepted  by  institutions  to  be  administered  unless
they  are  turned  over  without  conditions  attached.  Where  the  College  or
university  has  a  well  worked-out  System  of  Student  loans,  funds  turned  over
to  it  should  be  with  the  understanding  that  they  will  be  administered  as  all
other  funds  in  the  institution.  It  would  seem  a  wise  policy  for  institutions ­
  to  refuse  to  administer  funds  from  any  source  unless  the  institution
were  given  a  free  hand  in  their  administration.
23.  Banks  and  Trust  Companies
Banks  and  trust  Companies  have  been  lending  money  to  students  on  a
purely  business  basis  and  have  been  very  successful.  In  some  cases  they
bave  required  insurance  or  other  collateral,  in  other  cases  organizations  or
        <pb n="117" />
        118

A  Study  of  Student  Loans

individuals  stood  ready  to  make  good  the  losses.  There  is  no  question  but
that  such  a  venture  on  the  part  of  financial  institutions  is  sound.  Trust
Companies  should  be  well  adapted  to  handle  Student  loans.
There  is  a  question,  however,  as  to  whether  it  would  be  wise  for
educational  institutions  to  turn  over  loan  funds  to  financial  institutions
for  administration.  Many  of  the  funds  are  so  tied  up  that  Provision  must
be  made  to  administer  them  at  the  institution  and  if  this  is  done  machinery
may  as  well  be  developed  to  administer  all  of  the  Student  loans.  Institutions, ­
  Colleges,  and  universities  must  make  provision  to  handle  the  funds
intrusted  to  them  for  Student  loans,  and  develop  higher  Standards  and
more  efficiency  in  their  administration.  Banks  and  trust  Companies
are  well  adapted  to  loaning  money  to  students  and  due  to  the  legal  restrictions
  placed  upon  them,  there  is  little  danger  that  they  will  go  to  extremes
in  this  matter.
24.  Philanthropie  and  Semi-Philanthropic  Organizations
The  administration  of  Student  loans  by  such  organizations  as  fall
under  this  dass  is  much  to  be  desired.  Organizations  such  as  the  Harmon
Foundation  can  well  administer  funds  to  students  and  in  that  way  be  of
great  service  to  higher  education.  Also,  since  they  are  not  hampered  by
institutional  views  as  are  Colleges  and  universities,  they  can  raise  the
Standard  in  loan  administration  and  thus  lead  the  way  to  more  businesslike
  methods  of  administering  all  Student  loan  funds.
Colleges  and  universities  must  handle  at  least  some  of  the  Student
loans.  They  need  to  work  out  new  policies  and  develop  a  System  for  the
administration  of  Student  loans.  Such  policies  and  System  can  be  built
by  borrowing  the  effective  elements:  in  Systems  now  in  use;  from  the  field
of  commercial  and  investment  banking;  in  such  plans  as  the  Harmon
Plan  and  some  used  in  Europe;  and  by  making  use  of  the  principles  herein
set  forth  which  are  the  results  of  an  inquiry  conducted  by  the  Student
Loan  Information  Bureau.
        <pb n="118" />
        [119]

RECOMMENDATIONS

Scholarships  and  Fellowships
1.  A  scholarship  should  be  awarded  as  an  honor  to  one  who  gives
promise  of  scholastic  ability.
2.  A  fellowship  should  be  awarded  as  an  honor  for  proven  scholastic
ability  with  an  indication  of  greater  development  of  that  ability  for  useful
work.
3.  Financial  consideration  should  accompany  such  honors  only  in
cases  where  scholars  or  fellows  need  such  assistance  in  order  to  do  their
best  work.
4.  If  the  study  undertaken  has  an  economic  value,  financial  assistance
should  be  given  in  the  form  of  a  loan;  when  the  training  received  has  not
this  value,  needed  assistance  should  be  given  in  the  form  of  a  scholarship
or  fellowship  allowance  at  stated  periods  during  the  year.
5.  A  scholarship  or  fellowship  should  be  held  only  so  long  as  the
recipient  makes  specific  contribution  to  the  advancement  of  knowledge  or
hs  co-ordination.

Loans
1.  Revolving  Fund.—A  revolving  fund,  where  principal  as  well  as
interest  is  loaned,  serves  many  more  students  as  compared  with  the
restricted  fund.
2.  Department  of  Administration.—Loan  funds  should  be  administered
  in  the  business  office  of  the  institution  under  the  direct  supervision
of  the  business  officer.  He  should  have  final  authority  in  granting  or
rejecting  loans,  as  well  as  the  responsibility  for  collections.
3.  Selection  of  Risks.—Present  need,  past  performance  as  an  indication ­
  of  future  ability  and  willingness  to  repay  should  be  the  deciding
factors.  Preference  should  be  given  to  former  borrowers  from  the  same
loan  fund  after  a  careful  study  of  their  budgets,  the  principle  being  to
assist  them  to  the  point  where  they  can  more  readily  repay.
4.  Amount  of  Loan.—The  amount  of  the  loan  should  be  decided  only
after  a  careful  investigation  of  the  individual  applicant,  taking  into  consideration ­
  his  personal  budget,  opportunities  for  self-help,  his  scholastic
rating,  general  health,  and  the  average  yearly  cost  per  Student  at  the  institution. ­
  Usually,  total  loans  of  not  more  than  $1,000  should  be  granted.
        <pb n="119" />
        120

A  Study  of  Student  Loans

Loans  in  excess  of  this  amount  should  be  rare  and  made  only  after  the
most  careful  investigation.
5.  Interest.—Interest  should  be  at  the  current  commercial  rate,  generally
  six  per  cent.,  starting  from  date  of  loan.
6.  Security.—The  borrower  should  always  sign  a  definite  contract.
In  the  case  of  revolving  funds,  loans  should  be  protected  by  a  group  guarantee.
  When  a  large  number  of  loans  are  made  annually,  the  group  should
consist  of  those  borrowing  in  the  same  year;  when  only  a  few  loans  are
made  each  year,  the  group  may  consist  of  several  consecutive  classes.
Borrowers  should  be  made  to  understand  that  it  is  a  business  transaction
and  will  be  treated  as  such.
7.  Repayments.—The  loan  should  be  repaid  in  installments  beginning
not  more  than  one  year  after  graduation  or  withdrawal  from  the  institution.
Not  more  than  five  years  should  elapse  from  date  of  loan  before  the  first
payment  is  made.  An  amortization  plan  can  be  used  which  includes
interest,  guarantee  fund  and  principal,  payments  to  be  arranged  in  installments ­
  of  not  less  than  five  dollars  a  month  or  more  than  fifteen.
8.  Collections  and  Delinquencies.—A  prompt  and  exact  follow-up
System  should  be  used,  with  the  same  ethical  considerations  that  would
control  a  wisely  conducted  bank.
        <pb n="120" />
        [121]

APPENDIX  A

EXPERIENCE  OF  THE  HARMON  FOUNDATION
IN  STUDENT  LOANS
Düring  the  three  and  one-half  years  of  Operation  in  Student  loans,
the  Harmon  Foundation  has  passed  from  the  uncertain  shoals  and  depths
of  a  rocky  sea-coast  of  theory,  hope  and  conviction,  to  the  clearly  defined
harbor  of  certainty  as  to  the  practicahility  of  making  business  loans  to
College  students  with  character  as  the  basis  of  security.
Within  this  period  nearly  one  thousand  loans  averaging  about  $170
have  been  made  to  men  and  women  in  forty-one  affiliated  Colleges.  Of
this  number  payments  on  approximately  three  hundred  fifty  have  become
due,  which  have  been  or  are  being  liquidated  in  accordance  with  the
arrangements  provided  for  installment  payments  of  $10  a  month.  The
trend  so  far  has  shown  conclusively  that  it  is  the  plan  of  easy  installments
that  appeals  to  the  average  Student  borrower.  While  a  few  have  anticipated
  payments  and  made  early  settlement,  thus  cutting  down  the  interest,
the  very  large  majority  pay  the  required  amount  month  by  month.
Repayment,  of  course,  is  the  gauge  by  which  the  plan  is  being,
and  will  continue  to  be  tested.  Now,  well  into  the  second  year  of  repayments
  the  litmus  paper  remains  essentially  blue.  The  reliability  of  Student
character  in  connection  with  financial  obligations  is  fundamentally  sound.
Experience  has  shown  that  the  great  need  at  present  is  systematic  training
  in  promptness,  and  a  healthy  respect  for  due  dates.  Far  too  many
of  the  borrowers  have  an  idea  that  paying  an  installment  at  the  end  of  the
month  is  as  satisfactory  as  having  it  in  on  the  first  when  it  is  due.  The
Division  of  Student  Loans  considers,  therefore,  that  a  very  important
part  of  its  work  is  the  requirement  of  strict  adherence  to  all  details  of  the
loan  agreement  as  preparation  for  later  contact  with  business  organizations
  that  are  operating  for  financial  return  rather  than  education  and
public  Service.
The  Division  of  Student  Loans  was  not  started  in  a  Superlative
expectation  that  return  on  all  loans  would  be  one  hundred  per  cent.
perfect  both  from  the  point  of  view  of  money  and  time.  Although  for
the  sake  of  the  individual  borrower  it  was  hoped  that  no  one  would  fail
to  follow  the  conditions  of  his  agreement,  those  who  have  slipped  from
grace,  even  temporarily,  have  unwittingly  furnished  the  working  material
for  the  experimental  laboratory  in  which  to  test  and  demonstrate  the
strength  of  the  collection  procedure.
        <pb n="121" />
        122

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

At  the  time  of  writing,  only  three  per  cent.  of  the  money  that  has
become  due  is  ninety  days  or  more  in  arrears.  Toward  the  end  of  each
month  the  percentage  of  the  total  overdue  items  is  about  eight,  but  a
large  part  of  this  is  delinquent  only  during  the  current  month  and  is  met
at  the  next  pay  day.  There  have  been  no  repudiations  of  loan  obligations.
Even  in  the  case  of  the  three  borrowers  whose  accounts  have  been  turned
over  to  the  Foundation’s  attorney  for  collection,  the  debt  has  been  openly
acknowledged  and  the  Statement  made  that  the  intention  is  to  pay.  The
difficulty  is  that  the  borrowers  who  have  allowed  their  accounts  to  fall
behind  have  not  taken  advantage  of  the  Provision  in  their  contract  to
arrange  for  an  extension  of  time,  if  for  valid  reasons  they  are  unable  to
make  specified  payments.  They  fail  to  realize  that  the  Foundation  Stands
in  exactly  the  same  relation  toward  them  as  if  it  were  a  bank  and  that
negligence  or  late  excuses  when  they  have  to  be  forced,  will  not  be  tolerated.
  Their  attitude  represents  an  undeveloped  rather  than  a  warped
conscience.
It  is  confidently  expected  that  the  guarantee  requirement  will  eventually
  be  cut  from  ten  to  five  per  cent.  This  cannot  be  done,  however,
until  the  course  of  repayment  has  been  studied  for  a  longer  time,  and,
more  important  still,  until  the  methods  of  collection  have  been  more  definitely
  developed,  both  as  to  office  procedure  and  tradition  of  repayments
has  spread  among  successive  groups  of  borrowers.
The  group  guarantee  has  proven  the  only  part  of  the  plan  that  has
not  been  accepted  easily  by  those  who  are  studying  the  administration  of
loan  funds.  While  the  Division  of  Student  Loans  does  not  regard  its
form  of  safeguarding  the  fund  an  ideal  feature,  it  does  maintain  that  this
method  of  handling  the  problem  is  the  least  objectionable,  least  cumbersome,
  and  by  far  the  most  economical  to  the  Student  and  the  administering
  Organization.  It  obviates  the  necessity  of  a  heavy  Service  charge,
property  collateral,  or  the  assignment  of  personal  life  insurance  where
the  family  should  properly  be  the  beneficiary.  In  other  words,  the
Harmon  Loan  Plan  has  been  arranged  in  this  respect  so  that  the  man  or
woman  who  borrows  may  finance  his  education  in  part  at  least,  arranging
for  repayment  after  graduation  in  such  a  way  as  not  to  be  handicapped
too  greatly  in  his  business  or  private  undertakings.
In  the  Operation  of  a  Student  loan  fund,  especially  where  the  principai
  is  used,  obviously  some  form  of  protection  is  necessary.  Where  large
groups  are  concerned,  some  defaults  are  inevitable.  In  this  Connection
it  should  be  emphasized  that  only  a  small  number,  not  more  than  onehalf
  of  one  per  cent.  at  most,  will  occur  through  death.  Insurance  may
take  one  of  several  forms,  but  owing  to  the  over-head  it  is  relatively  expensive
  in  any  form.
        <pb n="122" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Fducational  Finance

123

In  developing  the  guarantee  plan  the  Service  Charge  was  rejected  as
being  not  only  too  expensive  for  the  Student,  but  also  too  arbitrary.  Collateral
  and  endorsement  were  not  considered  for  the  reason  that  they  are
too  difficult  for  the  average  Student  to  obtain,  and  they  involve  psychological
  and  other  elements  which  are  generally  less  effective  for  this  purpose
than  either  life  insurance  or  group  guarantee.  Life  insurance  is  applicable
only  in  the  case  of  death,  which  has  been  shown  will  be  the  reason  for  only
a  negligible  number  of  defaults.
It  can  be  seen  that  while  the  actual  risk  is  almost  negligible,  the
borrower  if  forced  to  take  out  life  insurance  would  have  an  additional
fixed  Charge  on  his  loan  and  at  the  same  time  would  not  be  covering  the
whole  gamut  of  possible  losses.  The  group  guarantee  as  arranged  in
this  plan  is  insurance  at  actual  cost.  No  losses,  no  insurance.  Furthermore,
  the  group  guarantee  is  desirable  because  the  borrower  is  made  to
feel  not  only  an  Obligation  to  his  creditor  and  himself,  but,  also,  there  is
the  additional  check  that  failure  to  repay  will  work  a  hardship  on  his  fellow
  borrowers,  with  the  result  that  he  will  be  openly  branded  as  untrustworthy.
  If  the  individual  concerned  has  not  within  himself  moral  stamina,
the  group  guarantee,  properly  administered,  can  be  a  vital  factor  in  building
  up  the  weak  places  in  his  character.  Borrowers  do  not  like  to  have
the  officials  at  their  Colleges  know  that  they  are  delinquent,  and  more  particularly
  the  fellow  members  of  their  group.  Correspondence  shows  this
most  definitely.
In  undertaking  its  program  in  the  field  of  Student  financing,  the
Harmon  Foundation  has  three  principal  objectives  toward  which  it  started
and  is  still  working:  (1)  helping  needy  and  deserving  students  over
the  top  of  the  educational  ladder;  (2)  cultivating  habits  of  providence  and
inculcating  a  proper  attitude  toward  and  observance  of  business  principles;
(3)  making  a  comprehensive  and  progressive  contribution  to  our  educational ­
  System  by  proving  that  it  is  possible  in  equity  to  place  on  the  shoulders
  of  the  Student  an  increasingly  larger  proportion  of  the  institutional
cost  of  his  education  than  now  prevails,  particularly  among  those  whose
earning  power  is  greatly  increased  because  of  the  training.
The  fact  that  Philanthropie  organizations,  men  of  means,  newly
established  funds,  clubs,  fraternal  groups,  civic  bodies,  etc.,  are  not  only
watching  the  progress  of  this  experiment,  but  are  seeking  helpful  suggestions
  and  ad  vice  in  the  light  of  experience  for  the  constructive  administration
  of  their  own  Student  aid  along  business  lines,  gives  some  idea
of  the  value  of  demonstrating  the  soundness  of  Student  paper,  not  only*  for
the  sake  of  students  as  a  dass,  but  as  an  aid  to  the  College  in  solving  at
least  a  part  of  its  financial  problem.  With  a  workable  System  of  making
Student  loans  in  harmony  with  business  principles,  and  yet  without  bürden-
        <pb n="123" />
        124

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

ing  the  borrower  with  too  great  a  load  of  responsibility  in  meeting  the
Obligation  after  graduation,  it  is  encouraging  to  consider  the  vastly  greater
service  over  a  restricted  fund  that  the  revolving  fund  will  render  worthy
boys  and  girls  throughout  the  country  in  their  struggle  for  an  education.
This  view  of  the  business  loan  makes  a  strong  appeal  to  the  potential  donor
of  a  fund  who  wishes,  quite  naturally,  to  see  a  given  amount  serve  a
maximum  degree  of  usefulness.  There  has  come  to  be  a  general  realization
  that  the  casual  administration  of  Student  aid  is  all  too  likely  to  have
a  bad  effect  on  the  Student  who  is  allowed  to  slack  in  the  payment  of  his
first  loan,  and  that  the  real  responsibility  for  the  resulting  character  disintegration,
  however  subtle,  falls  upon  the  group  dispensing  the  assistance.
In  the  creation  and  development  of  its  unique  theory  and  System  of
making  loans  to  students,  the  Harmon  Foundation  has  been  working  in
virgin  soil  and  has  turned  up  and  brought  to  light  many  curious  facts,
starting  with  the  widely  diverse  attitude  of  educators  and  others  toward
the  forms  that  Student  aid  should  take,  and  ranging  from  a  balanced  judgment
  to  pure  sentimentalism.
The  unusual  and  unexpected  has  been  found  in  the  widely  varied
intellectual  group  of  prospective  borrowers,  varying  from  the  normal
Standard  to  be  expected  of  juniors,  to  a  level  very  little  above  that  of  the
grammar  school.  The  uses  to  which  borrowed  money  has  been  put  have
also  been  most  curious,  as  well  as  many  other  qualities  totally  unexpected
in  a  homogeneous  group  of  College  men  and  women.  Nothing  has  been
more  marked  than  difference  in  the  concept  of  Obligation  which  develops
at  the  time  repayment  should  begin.  This  ranges  from  a  most  admirable
attitude,  comparable  to  that  of  experienced  business  men,  to  utter  childishness—a
  Situation  which  indicates  that  this  side  of  education  has  been
completely  neglected  among  some,  leaving  many  a  young  man  in  the
kindergarten  age  as  far  as  his  knowledge  of  what  is  and  will  be  expected
of  him  by  society  is  concerned.  It  is  an  arraignment  of  the  influences,  or
lack  of  them,  somewhere  in  the  young  man’s  career—negligence  perhaps—
that  makes  progress  unnecessarily  difficult,  and  doubtless  results  in  very
many  unnecessary  wrecks  of  reputations.
A  single  illustration  is  here  given  of  the  flippant  attitude  of  a  young
man  who  had  borrowed,  completed  his  course,  and  received  his  degree.
He  had  had  a  year  in  which  to  get  a  foothold,  had  received  repeated
requests  to  remit,  and  only  when  he  was  informed  that  the  matter  would
be  turned  over  for  legal  attention  was  the  following  letter  received:
If  you  know  of  any  way  to  get  money  where  it  isn’t  by  legal  process
your  attorney  is  a  genius.  I  will  pay  as  soon  as  I  am  able  but  I  cannot  do
the  impossible.
        <pb n="124" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educationae  Finance

125

This  borrower  had  not  even  asked  for  an  extension  of  time.  The  Foundation ­
  is  confident  that  fundamentally  this  man  is  all  right,  and  that  the  debt
will  be  paid.  This  letter  is  a  grave  reflection  on  some  one  or  some  institution,
  or  perhaps  the  social  System  under  which  the  young  man  grew  up.
In  Belgium,  Switzerland,  and  Holland,  and  other  European  countries,  it
is  often  the  practice  of  young  men  to  Start  in  business  on  borrowed  Capital ­
  raised  on  unendorsed  paper,  but  these  men  have  been  trained  in  business ­
  ethics  that  apparently  have  not  been  a  conscious  part  of  the  American
System  of  education.
In  looking  toward  the  future  development  of  its  loan  System,  the
Harmon  Foundation  extends  honorary  membership  to  all  its  borrowers
who  repay  their  loans  satisfactorily  according  to  agreements.  With  this
goes  a  character  certificate  on  the  reverse  side  of  which  is  set  forth  the
estimation  of  three  leading  New  York  bankers  of  its  value.  The  Division
of  Student  Loans  maintains  that  the  Student  who  through  his  own  initiative
borrows  to  obtain  an  education  and  then  repays,  has  established  a  credit
rating  that  should  be  of  immediate  and  continued  use  to  him  in  obtaining
banking  accommodations.  As  the  plan  becomes  better  known  and  its
Services  extended,  as  the  number  of  borrowers  grows  and  their  records
become  known,  this  should  have  an  increasing  value.  Ninety-eight  certificates
  have  thus  far  been  granted.
The  Honorary  Certificate  is  taking  on  a  surprising  significance—as
shown  by  letters  written  in  acknowledgment  and  appreciation  of  its  receipt.
The  primary  result  of  education  is  not  learning,  which  of  itself  is  a  lifeless
thing,  but  that  inspiration  which  vitalizes  the  forces  created  or  developed
through  study.  The  Foundation’s  Honorary  Members  have  caught  that
inspiration  and  are,  because  of  it,  approaching  life’s  problems  on  their
toes.  The  change  in  the  mental  attitude  of  the  graduate  who  has  not  yet
paid  his  Obligation  to  that  of  the  man  who  has  won  his  spurs,  from  the
point  of  view  of  the  Division  of  Student  Loans  and  his  own,  is  most
marked.  The  Foundation  is  beginning  to  harbor  the  hope  that  these  young
men  and  women  have  acquired  something  through  their  loan  experience
that  will  translate  itself  in  other  activities  throughout  their  lives.  Fach
of  us  can  probably  look  back  on  some  minor  experience  or  spontaneous  bit
of  advice  that  has  colored  our  whole  career.  The  Honor  Certificate  is
working  that  way  with  gratifying  uniformity.
        <pb n="125" />
        PRINTED  FORMS  IN  CURRENT  USE  BY  THE
DIVISION  OF  STUDENT  LOANS  OF  THE  HARMON  FOUNDATION

1.  Rules  for  the  administration  of  Harmon  Loan  Funds.
2.  Application  for  Loan.
3.  Confidential  reference.
4.  Agreement.
5.  Statement  of  interest.
6.  Statement  of  first  installment  due.
Notice  regarding  receipts  for  installment  payments.
8.  Bankers’  Endorsement.
9.  Certificate  of  Honorary  Membership.

The  Division  of  Student  Loans  will  he  glad  to  send  copies  of  any
of  these  forms  to  those  wlio  request  them.
        <pb n="126" />
        A  Study  of  Student  Loans

127

L

Original  Sieb,  8A  x  II

Form  1.—Page  One

RULES  FOR  THE  ADMINISTRATION
OF
HARMON  LOAN  FUNDS

AFFILIATION  WITH  COLLEGES
I—  Procedure
It  is  first  necessary  for  the  President  of  a  College  to  apply  to  the  Division,  of  Student  Loans  for
affiliation.  If  accepted,  the-College  signs  an  agreement  to  co-operate  with  the  Foundation  in  the
administration  of  the  loan  fund.  A  stated  appropriation  is  granted  for  loans  to  students  during  the
ensuing  school  year,  according  to  the  following  rules  prescribed  by  the  Harmon  Foundation.
II—  Basis  of  Selection
Colleges  are  chosen  to  participate  in  the  Harmon  Student  Loan  Fund  because  of  their:
1.  Need
2.  Educational  Standards
3.  Type  of  School
4.  Geographical  distribution
5.  Desire  to  co-operate  in  loan  experiment
III—  Student  Loan  Committee
1.  A  committee  of  three  faculty  members,  one  preferably  a  business  officer,  shali  be  appointed  by
the  president  who  shall  also  designate  one  as  chairman.
2.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  this  committee:
(a)  to  investigate  all  applications  for  loans  and  forward  those  recommended  to  the  Harmon
Foundation  for  formal  approval.
(b)  to  assist  the  Harmon  Foundation  in  the  general  administration  of  the  fund.
IV—  Forms
Uniform  blanks  and  other  necessary  papers  will  be  furnished  by  the  Foundation.  Applications
made  out  on  other  forms  will  not  be  considered.
SELECTION  OF  BORROWERS
I—  Applications
1.  A  detailed  application  is  required  from  all  students.  It  must  contain  pertinent  facts  such  as
the  personal  history,  grades,  indebt'edness,  school  activities,  and  a  careful  budget  of  receipts  and
expenses.
2.  All  applications  must  be  submitted  through  the  Student  Loan  Committee  of  the  College,  on
the  form  provided  by  the  Foundation.
3.  Each  aoplication  shall  be  carefully  investigated  by  the  loan  committee,  and  its  recommendation
  shall  be  required  before  acceptance  by  the  Harmon  Foundation.
4.  The  Foundation  will  not  consider  applications  which  are  not  made  through  the  above
channels.
5.  Three  references,  at  least  two  of  which  should  come  from  the  applicant's  home  town,  are
necessary.
II—  Eligibility
1.  Loans  are  limited  to  students  of  junior  grade  or  above  in  courses  leading  toward  a  degree
in  the  liberal  arts  or  one  of  the  professions.
2.  Loans  are  made  without  regard  to  race,  religion,  sex,  or  age.  If  the  borrower  is  a  minor  at
the  time  the  loan  is  made,  the  endorsement  of  an  adult  is  required,  it  being  understood  that
upon  reaching  majority  the  borrower  will  sign  an  affirmation  of  his  agreement  and  thus  relieve
his  endorser.
3.  All  borrowers  must  be  either  citizens  of  the  United  States,  or  Have  taken  out  their  first
papers.
        <pb n="127" />
        A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

4.  No  Student  may  become  a  borrower  o£  the  fund  whose  means  of  education  are.  not  dependent
either  in  part  or  whoily  upon  his  own  efforts.  Preference  will  be  given  to  the  marginal  Student:
(a)  The  one  whose  course  will  be  interrupted  or  terminated  i£  he  cannot  obtain  a.  loan«.
(b)  The  one'who  will  not  make  the  loan  a  complete  substitute  for  outside  work.
(c)  The  one  whose  health  or  College  grades  are  likely  to  suffer  if  further  assistance-  is  not
obtained.  Scholarship  of  the  highestrank  will  not  be  a  definite  requirement  for  acceptance.
  The  Harmon  Foundation  does  not  wish  to  lend  to  inferior  students  but  is  not
opposed  to  making  loans  to  those  whose  grades  are  fair  or  low  due  to  the  heavy  bürden
of  seif  support.

LOANS
I—  Agreement
Each  borrower  is  required  to  sign  a  contract  in  which  is  set  forth  the  terms  of  his  loan.
II—  Amount
The  maximum  loan  to  any  Student  in  a  given  school  year  is  Two  Hundred  and  Fifty  Dollars
($250).  All  loans  granted  to  any  borrower  may  not  exceed  a  total  of  Five  Hundred  Dollars
($500).  The  loan  to  a  Student  may  be  sent  to  him  in  one  check,  or,  if  he  desires,  in  two  installments.

III—  Interest
Interest  at  the  rate  of  six  per  cent.  (6%)  per  annum  is  charged  from  the  date  the  check  is  issued.
IV—  Group  Guarantee
1.  Each  agreement  provides  for  the  payment  of  a  guarantee  fund  of  ten  per  cent.  (10%)  of  the
amount  of  rncne}'  borrowed.  In  no  case  shall  any  of  this  ten  per  cent.  (10%)  be  used  to  augment
  the  funds  of  the  Foundation,  or  to  cover  administrative  expense.  It  may  be  used  only  to
make  up  defaults  in  the  repayment  of  loans  within  the  group  to  which  the  borrower  belongs.
2.  Four-fifths  of  the  guarantee  fund  may  be  used  to  make  up  defaults  in  the  borrower’s  own
College  unit  for  the  year  in  which  he  borrowed.  The  remaining  one-fifth  may  be  used  to  make
up  defaults  which  occur  among  the  entire  group  of  borrowers  in  a  given  year,  in  excess  of  the
liability  of  the  individual  College  unit.
3.  After  the  loans  of  any  given  College  group  have  been  repaid  together  with  interest  and
guarantee  fund,  or  charged  off  as  defaulted,  all  of  the  four-fifths  of  the  guarantee  fund  remaining ­
  after  deducting  losses,  will  be  retumed  to  the  members  of  this  group  pro  rata  with  interest
at  six  per  cent.  (6%)  for  the  time  the  guarantee  fund  has  been  held  by  the  Foundation.
4.  After  all  loans  made  in  any  one  year  have  been  repaid  together  with  interest  and  guarantee
fund,  or  charged  off  as  defaulted,  any  guarantee  fund  remaining  will  be  distributed  among  the
borrowers  in  that  year  pro  rata  with  interest  at  six  per  cent.  (6%)  for  the  time  it  has  been  held
by  the  Foundation.
5.  In  order  to  provide  for  a  better  functioning  of  the  group  guarantee  plan  the  Foundation
requires  that  a  school  must  have  at  least  five  eligible  borrowers  in  order  to  be  granted  a  loan
fund.
TERMS  OF  REPAYMENT
-Accumulated  Interest
Borrowers  are  required  to  Start  payment  of  accumulated  interest  at  the  rate  of  Five  Dollars
($5)  a  month  beginning  December  first  after  graduation  and  continue  until  all  interest  which  has
accrued  up  to  the  following  June  first  has  been  paid.  If  all  of  such  interest  is  not  paid  by  the
Five  Dollar  ($5)  monthly  payments  at  the  time  the  Ten  Dollar  ($10)  installments  as  described
below  begin,  then  the  Ten  Dollar  ($10)  installments  shall  be  applied  against  interest  until  all
of  the  interest  accrued  to  the  above  June  first  has  been  paid.
Note:  (&amp;lt;j)  In  the  case  of  students  graduating  in  February,  payment  of  accumulated  interest  at  the  rate  of
Five  Dollars  ($5)  a  month  shall  begin  June  1  following  graduation  and  shall  continue  until  all
accumulated  interest  up  to  December  1  following  graduation  has  been  paid.  Installments  of
Ten  Dollars  ($10)  a  month  shall  Start  March  1,  one  year  after  graduation.  If  by  this  date  all
accumulated  interest  up  to  December  1  preceding  has  not  been  paid,  such  Ten  Dollar  ($10)
installments  will  be  applied  against  the  above  stated  interest  until  it  has  been  fully  paid.
(6)  In  the  case  of  graduate  students  commencing  repayment  three  years  from  date  of  loan  at  the
rate  of  Ten  Dollars  ($10)  a  month,  such  payments  will  apply  against  accumulated  interest
until  all  such  interest  has  been  fully  paid.
        <pb n="128" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

129

Form  I.—Page  Three

H—Ins  tallments
1.  Liquidation  of  the  loan  begins  one  year  after  graduation  at  the  rate  o£  Ten  Dollars  ($10)
a.  month  irrespective  of  the  size  of  the  loan.  Tfais  payment  shall  apply  toward  the  reduction  of
Principal,  interest,  and  the  payment  of  the  required  guarantee  fund  as  set  ferth  in  the  section
orr  Group  Guarantee.
2.  In  no  case.is  the  repayment  of  a  loan  to  Start  later  ihan  three  years  from  date  of  loan.
3.  If  a  Student  leaves  school  before  graduation,  monthly  payments  of  Ten  Dollars  ($10)  each  shall
begin  three  months  after  date  of  leaving  school,  and  these  installments  shall  apply.  toward  the
reduction  of  interest,  principal,  and  guarantee  fund.
4.  In  case  of  illness  or  loss  of  eir.ployment  due  to  unavoidable  causes,  the  time  of  payment  of  installment ­
  may  be  extended  by  appücation  made  in  writing  to  the  Harmon  Foundation  at  least  ten
days  prior  to  the  date  upop  which  the  installment  becomes  due,  and  provided  that  the  written
consent  of  the  Harmon  Foundation  has  been  obtained.
5.  If  the  borrower  has  paid  the  first  three  installments  promptly  when  due,  he  may  thereafier  at
the  discretion  of  the  Harmon  Foundation,  make  payments  quarterly.
COLLECTIONS  AND  DELINQUENCIES
I—Student  Representation
When  all  borrowers  of  the  fund  bave  been  chosen  in  a  College  for  a  given  year,  they  shall  meet
and  elect  from  their  number  one  representative  for  every  five  borrowers  or  part  thereof.  It
shall  be  the  duty  of  these  representatives  to  act  with  the  Student  loan  committee  to  assist  the
Harmon  Foundation  in  following  up  delinquents  among  the  borrowers  of  that  year,  and  bring
all  influence  to  bear  upon  them  so  that  the  group  will  not  suffer  unnecessarily  from  the  default
of  any  of  its  members.
IX—D  elinquencies
1.  If  a  Student  fails  to  make  monthly  or  quarterly  payments  promptly  when  due,  the  Foundation
will  wait  five  (5)  days  before  notification.  The  first  delinquent  notice  will  be  a  formal  one,  such
as  a  bank  would  send  out.
2.  If  the  borrower  remains  delinquent  for  a  period  of  fifteen  (15)  days  thereafter  he  will  be
reported  to  the  chairman  of  the  Student  loan  committee  in  his  College  who  shall  immediately  send
out  the  second  notice.  The  form  of  this  will  be  left  to  the  discretion  of  the  writer  but  should  be
personal  in  character.  The  Foundation  expects  to  be  notified  of  the  date  of  this  letter  or  have  a
copy  of  it.  ...
Simultaneously,  one  of  the  representatives  of  the  group  m  which  the  dehnquency  occurs  will  be
notified  by  the  Foundation  with  the  request  that  he,  or  some  one  designated  by  him,  who  might
have  influence  over  the  delinquent,  write  directly  to  the  individual  in  arrears,  calling  attention  to
the  latter's  Obligation  to  his  College  as  well  as  to  his  fellow  borrowers,  rather  than  to  the  Foundation.
3.  If  the  Student  still  is  in  arrears  thirty-five  (35)  days  after  his  installment  is  due,  the  Foundation ­
  will  send  out  a  third  notice.  .Within  a  reasonable  time  this  notice  will  be  followed  by  such
legal  proceedings  as  a  bank  or  business  house  would  institute  for  the  collection  of  a  delinquent
account.
4.  In  the  event  that  it  becomes  necessary  to  employ  legal  aid  in  order  to  collect  an  account,  the
charges  for  such  service  shall  become  and  remain  an  Obligation  against  the  borrower  concemed
until  liquidated.
5.  While  the  foregoing  will  be  the  general  practice  the  Foundation  will  be  guided  by  the  circumstances
  in  individual  cases,  especially  where  the  borrower  has  failed  to  meet  his  first  installment.
III—Reports
1.  Borrowers  shall  respond  within  six  days  after  the  receipt  of  all  Communications  regarding  their
loans  which  call  for  a  reply.
2.  The  chairman  of  the  Student  loan  committee  and  the  group  representatives  shall  reply  promptly
to  the  Foundation  regarding  all  delinquencies  of  which  they  are  notified.
3.  The  Harmon  Foundation  will  make  annual  reports  to  the  chairman  of  the  Student  loan  committee ­
  of  all  payments  received.
CERTIFICATE  OF  RECOMMENDATION
All  borrowers  who  discharge  their  obligations  according  to  the  terms  of  agreement,  and  whose
character  record  has  been  satisfactory,  become  Honorary  Members  of  the  Harmon  Foundation.
This  is  evidenced  by  a  certificate  stating  briefly  the  facts  of  the  loan.  On  the  reverse  side  the  Statements ­
  of  three  New  York  bankers  are  printed  giving  their  opinions  as  to  the  character  evidenced
or  established  by  a  record  entitling  one  to  such  a  certificate.
        <pb n="129" />
        Form  1.—Page  Four

130

A  Study  of  Student  Loa  ns  and

1t  is  expected  that  the  Student  Loan  Committee  supply  each  prospcctive  borrower  with  a  ccpy
of  these  rules.  and  shall  satisfy  itself  that  they  havc  been  read  and  understood  by  the  Student  before
his  applicaiwn  is  considered.
(  contract  )
The  foregoing  rules  and  regulations  become  a  part  of  the  j  extension  agreem ent  )  between  thc
HARMON  FOUNDATION,  Inc.,  and
made  under  date  of  the  same  as  if  incorp'orated  therein  as  attested
by  the  signature  of  the  HARMON  FOUNDATION,  Inc.,  and  ....

Harmon  Foundation,  Inc.
By
(College)
Date  By
        <pb n="130" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educationae  Finance

131
        <pb n="131" />
        132

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

Form  2.—Page  Tvvo

15.  For  what  business  or  Professional  occupation  are  you  preparing?
16.  Candidate  now  for  Degree  and  expect  to  receive  it  in
(Month)  {Year)
17.  Do  you  expect  to  enter  upon  post-graduate  work?  When?

Where?  For  how  long?.
18.  College  grades  last  year:

Subject

Hours  or
Point*

Grade

Subject

Hours  or
Points

Grade

19.  List  below  real  and  personal  property,  if  any,  owned  by  you  or  held  in  trust  for  you:

Description

Market
Value

Income

Do  you  have
the  Income

Name  of  Trustee  and  other  Information

20.  Do  you  carry  life  insurance  ?
(Amount)  (Kind)  (Company)  (When  taken)
21.  Have  you  ever  been  refused  life  insurance?  Why?

22.  What  is  the  total  amount  of  your  present  indebtedness?  $  Itemize  below.
(Fill  in  each  column)

Name  and  address  of  Creditor

Amount

Date
Contracted

Due  Date

Interest
Rate

Was  a  Promissory
Note  given

State  Relationship
of  Creditor

23.  List  any  notes  you  have  given  and  paid:

Name  and  address  of  Creditor

Amount

Due  Date

When  Paid

Remark*
        <pb n="132" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

133

24.  Fill  out  your  budget  for  the  last  school  year  and  your  estimated  budget  for  the  entire  present  school  year.
If  you  live  athome,  or  if  you  are  eaming  board  or  room,  the  monetary  value  of  these  items  should  be  gioen  ander  the
proper  headings  on  both  the  Receipt  and  the  Expense  side.  “Advances  from  other  sources”  and  “Incidental
expenses”  exceeding  $25.00  should  be  explained.  Explain  any  items  which  might  othenvise  not  bc  clear.  If  necessary,
use  a  separate  shect  of  paper.

RECEIPT  S

Last
School  Year

Present
School  Year

EXPENSES

Last
School  Year

Present
School  Year

Savings  from  previous  eamings

Tuition

Net  earBtngs  during  school  year

Fees

Advances  from  parents  (Gift)

(Explain)

44  “  “  (Loan)

Advances  from  guardian  (Gift)

Board

«*  44  41  (Loan)

Room

Advances  from  friends

Books

{Stete  from  whom  and  whcther  gift  or  loan)

Clothing

Recreation  or  amusements

Health

Organizations

Advances  from  College  (Gift)

Traveling  expenses

"  44  44  (Loan)

Lau  n  dry

*'  44  44  (PostponedTuition)

Insurance

“  44  44  (Free  Tuition)

Instruments

"  44  44  (Scholarship)

Incidental  expenses

(Itemize  and  explain)

Advances  from  other  sources

Expense  for  dependents,  if  -any

(Itemize  and  explain)

25.  Give  three  personal  references  (not  relatives),  who  are  mature  persons,  householders  or  property  owners,
or  busmess  and  Professional  men  or  women,  of  good  standfng  in  the  community,  who  haye  known  you
well  for  several  years.  At  least  two  of  them  should  be  from  your  home  town.  Your  banker  and  your
family  physician  would  be  desirable  references.

Name

Age

Address

Present  or  most  ncmt  ocetipetion

Form  2.—Page  Three
        <pb n="133" />
        Form  2.—Page  Four

134

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

26.  Give  a  brief  resume  of  your  College  activities—in  athletics,  Student  organizations—or  any  real  efforts-you
have  made  toward  fprthering  the  interests  of  the  College  or  your  Community
27.  Give  your  reasons  for  seeking  assistance  from  the  Harmon  Foundation  in  preference  to  other  sources
(  $5.00  payment  be  due?
28.  According  to  your  understanding  when  v/ill  your  first  ]
(  $10.00  payment  be  due?
I  solemnly  affirm  the  correctness  of  the  foregoing  answers,  and  prom  ise  to  us6  the  Loan
granted  me  for  no  other  purpose  than  the  necessary  expenses  of  continuing  my  education.
1  have  read  and  understand  the  rules  for  administration  and  the  terms  of  repayment  of
the  Harmon  Foundation  Student  Loan  Fund  and  agree  to  conform  to  the  same.
If  the  Loan  is  made  to  me,  I  further  promise:
To  answer  promptly  letters  relating  thereto.
To  keep  the  College  and  the  Harmon  Foundation  informed  of  my  address
as  long  as  any  part  of  my  indebtedness  to  the  Harmon  Fund  remains  unpaid.
To  repay  the  Loan  according  to  the  terms  of  my  agreement.
This  promise  to  answer  promptly  all  letters  relating  to  tlie  Loan  and  to  keep  tlie  College  and  Foundation
advised  of  address  is  fundamentally  important,  and  tbe  pranting  of  a  loan  is  contingent  thereon.

Signed..

Date..

(This  spt.ce  is  rcserved  for  the  comment  or  endorsement  of  the  Sfudeiit  Loan  Committee)

I  have  .investigated  the  above  answers  and  so  far  as  I  can  ascertain  they  are  correct.  ,  I  believe  that  this
Student  is  entitled  to  this  Loan.

Signed..

(Chairman  of  the  Student  Loan  Committee)

3000—9,  24.  25—P642S
        <pb n="134" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

135

Original,  Size,  8J4  x  11

Form  3.

CONFIDENTIAL  REFERENCE
REGARDING  STUDENT  APPLICANT  FOR  A  LOAN
FROM  THE
Harmon  Foundation
INCORPORATED

,*who  is  a  Student  at
has  applied  to  the  Student  Loan  Committee
for  a  loan  from  the  Harmon  Fund.  Loans  are  awarded  only  to  worthy  students  of  proved  ability  whose
means  of  support  are  dependent  wholly  or  in  part  on  their  own  labor.  Preference  is  ^iven  the  deserving
Student  who  will  not  make  the  loan  a  complete  Substitution  for  outside  work,  the  one  whose  heaith  or
College  grades  may  be  in  danger  if  extra  aid  is  not  obtained.
He  has  referred  to  you  as  one  who  knows  the  pecuniary  cifcumstances  of  his  family.  Will  you
therefore  be  good  enough  to  furnish  the  Information  asked  for  below  ?  Applications  will  not  be  approved
until  the  replies  from  references  are  returned.
Your  answers  to  the  following  questions  may  be  given  on  this  sheet  if  you  desire  but  we  should
appreciate  an  estimate  of  the  applicant’s  character  on  your  own  letterhead.  Kindly  send  your  reply  to  the
Chairman  of  the  Student  Loan  Committee  in  the  enclosed,  self-addressed  envelope.
The  information  you  furnish  us  will  be  treated  as  strictly  confidential.
Sincerely  yours,

Chairman,  Student  Loan  Committee

College

1.  How  Iong  have  you  known  the  applicant?
2.  ln  your  opihiom,  does  this  Student  come  within  the  dass
of  students  mentioned  in  paragraph  one  above?
3.  What  is  your  judgment  of  the  applicant’s  character  and  financial  reliability?

4.  Do  you  consider  this  Student  thoroughly  dependable  and  the  sort  of  a  person  to  whom  you  might
lend  money  yourself  with  confidence?

Signa  Iure  of  Reference

Date.

OJhcial  Position  or  Occunation
        <pb n="135" />
        136

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

Original  Size,  854  x  14,  Cap  Folio

Form  4.

(ÜJjis  Agmmpttt,  made  this  day  of
A.  D.  19  by  and  between  HARMON  FOUNDATION,  Inc.,  a  membership  Corporation
duly  organized  and  existing  under  and  by  virtue  of  the  Iaws  of  the  State  of  New  York,  party  of
the  first  part,  and  hereinafter
designated  as  the  party  of  the  second  part;
3Far  Halu#  SUrftOfft,  the  party  of  the  second  part  hereby  agrees  to  pay  to  the  party  of  the
first  part  in  lawful  money  of  the  United  States  the  following  items:
1  -  Dollars  ($  ),
being  the  principal  sum.advanced  by  the  party  of  the  first  part.
2.  Interest  on  the  above  principal  sum  or  on  any  unpaid  balances  thereon  at  the  rate  of  six
per  cent.  (6%)  per  annum  from  the  date  of  the  loan.
3.  A  guarantee  fund  of  Dollars  ($  ),
which  is  ten  per  cent.  (10%)  of  the  principal  sum  and  which  is  explained  more  fully  in  section
First  following.
And  the  party  of  the  second  part  further  agrees  to  the  conditions  and  terms  of  payment  of
prindpal,  interest,  and  guarantee  fund  as  follows,  to  wit:
1.  The  sum  of  not  less  than  Five  Dollars  ($5.00)  on  the  first  day  of  each  and  every  month
accounting  from  the  first  day  of  December  which  sum  shall  be  applied
against  such  interest  as  may  have  accrued.
2.  The  sum  of  not  less  than  Ten  Dollars  ($10.00)  on  the  first  day  of  each  and  every  month
accounting  from  the  first  day  of  July  which'  sum  shall  be  applied  against
the  remaining  interest,  if  any,  which  may  have  accrued  prior  to  the  first  day  of  June  ;
after  which  time  the  Ten  Dollar  installments  shall  be  applied  against  principal,  interest  and  guarantee ­
  fund  until  all  such  items  have  been  paid  in  full.
Anö  U  18  füutualllj  AgrfPÖ  by  and  between  the  parties  hereto  as  follows:
FIRST.  That  in  consideration  of  the  fact  that  the  party  of  the  first  part  shall  not  proceed  against  the  estate  of  the  party
of  the  second  part  in  case  of  default  due  to  death  of  the  party  of  the  second  part,  and  for  the  protection  of  the  principal  of  the
Student  Loan  Funds  administered  by  the  Hormon  Foundation,  lnc.,  against  voluntary  or  involuntary  defaults,  this  agrcement
  is  for  ten  per  cent.  (10%)  in  excess  of  the  actual  amount  of  money  borrowcd.  It  is  understood  and  agrecd  that  four-fifths
of  said  ten  per  cent.  (10%)  can  be  used  only  for  the  purpose  of  making  up  defaults  in  the  repaymcnts  from.  other  students

in  during  the  College  year
and  one-fifth  can  be  used  in  making  up  defaults  in  the  repaymcnt  of  loans  made  to  students  in  other  Colleges  afliliated  with  the
Hormon  Foundation,  Inc.,  during  the  said  College  year,  which  are  not  covcred  by  the  guarantee  required  from  the  College
groups  in  which  the  losses  occur,  and  that  if  and  when  the  funds  actually  loancd  during  said  College  year  shall  be.  rcpaid
with  six  per  ccnt.  (6%)  interest  thereon,  all  excess  money  receivcd  by  said  party  of  the  first  part,  after  deducting  all
losses  due  to  defaults  oi  any  of  said  borrowcrs  in  said  College  year,  including  any  legal  costs  connected  therewith,  shall  be
distributed  among  the  borrowcrs  of  said  funds  during  said  College  year  in  proportion  to  their  respective  interests  in  said
excess  as  determined  by  the  Harmon  Foundation,  Inc.,  together  with  interest  at  the  rate  of  six  per  cent.  (6%)  per  annum  on
said  excess  from  date  of  final  payment.
SBCOND.  That  if  the  party  of  the  second  part  leaves  school  before  graduating,  monthly  payments  of  Ten  Dollars
($10.00)  each  shall  begin  three  months  after  date  of  leaving  school,  which  payments  shall  be  applied  against  the  reduction  of
interest,  principal,  and  guarantee  fund.
TH1RD.  That  all  sums  of  money  payable  to  said  party  of  the  first  part  hercunder  shall,  unless  otherwise  provided,  be
paid  at  the  Office  of  the  Hormon  Foundation,  Inc.,  in  New  York,  N.  Y.
FOURTH.  That  prompt  performancc  and  time  are  of  the  nature  and  essence  of  this  agreement  and  each  of  its  conditions, ­
  and,  therefore,  if  default  be  made  in  any  one  of  said  monthly  installments  for  a  period  of  thirty  (30)  days  after  it
becomes  due,  the  balance  of  the  principal  sum  then  remaining  unpaid  together  with  interest  as  set  forth  herein  above  shall
immcdiatcly  become  due  and  payable.  It  is  understood  and  agrecd,  however,  that  in  case  of  illncss  or  loss  of  employment  due
to  unavoidablc  causes  the  time  of  payment  of  said  installment  may  be  extended  by  application  made  in  writing  to  the
Harmon  Foundation,  Inc.,  at  least  ten  (10)  days  prior  to  date  upon  which  such  installment  becomes  payable,  and  provided
that  the  written  consent  of  the  Harmon  Foundation,  Inc.,  has  been  obtained.  In  the  event  that  it  shall  bccome  neccssary
to  employ  legal  aid  to  collect  said  principal  sum  or  interest  or  any  part  thercof,  any  Charge  for  samc  shall  become  and  remain
an  Obligation  against  the  party  of  the  second  part  until  Iiquidated.
FIFTH.  That  the  mailing  of  a  written  notice  by  depositing  it  in  any  post-office  Station  or  letter-box,  enclosed  in  a
postpaid  cnvelope,  addressed  to  the  party  of  the  second  part  at  the  last  address  actually  furnished  in  writing  to  the  said
party  of  the  first  part,  shall  be  sufficient  notice  in  any  case  under  this  Agreement.
That  no  modification  of  this  Agreement,  nor  waiver  of  any  term  or  condition  hereof  shall  be  of  any  force  or  effect,
unless  the  same  is  in  writing,  signed  by  both  of  the  parties  hereto,  and  all  contracts  and  agreements  hcretofore  made  with
respect  to  this  transaction  by  the  parties  hereto,  or  their  agents,  are  merged  into  and  superseded  by  .this  Agreement;  and  th'at
no  waiver  of  the  breach  of  any  such  term  or  condition  shall  bc  construcd  as  a  waiver  of  any  other  or  subsequent  brcach  of  the
same  or  any  other  term  or  condition.
SIXTH.  That  if  the  party  of  the  second  part  receives  a  communication  from  the  party  of  the  first  part  calling  for
a  reply,  he  shall  respond  within  six  days  after  the  receipt  of  said  lettcr.
SBVENTH.  That  the  rules  of  the  party  of  the  first  part  for  the  administration  of  loan  funds,  hcretofore  gubmitted  and
read  and  approved  by  the  party  of  the  second  part,  are  made  part  of  this  contract  as  if  fully  set  forth  herein.
3Jn  $Uitn?ßa  JSIfprpnf,  HARMON  FOUNDATION,  Inc.,  has  caused  these  presents  to  be
signed  in  its  corporate  name  by  its  ....
and  the  party  of  the  second  part  has  hereunto  set  hand  the  day  and  year  first
above  written.
HARMON  FOUNDATION,  INC.

(President,  Vice  President,  Treasurcr)
Party  of  the  first  pari

(Witness  as  to  Borrowcr)

Party  of  the  second  part

Endorser
(Endorsement  of  adult  required  only  if  borrowcr  u  a  tninor)
        <pb n="136" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

HARMON  FOUNDATION
INCORPORATED
140  NASSAU  STREET
NEW  YORK
SchooL

Statement  of  Interest
Accrued  interest  on  Roan  Agreement  to
Ress  payments  on  account
Balance  unpaid

Plea»e  return  this  notice  with  your  remittance

11-2-2  5—lOOO—P6  673

Obverse

Money  Order
Enclosed  find  i  check
(  Exchange

in  payment  of

Name

Present  address.

Former  address

Remittance  should  be  made  preferably  by  Check,  Post  Office  or  Express
Money  Order,  payable  to  Harmon  Foundation,  Inc.  and  mailed  with  this  notice
to  140  Nassau  Street,  New  York,  N.  Y.

The  Foundation  must  be  notified  pfomptlv  of  anv  change  of  address

Original  Size,  6%  x  3J4

(over)

Form  5.
        <pb n="137" />
        138

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

HARMON  FOUNDATION

INCORPORATED

140  NASSAU  STREET
NEW  YORK,  N.Y.

0College)

The  first  installment  on  your  account  will  be  due  and
Statement
Amount  of  installment
Unpaid  interest  accrued  the

The  Foundation  must  be  notified  promptly  of  any  change  of  address

(over)

Obversf.

Date

l  Money  Order
■\  Check
(  Exchange

Enclosed  herewith  is&amp;gt;  Check

in  payment  of

Name

Present  address

Former  address.

Remittance  should  be  made  preferably  by  New  York  or  Chicago  excliange,
Post  Office  or  Bxpress  Money  Order,  payable  to  Harmon  Foundation,  Xnc.  and
mailed  with  this  notice  to  140  Nassau  Street,  New  York,  N.  Y.
This  notice  of  due  date  of  first  installment  is  sent  merely  for  your
convenience.  No  notice  of  further  installments  will  be  mailed.
1000—5-1-24  (over)

Reverse

Original  Size,

Form  6.
        <pb n="138" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

139

Original  Size,  3  l A  x  S  K

Form  8.

NOTICE
Conforming  to  a  business  practice  that  has  become  almost
general,  on  January  1,  1925,  we  discontinued  sending  receipts
for  installment  payments  on  Loan  Agreements  unless  especially
requested  to  do  so.
We  recommend  that  remittances  be  made  by  check,  Post
Office  or  Express  Money  Order.
HARMON  FOUNDATION
INCORPORATED
11-2-25—lOOO—P6  6  73
Original  Size,  6  x  2^4  Form  7.

For  Certificate  of  Honorary  Membership  See  Page  140

Bankers’  Endorsement
OF  THIS
Certificate
**
In  my  opinion  the  ownership  of  a  Certificate ­
  of  Honorary  Membership  in  the  Harmon
Foundation  would  constitute  substantial  evidence
of  good  character  in  establishing  the  moral  Standing ­
  of  an  applicant  for  banking  accommodations,
if  other  qualifications  were  equally  satisfactory.
Lewis  L.  Clarke
President,  American  Exchange
National  Bank,  New  York
Harry  A.  Kahler
President,  American  Trust
Company,  New  York
In  my  estimation  the  ownership  of  a  Certificate ­
  of  Honorary  Membership  in  the  Harmon
Foundation  constitutes  substantial  evidence  of
good  character,  in  that  such  a  person  having
worked  his  way  through  College  has  developed
the  capacity  to  perform  work.  Having  by  his
own  efforts  liquidated  loans  made  to  him,  he  has
demonstrated  thrift  and  integrity.  Work,  integrity
  and  thrift  are  three  essential  traits  that
lead  to  success  in  life.
Edward  Townsbnd
Former  President  and  Chairman  of
the  Board  of  the  Importers  and
Traders  National  Bank,  New  York
        <pb n="139" />
        [141]

SAMPLE  TYPES  OF  COLLECTION  LETTERS  IN  USE  BY  THE
DIVISION  OF  STUDENT  LOANS  OF  THE  HARMON  FOUNDATION
*
1.  First  notice  after  interest  installment  becomes  delinquent.
2.  First  notice  after  regulär  $10  installment  becomes  delinquent.
3.  Notice  to  College  Loan  Committee  regarding  delinquent  borrower.
4.  Notice  to  sub-chairman  of  College  group  regarding  delinquent
borrower.
5.  Second  interest  notice  from  Flarmon  Foundation  to  borrower.
6.  Second  notice  from  Harmon  Foundation  to  borrower  who  has
become  delinquent  on  his  regulär  $10  installment.
        <pb n="140" />
        142

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

l.
(First  notice  after
interest  installment
becomes  delinquent)
Mr.  John  Doe
140  Nassau  Street
New  York,  N.  Y.
My  Dear  Mr.  Doe:
According  to  our  records  the  installment  payment  of  accrued  interest  due
the  first  of  this  month  on  your  Student  loan  agreement  has  not  yet  been  received.
If  your  remittance  has  not  already  been  mailed,  we  shall  expect  it  to  be
sent  immediately..  Each  of  our  borrowers  has  entered  into  a  business  contract
to  which  we  shall  require  strict  adherence.
Very  truly  yours,

Division  of  Student  Loans

2.
(First  notice  after
regulär  $10  installment
becomes  delinquent)
Mr.  John  Doe
140  Nassau  Street
New  York,  N.  Y.
My  Dear  Mr.  Doe:
According  to  our  records  the  installment  payment  due  the  first  of  this  month
on  your  student  loan  agreement  has  not  been  received.
If  your  remittance  has  not  already  been  mailed,  we  shall  expect  it  to  be
sent  immediately.  Each  of  our  borrowers  has  entered  into  a  business  contract
to  which  we  shall  require  strict  adherence.
Very  truly  yours,

Division  of  Student  Loans
        <pb n="141" />
        '
HEB

Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

Mr.  John  Smith,  Chairman
Student  Loan  Committee
Alpha  College
New  York,  N.  Y.
My  Dear  Mr.  Smith  :
According  to  our  records  the  installment  due  the  first  of  on  the
above  account  has  not  yet  been  paid,  nor  have  we  received  a  response  to  our
recent  notice.
Will  you  please  call  this  borrower’s  attention  to  the  responsibility  assumed,
not  only  to  the  Harmon  Foundation  but  also  to  the  College  and  to  other  members
of  the  group,  and  either  send  us  a  copy  of  your  letter  or  advise  us  of  the  date
you  wrote?
We  thank  you  for  any  assistance  you  can  give  us  in  making  collection.
Very  sincerely  yours,

Division  of  Student  Loans
        <pb n="142" />
        144

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

4.

Mr.  James  Brown
Tarrytown,  New  York

My  Dear  Mr.  Brown  :

(Notice  to  sub-chairman  of
College  group  regarding
delinquent  borrower)

Re:  John  Doe
140  Nassau  Street
New  York,  N.  Y.

Since  you  were  selected  as  a  representative  of  your  group  of  Harmon  borrowers
  at  y° u  know  that
one  of  your  duties  is  to  follow  up  students  within  the  group  who  have  become
delinquent  in  their  payments.
We  regret  to  advise  you  that  the  installment  due  the  first  of  on
the  above  account  has  not  yet  been  paid.  Will  you  please  communicate  with  this
borrower,  calling  attention  to  responsibility  both  to  the  College  and
fellow  borrowers?  It  is  our  intention  that  no  group  will  suffer  for  any  default
if  it  can  be  prevented.
We  thank  you  for  your  Cooperation.

Very  sincerelv  yours,

Division  of  Student  Loans

Memorandum  to  Harmon  Foundation  erom  Sub-Chairman
I  communicated  with  the  above  borrower  in  the  following  manner:
By  letter
(Please  give  date  of  letter)
By  interview

Remarks:
        <pb n="143" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

145

5.

(Second  interest  notice
frorn  Harmon  Foundation
to  borrower)
Mr.  John  Doe
140  Nassau  Street
New  York,  N.  Y.
My  Dear  Mr.  Doe:
You  have  already  been  notified  that  \ve  have  not  received  the  first  payment
on  the  accrued  interest  of  your  loan  contract  which  was  due  December  Ist.  Up
to  the  present  time  we  have  neither  received  your  remittance  nor  the  courtesy
of  a  reply  to  our  letter,  although  you  promised  when  making  application  for  a  loan
that  you  would  answer  promptly  all  letters  relating  to  the  Obligation  as  long  as
any  part  of  the  account  remained  unpaid.
We  cannot  understand  your  neglect,  especially  since  your  contract  provides
that  if  on  account  of  illness  or  loss  of  employment  you  cannot  pay  an  installment,
you  may  request  an  extension  of  time  by  writing  to  the  Harmon  Foundation  ten
days  before  the  payment  becomes  due.
No  banking  Organization  would  keep  your  account  open  unless  you  gave
some  indication  of  your  good  faith.  The  Harmon  Foundation  has  the  same
relationship  toward  you  that  a  bank  would  have.
We  shall  expect  payment  of  at  least  part  of  your  account  immediately.
Very  truly  yours,

Division  of  Student  Loans
        <pb n="144" />
        146

A  Study  of  Student  Loans

6.

(Second  notice  front  Harmon
Foundation  to  borrower  who
has  become  delinquent  on
his  regulär  $10  installment)
Mr.  John  Doe
140  Nassau  Street
New  York,  N.  Y.
My  Dear  Mr.  Doe:
While  you  were  a  Student  at  the  Harmon
Foundation  had  faith  enough  in  you  to  grant  you  a  loan  so  that  you  could
continue  your  education.  You  signed  a  Statement  that  you  had  read  and  understood
  our  terms  for  repayment,  and  also  signed  an  agreement  to  make  payment
of  $10  each  month  beginning  the  first  of  until  your  entire  contract
had  been  paid.
We  find  that  we  have  not  yet  received  your  remittance  due  the  first  of
although  we  called  it  to  your  attention  on  and  we
believe  your  College  and  the  sub-chairman  of  your  group  have  also  communicated
with  you  regarding  it.  Your  installment  has  also  now  become  due.
Your  carelessness  seems  inexcusable  since  there  is  a  clause  in  your  contract  that
if  on  account  of  illness  or  loss  of  employment  due  to  no  fault  of  your  own,  you
cannot  meet  an  installment  on  time,  you  may  request  an  extension  by  writing
to  the  Harmon  Foundation  ten  days  before  the  installment  becomes  due.
We  cannot  allow  an  item  to  remain  delinquent  without  the  borrower  at
least  paying  something  on  account.  If  you  are  not  in  a  Position  to  pay  the
entire  amount  at  this  time,  we  shall  expect  you  to  send  at  least  part  payment
and  advise  us  when  you  will  send  the  balance  of  it.  This  will  show  your  good
faith  toward  the  Obligation  and  keep  your  account  alive.
If,  however,  we  do  not  hear  from  you  before  your
account  will  be  placed  with  our  attomey  for  collection  and  any  legal  costs  will
constitute  an  additional  charge  against  you.
Very  truly  yours,

Division  of  Student  Loans
        <pb n="145" />
        [147]

APPENDIX  B

THE  LOAN  ASSOCIATION  OF  THE  GERMAN  STUDENTS
Introduction
“The  Loan  Association  of  the  German  Students  which  forms  now  a
necessary  part  of  the  economic  measures  of  the  German  Student  body  was
established  as  a  registered  Corporation  June  22,  1921  in  Berlin.”  Although
this  association  is  of  recent  origin,  its  forerunners  had  been  carrying  on
similar  work  in  local  communities  for  some  time  past. 1  All  these  local
helps  were  entirely  insufficient  to  meet  the  demands.
The  need  of  economic  or  financial  help  for  students  became  so  pressing
  in  1921  that  the  Göttinger  Student  Congress  passed  the  following  resolution:
  “The  need  of  students  in  consequence  of  the  present  rise  in  prices
has  achieved  such  a  scope  that  it  is  necessary  to  procure  economic  help.”
It  was  also  resolved  to  ask  the  state,  university  authorities,  and  private  and
municipal  circles  to  help  in  the  establishment  of  the  Student  loan  assodations.
  Through  the  establishment  of  these  loan  associations  it  was  hoped
to  aid  those  students  who  because  of  the  war  and  changed  circumstances
had  not  been  able  to  continue  their  studies.
The  First  Central  Plans
In  May,  1921,  soon  after  the  founding  of  the  Economic  Help  of
the  German  Student  Body,  Dr.  Fudikar  presented  a  plan  for  the  establishment ­
  of  a  loan  and  help  association  for  students  over  the  whole  German
empire  which  was  to  cooperate  with  the  Economic  Help  of  the  German
Student  Body.  The  Cardinal  proposals  as  worked  out  took  into  account
the  experience  of  similar  organizations  in  the  United  States  and  Denmark.
The  Loan  Association  of  the  German  Student  Body  was  established  in
June,  1922;  the  final  registration  of  the  Corporation  took  place  on  Feb.
16,  1923.  The  Organization  of  this  association  presents  a  “turning  point
on  the  way  to  the  practical  realization  of  the  idea  of  economic  self-help
of  the  German  students.” 2
The  reasons  why  this  Loan  Association  was  established  as  a  separate
entity  rather  than  as  a  part  of  another  Organization  such  as  the  Economic
Help  of  the  German  Student  Body  are  as  follows:
1.  Need  of  uniform  and  similarly  organized  local  units  or  branches
with  control  exercised  by  a  central  office.
2.  Declaration  by  the  states,  universities,  and  countries  of  their  willingness
  to  cooperate  as  members  of  this  association.
1  Leipzig  Loan  and  Help  Association  in  1919,  Albertus  Magnus  Verein,  and  others.
_  2  Business  Report  of  the  Loan  Association  of  the  German  Student  Body,  June,  1921-Feb.,
  1925.
        <pb n="146" />
        148

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

The  general  economic  importance  of  the  association  is  due  to  the  fact
that  it  enables  the  students  to  finish  their  studies  without  being  troubled
by  money  cares.
The  money  is  at  his  disposal  on  favorable  terms  and  thus  the  Student
is  prevented  from  falling  into  the  hands  of  usurers  as  was  the  case  previously.
 3
The  work  of  the  association  is  built  mainly  on  the  thought
that  the  Student  is  able  to  get  means  enough  for  his  first  Semester,  but  to
the  end  of  his  university  work  he  is  not  able  to  do  so  and  must  be  accorded
help  which  enables  him  to  use  the  future  returns  of  his  Professional  work
of  the  next  decade  in  the  finishing  up  of  studies.*
This  idea  of  self-help  and  especially  of  the  Student  as  a  worker  was
the  basic  one  in  the  establishment  of  the  association  and  in  all  its  measures.
The  way  proposed  by  the  Loan  Association  was  the  only  way  which  would
enable  every  upright  man  to  work  up  with  the  help  of  his  own  forces  and
with  the  complete  security  of  his  inner  freedom  and  independence.
Organization  and  Administration
The  association  is  managed  by  the  Executive  Committee  which  consists
  of  the  President,  two  vice-presidents,  and  a  treasurer;  the  Managing
Board  which  is  made  up  of  representatives  of  the  governments  of  the
German  Empire;  representatives  of  the  Association  of  German  Universities,
  representatives  of  the  German  students,  and  representatives  from
the  business  world;  and  the  General  Assembly.  At  the  outset  it  was
decided  that  the  regulations  concerning  the  management  of  the  branches
were  not  final,  but  that  changes  ccruld  be  made  later  on  the  basis  of  future
experience.  Although  the  control  of  the  funds  was  to  be  centralized,
the  granting  and  payment  of  loans  was  to  be  local,  handled  by  the  branches.
The  management  of  each  branch  is  taken  care  of  by  representatives
of  the  faculty  of  the  university  where  the  branch  is  located,  representatives
of  the  Student  body  of  the  university,  and  a  practical  business  man  (preferably
  a  banking  specialist).
The  purpose  of  the  branch  is  the  carrying  on  of  local  activities:
1.  The  distribution  of  means  received  from  the  central  office  among
students  chosen  after  careful  and  impartial  investigation  of  the  incoming
applications.
2.  The  continuance  of  connection  with  the  borrowers  until  repayments
have  been  completed.
3.  The  receiving  of  repayments  on  loans  as  well  as  interest.
4.  The  transfer  of  these  payments  to  the  central  office.  *  1

8  Und.
1  Ibid.
        <pb n="147" />
        ?  i'-'

Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance  149
The  branch  is  divided  into  two  parts;  a  management  division  which
directs  all  the  activity  of  the  branch,  and  a  decision  board  which  decides
on  the  proposals  of  the  committee  and,  after  a  personal  conversation  with
applicants,  as  to  the  extension  of  loans.
Method  of  Granting  Loans
In  general,  loans  are  extended  only  to  students  finishing  their  academic
studies,  that  is,  those  who  are  within  a  year  of  their  final  examinations  in  a
German  University.  Proof  of  successful  scientific  work  and  scholastic
achievement  are  often  required.  Those  students  who  have  earned  a  large
part  of  their  funds  through  work  during  vacations  or  at  other  times  are
usually  given  preference  when  loans  are  extended.
If  a  Student  wants  to  secure  a  loan,  he  must  file  an  application  for  it
with  the  branch.  In  this  application  he  must  submit  his  complete  vita  including
  a  review  of  his  past  educational  training,  his  experience  in  working,
his  health,  his  family  relations,  and  his  economic  position.  As  a  rule  there
is  a  personal  conversation  with  the  borrower  in  regard  to  his  prospects  in
academic  and  Professional  life.  If  all  the  necessary  requirements  are  fulfilled,
  the  central  office  remits,  upon  request  from  the  branch,  the  full
amount  of  the  loan.  The  loan  made  is  never  lower  than  the  minimum
amount  of  funds  necessary  for  subsistence  in  the  community  where  the
Student  is  located.  The  borrower  signs  a  contract  with  the  branch  in  which
he  obligates  himself  to  present  security,  repay  the  loan  in  installments  and
interest  semi-annually,  and  to  send  in  to  the  branch  a  yearly  report  of  his
economic  and  Professional  Status.  The  interest  payment  on  the  loan  is
two  per  cent  for  the  first  five  years,  after  which  it  is  five  per  cent.  Repayment
  begins  in  the  fifth  year  after  the  loan  is  issued  and  runs  in  installments ­
  for  five  years.  In  case  of  premature  repayment  three  per  cent
interest  is  discounted  after  the  fifth  year.
Origin  of  Funds  and  Uses
The  money  used  in  loans  is  derived  from  three  sources;  the  contributions
  of  the  members  and  donations,  which  are  to  be  distributed  in
loans;  the  payments  of  the  students  in  German  universities,  which  constitute
  an  insurance  fund  to  cover  losses  through  non-payment;  and  the
interest  from  these  two  sources,  which  is  used  to  pay  the  expenses  of  the
business  management  of  the  association.
Internal  Organization
The  original  plan  was  that  the  capital  of  the  Loan  Association  should
be  increased  to  a  sum  large  enough  to  provide  for  loans  over  a  period  of
        <pb n="148" />
        150

A  Study  oe  Student  Loans

i'

ten  years.  It  was  to  be  a  revolving  fund,  since  in  the  ten-year  period  the
loans  would  be  repaid  and  thus  funds  made  available  for  new  loans.
The  interest  on  the  Capital  and  interest  payments  of  the  borrower  were
to  be  used  to  raise  the  insurance  fund  against  non-payments.  A  form
of  group  guarantee  is  used  by  the  association.  Every  Student  in  a  German
university  is  taxed  one  mark  each  session  for  the  purpose  of  building  up
the  insurance  fund.
_  This  general  tax  as  well  as  the  activity  of  the  Loan  Association  would
fix  in  the  minds  of  all  well-off  students  that  they  have  obligations  toward
their  comrades  who  are  in  need. 5
Early  Difficulties  of  the  Association
The  currency  disaster  in  Germany  which  took  the  form  of  inflation
hindered  the  plan  of  building  up  a  big  Capital.  Later  with  the  introduction
of  a  stable  currency,  the  financial  Situation  improved.  The  difficulty  which
first  presented  itself  was  the  depreciation  of  the  money  that  had  been
loaned.  The  continual  depreciation  of  paper  marks  and  the  rise  in  prices
made  it  difficult  for  the  Student  to  be  free  from  care  and  need.  The  loans
extended  were  thus  mostly  gifts  to  the  borrower  and  the  Capital  was  practically
  destroyed  by  inflation.  Loaning  on  the  gold  mark  plan  was  then
adopted  and  many  of  the  paper  mark  borrowers  were  asked  and  consented
to  pay  back  a  larger  amount,  even  though  they  had  no  legal  Obligation  to
do  so.
Future  Prospects
The  possibilities  of  the  Organization,  as  set  forth  by  its  business  management, ­
  are  very  great,  provided  there  is  a  just  application  of  the  disposable
  funds.  It  is  hoped  by  the  association  that  the  German  students
will  help  to  realize  these  possibilities  by  their  cooperation.
The  work  of  the  association  will  be  able  to  prosper  only  if  the  Spirit
of  self-government  and  self-help  will  be  strengthened  in  the  students  at
present  and  in  the  future. 6

5  Ibid.
•  Ibid.
        <pb n="149" />
        [151]

BY-LAWS

1
The  Association  is  called  the  “Loan  Association  of  the  German  Student  Body,
Inc.”  Its  residence  is  in  Dresden  and  it  will  be  registered  in  the  Corporation
register.
2
The  purpose  of  the  Association  is  giving  out  loans  to  needy  students  of  all
the  universities  of  the  German  Empire  and  of  the  Technological  Institute  of  Danzig; ­
  upon  personal  and  scholastic  identification  and  to  the  exclusion  of  all  political,
religious,  or  point  of  view  criteria.  The  participation  of  separate  universities  is  to
take  place  according  to  the  rules  indicated  in  Paragraph  3,  section  1  A  (the  contributions
  of  the  students)  and  in  paragraph  8  (the  organization  of  the  branches).
The  Association  has  for  its  purpose  the  furthering  of  common  welfare.
3
Sec.  1.  Members  are  admitted  to  the  Association:
a.  Through  the  written  application  to  the  Executive  Committee  without  regard
to  the  amount  contributed;  the  state,  the  countries  having  universities,  the  Association ­
  of  the  German  Universities,  “The  Economic  Help  of  the  German  Student
Body,”  and  all  economic  organizations  of  students  of  separate  universities  that  are
endowed  with  a  legal  personality;  on  the  condition  that  in  those  universities  the
students  should  contribute  every  session  at  least  one  gold  mark  each  to  the  Association, ­
  transmitted  to  a  place  indicated  by  the  Executive  Committee.
b.  Through  the  President  and  with  the  approval  of  the  Executive  Committee; ­
  individuals  and  legal  entities  who  either  contribute  at  once  at  least  2,500
gold  marks  or  obligate  themselves  to  pay  annually  at  least  100  marks  for  a  period
of  not  less  than  3  years.
Sec.  2.  The  general  assembly  can  elect  honorary  members,  persons  proposed
by  the  managing  board,  but  who  need  not  be  members  of  the  Association.  All  the
honorary  members  have  the  right  of  the  actual  members  without  their  obligations
and  have  the  right  to  vote.
4
Sec.  1.  The  General  Assembly.  The  members  under  paragraph  3  (Sec.  1  A)
have  each  one  vote  without  regard  to  the  amount  contributed.
SEC.  2.  The  voting  power  of  the  other  members  is  as  follows:
a.  According  to  the  annual  contribution:  each  100  marks  for  contributions
within  100  to  1,000  has  one  vote.  For  every  further  amount,  each  200  marks  yield
a  vote  up  to  2,000  marks.  For  every  further  amount  within  2,000  to  5,000  marks,
every  500  marks  yield  a  vote.  For  further  amounts  of  every  5,000  marks  each
1,000  marks  gives  an  additional  vote.
b.  By  contributions  paid  in  once  only.  (Sec.  omitted.)
        <pb n="150" />
        152

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

5
The  contributions  to  be  paid  at  once  as  well  as  the  first  annual  payment  have
to  be  paid  within  a  quarter  of  a  year  after  the  subscription.  In  case  of  very  large
amounts,  the  Executive  Committee  can  permit  payments  in  installments.  The
annual  amounts  have  to  be  paid  not  later  than  March  31  st,  the  payments  to  be
made  at  the  place  indicated  by  the  Executive  Committee.

6
Membership  ends  through  the  death  of  an  individual,  or  witli  legal  entities,
upon  dissolution,  or:
a.  Through  the  written  application  to  the  President  which  can  be  made  out
only  to  the  end  of  the  business  year.
b.  When,  in  spite  of  reminders,  the  payment  of  dues  does  not  follow  within
six  weeks.  The  Executive  Committee  can  extend  this  term  in  separate  cases.
The  exclusion  from  membership  can  be  decided  upon  by  a  three-quarters  majority
vote  of  the  managing  board.  The  investigation  in  a  legal  way  of  the  grounds  for
exclusion  is  not  permissible.

7
The  funds  of  the  Association  are  to  be  formed  of:
a.  The  contributions  of  the  members  and  of  donations.
b.  The  payments  each  session  of  the  students  in  German  universities  and
in  the  Technological  Institute  of  Danzig.
c.  The  interest  on  a.  and  b.
The  fund  that  is  formed  by  the  contributions  of  the  members  and  of  donations ­
  is  to  be  distributed  in  loans  in  such  a  way  as  to  keep  this  part  intact.  The
payments  of  the  students  go  to  form  an  insurance  fund  out  of  which  losses
through  non-payment  of  loans  are  to  be  covered.  The  interest  goes  to  pay  first  the
expenses  of  the  business  management  and  the  remainder  will  be  divided  into  two
equal  parts:  the  first  to  be  added  to  the  insurance  fund,  the  other  to  the  Economic
Help  of  the  German  Student  Body  as  the  main  agent  of  the  economic  activity  of
the  German  students.

8
The  management  of  the  funds  is  to  be  centralized.  The  granting  of  loans
and  their  payment  to  individual  students  is  to  be  local.  For  this  purpose  in  every
university  a  branch  will  be  organized  with  the  title  “The  Loan  Association  of  the
German  Student  Body,  Branch  ”  As  a  rule  the  faculty,  the  Student  body
of  the  respective  university,  and  practical  business  men  (among  those  of  the  latter
group  there  should  be  if  possible  a  banking  specialist),  will  take  part  in  the  management ­
  of  the  branch.  In  those  universities  where  there  is  already  a  definite
economic  association  of  students,  it  ought  to  send  in  an  application  for  the  establishment
  of  a  branch.  This  application  should  be  approved  by  both  the  Student
body  and  by  the  university  officers.
        <pb n="151" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

153

9
The  Association  is  to  be  managed  by:
a.  The  Executive  Committee—Der  Vorstand.
b.  The  Managing  Board—Der  Verwaltungsrat.
c.  The  General  Assembly—Die  Hauptversammlung.
10
The  Executive  Committee  consists  of  the  President,  two  vice-presidents,  and
a  treasurer.  It  is  to  be  elected  by  the  Managing  Board  for  three  years.  A  reelection
  is  permissible.  In  case  a  member  of  the  Committee  retires  before  his
term  is  up,  the  Managing  Board  is  to  elect  a  substitute  for  the  remainder  of  the
period.

11
The  President  is  the  legal  representative  of  the  Association.  Written  or  oral
declarations  which  involve  a  pecuniary  Obligation  of  the  Association  or  a  disposal
of  fixed  property  are  to  be  approved  by  another  member  of  the  Executive  Committee. ­
  The  Executive  Committee  is  to  carry  on  its  activities  in  accordance  with
the  by-laws  and  the  decision  of  the  General  Assembly  and  the  Managing  Board.
It  is  to  work  out  its  own  procedure.

12
The  President  carries  on  current  business  and  proposes  the  report  for  the
assembly  in  the  meetings.  The  Treasurer  takes  care  of  the  treasury  either  directly
or  indirectly  through  banks  and  is  responsible  for  it.  The  business  management
is  to  be  connected  with  that  of  the  management  of  the  "Economic  Help  of  the
German  Student  Body”.

13
The  Managing  Board  is  to  consist  of:
a.  Five  representatives  of  governments  of  the  German  Empire,  which  means
of  the  countries  that  are  nominated  to  send  a  representative  by  the  Union  of  some
of  them.
b.  Three  representatives  of  the  Association  of  German  Universities  selected
for  a  period  of  three  years;  re-election  of  a  representative  is  permissible.  Out  of
these  three  one  retires  every  year;  the  first  retirement  to  be  determined  by  casting
of  lots.
c.  Seven  representatives  of  the  German  students  are  nominated  by  the
“Economic  Help  of  the  German  Student  Body”  for  a  period  of  two  years;  the
re-election  of  these  representatives  is  permissible.  Out  of  the  six,  three  retire
every  year;  the  first  retirement  to  be  determined  by  casting  of  lots.
d.  Nine  representatives  of  the  business  world  who  are  elected  by  the  General ­
  Assembly  out  of  the  members  or  their  representatives  for  the  period  of  three
years.  Three  are  retired  annually  and  re-election  is  permissible.  The  first  retirement ­
  to  be  determined  by  casting  of  lots.
        <pb n="152" />
        154

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

The  election  of  members  under  (6)  and  (c)  must  take  place  before  the
annual  meeting  of  the  General  Assembly,  otherwise  the  election  will  be  taken  over
by  the  General  Assembly.  In  case  of  members  retiring  before  their  term  expires,
a  replacement  election  for  the  rest  of  the  period  is  to  take  place.
14
The  Managing  Board  decides  as  to  the  budget  and  as  to  the  establishment  of
local  branches.  It  can  also  propose  by  a  two-thirds  vote  a  change  in  the  by-laws,
to  be  addressed  to  the  General  Assembly.  If  this  majority  cannot  be  obtained,
the  Managing  Board  can  by  a  simple  majority  call  another  meeting  four  weeks
later,  at  which  again  a  two-thirds  vote  can  decide  on  proposing  a  change  in  the
by-laws.  Generally  the  Managing  Board  decides  all  cases  which  are  not  dealt  with
by  the  Executive  Committee  and  by  the  General  Assembly.  It  has  to  work  out  the
number  of  loans  distributed,  to  determine  the  rate  of  interest  and  the  terms  of
paying  back  the  loan,  and  to  prepare  all  the  matters  that  are  to  be  decided  upon
by  the  General  Assembly.  It  has  also  to  make  preparations  for  the  elections.
The  Managing  Board  has  at  least  one  meeting  annually  and  besides  that,  at  the
invitation  of  the  President,  can  be  called  together  at  any  time.  Upon  the  written
application  of  at  least  one-third  of  the  members  of  the  Managing  Board,  a  meeting
must  be  held  within  six  weeks’  time.  In  pressing  cases  a  mailed  or  wired  decision
is  possible.
15
A  quorum  of  the  Managing  Board  is  twelve  members.  Matters  are  decided
by  a  simple  majority.  In  case  of  a  tie  vote,  the  President  decides  the  issue.  The
members  of  the  Managing  Board  with  the  exoeption  of  those  under  (c)  receive
no  compensation.  The  Managing  Board  decides  its  own  procedure  and  fixes  the
compensation  for  the  members.
16
At  least  once  a  year  the  General  Assembly  has  a  meeting.  Its  date  and
agenda  are  to  be  communicated  in  written  form  to  the  members  at  least  ten  days
ahead  of  time.  An  extraordinary  meeting  can  be  called  by  the  President.  It  has
to  be  called  by  him  within  six  weeks  if  at  least  one-fifth  of  the  members  require  it
through  a  written  application  indicating  the  topics  to  be  discussed.
17
The  General  Assembly  listens  to  the  annual  report  and  receives  the  annual
accounts  and  votes  approval  of  the  Executive  Committee.  It  has  to  choose  members ­
  of  the  Managing  Board  indicated  in  Paragraph  13  d  and  two  representatives
of  accounts.  It  has  to  decide  by  a  two-thirds  majority  as  to  the  proposals  of  the
Managing  Board  to  change  the  by-laws.

18
Legal  bodies,  business  firms,  partnerships,  and  individual  firms  can  be  represented
  in  the  General  Assembly  by  an  executive  member  or  by  their  own  member.  It
is  also  permissible  to  transfer  their  representative  and  voting  power  to  another
member  of  the  firm  or  to  another  representative  of  the  legal  body,  business
firm,  etc.
        <pb n="153" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

155

19
In  elections  and  decisions,  if  not  otherwise  specified,  matters  are  decided  by
a  simple  majority  of  the  metnbers  present.  In  case  of  a  tie  vote,  the  proposal  is
considered  to  be  rejected.  In  election  it  is  decided  by  casting  lots.
20
In  every  meeting  of  the  General  Assembly  minutes  have  to  be  taken  and  to
be  signed  by  the  presiding  officer.

21
The  business  year  of  the  Association  extends  from  April  1  to  March  31.
22
The  dissolution  of  the  Association  can  be  decided  only  by  the  General
Assembly  following  a  proposal  by  the  Managing  Board.  In  both  bodies  there
must  be  a  four-fifths  majority.  In  case  of  dissolution,  the  General  Assembly
decides  on  the  disposal  of  the  funds  in  existence  according  to  the  main  purposes
of  the  Association.

23
For  the  first  business  year,  the  members  of  the  Managing  Board,  under
section  13  b,  were  chosen  by  the  meeting  which  founded  the  Association.  The
members  under  section  13  o,  b,  and  c  were  nominated  according  to  the  rules  of  the
by-laws.  The  present  Managing  Board  of  the  first  business  year  has  its  powers,
even  though  the  indicated  maximum  number  of  members  is  not  yet  reached.  It
has  a  right  to  complete  itself  and  to  elect  the  Executive  Committee.  The  present
Managing  Board  has  the  right  to  change  the  by-laws  by  a  unanimous  vote  in  the
presence  of  at  least  one-half  of  its  members.  The  proposal  to  change  the  by-laws
must  be  communicated  in  written  form  to  the  members  at  least  fourteen  days
before  the  decision.
24
The  by-laws  are  in  effect  from  June  2,  1922.

Registered—June  17,  1923.
        <pb n="154" />
        [156]

THE  INSTITUTION  OF  HONOUR  LOANS—FRANCE

The  Students  National  Union  at  its  annual  Conference  in  1922  proposed
  that  a  National  Fund  for  Honour  Loans  should  be  created  in  Order
to  help  the  poorest  among  the  students,  requesting  that  the  state  participate
  and  help  with  two  million  francs  during  a  period  of  ten  vears  to
assist  in  the  inauguration  of  the  fund.  This  proposal  of  the  National
Union  was  passed  only  after  a  long  parliamentary  discussion  on  the  principles
  and  applications  of  Honour  Loans.

Administration  and  Distribution  of  Funds
An  Administrative  Committee  meets  twice  a  year  at  the  Board  of
Education,  Paris,  to  administer  the  funds  of  the  Institution  and  distribute
  them  among  the  different  French  Universities.  This  Committee
with  the  Minister  as  Chairman,  is  composed  as  follows:
The  Director  of  Higher  Education
The  Rector  of  a  Provincial  University
A  Dean  of  the  Paris  University
A  Dean  of  a  Provincial  University
A  Senator,  a  Deputy,  a  Member  of  the  Council  of  State
A  member  of  the  General  Council
A  member  of  the  “Cour  des  Comptes”
Three  heads  of  the  great  Technical  Schools
One  important  contributor
President  of  the  Students’  National  Union
President  of  a  Provincial  Students’  Association
One  Student  front  each  of  the  Paris  Faculties,  chosen  by  the  Minister.

Local  Committees
A  local  committee  meets  to  study  the  requests  and  distribute  the  loans
in  each  university  two  or  three  times  a  year.  This  committee  is  formed
of  professors  and  students  in  equal  number,  and  each  committee  in  the
different  universities  has  as  one  of  its  members  the  President  of  the
Students’  General  Union.

Method  of  Granting  Loans
A  loan  is  made  without  interest  and  normally  does  not  exceed  3,000
francs,  but  in  exceptional  cases  may  be  raised  to  5,000  (for  Doctorates).
The  Student  binds  himself  in  honour  to  repay  the  loan.  The  repayment
does  not  have  to  begin  until  the  second  year  after  his  studies  are  finished.
        <pb n="155" />
        A  Study  of  Student  Loans

157

In  making  an  application  for  a  loan  the  Student  must  send  to  the
Rector  of  the  University:  1.  A  request,  explaining  his  Situation;  2.  A
school  certificate;  3.  A  certificate  from  the  Dean  or  head  of  his  school;
4.  A  medical  certificate  (in  order  to  judge  whether  he  is  able  to  continue
his  studies)  ;  5.  A  tax  certificate,  by  the  Maire  to  ascertain  the  financial
Position  of  his  family;  and  6.  A  report  of  the  work  accomplished  during
the  last  few  years.
Since  the  establishment  of  the  Institution,  fifteen  hundred  honour
loans  of  one  thousand  to  four  thousand  francs  have  been  granted.

Summary  bascd  on  a  Report  of  the  last  annual  Conference  of  the
International  Student  Service,  Geneva,  Switserland,
September,  ip2j.
        <pb n="156" />
        Studies  on  Student  Loans
Harmon  Foundation  Study—Student  Loan  Funds,  1924
Oregon  Agricultural  College  Study—Student  Loan  Funds,  1923
Correspondence  and  Interviews
Universities  and  Colleges
Name  Location
Adelphi  College  Brooklyn,  New  York
Agnes  Scott  College  Decatur,  Georgia
Akron,  Municipal  University  of  Akron,  Ohio
Alabama,  University  of  Tuscaloosa,  Ala.
Albion  College  Albion,  Michigan
Allegheny  College  Meadville,  Pa.
American  International  College  Springfield,  Mass.
Antioch  College  Yellow  Springs,  Ohio
Arizona,  University  of  Tucson,  Ariz.
Arkansas  Agri.  &amp;amp;  Mech.  College  Monticello,  Ark.
Arkansas  Baptist  College  Little  Rock,  Ark.
Arkansas,  University  of  Fayetteville,  Ark.
Atlanta  University  Atlanta,  Georgia
Aurora  College  Aurora,  Illinois
Bates  College  Lewiston,  Maine
Baylor  College  Beiton,  Texas
Beloit  College  Beloit,  Wisconsin
Benedict  College  Columbia,  South  Carolina
Berea  College  Berea,  Kentucky
Berkshire  School  Sheffield,  Mass.
Bethany  College  Bethany,  W.  Va.
Birmingham-Southern  College  Birmingham,  Ala.
Boston  University  Boston,  Mass.
Bowdoin  College  Brunswick,  Maine
Bradley  Polytechnic  Institute  Peoria,  Illinois
Brigham  Young  University  Provo,  Utah
Brown  University  Providence,  Rhode  Island
Bryn  Mawr  College  Bryn  Mawr,  Pa.
Buckneil  University  Lewisburg,  Pa.
Buffalo,  University  of  Buffalo,  New  York
Butler  College  Indianapolis,  Ind.
California,  University  of  Berkeley,  California
Carleton  College  Northfield,  Minnesota
Carnegie  Institute  of  Technology  Pittsburgh,  Pa.
Case  School  of  Applied  Science  Cleveland,  Ohio
Catholic  University  of  America  Washington,  D.  C.
Chattanooga,  University  of  Chattanooga,  Tenn.
Chicago,  University  of  Chicago,  Illinois
Cincinnati,  University  of  Cincinnati,  Ohio
Clark  University  Worcester,  Mass.
Colorado  College  Colorado  Springs,  Colorado
Colorado,  The  State  Agri.  College  of  Fort  Collins,  Colorado
Colorado  School  of  Mines  Golden,  Colorado
Colorado,  University  of  Boulder,  Colorado
Colorado,  Western  State  College  of  Gunnison,  Colorado
Columbia  University  New  York,  New  York
Connecticut  Agri.  College  Storrs,  Conn.
[158]
        <pb n="157" />
        A  Study  of  Student  Loans

159

Name
Connecticut  College  for  Women
Cornell  College
Cornell  University  ..
Dakota  Wesleyan  University
Dana  College  &amp;amp;  Trinity  Seminary
Dartmouth  College
Davidson  College
Delaware,  University  of
De  Pauw  University
Des  Moines  University
Downingtown  Industrial  &amp;amp;  Agri.  School...
Drexel  Institute
Dropsie  College
Drury  College
Earlham  College
Ellsworth  College
Elon  College
Elmira  College
Etnory  and  Henry  College
Eureka  College
Evansville  College
Fisk  University
Florida  Agri.  &amp;amp;  Mech.  College
Florida  State  College  for  Women
Floi'ida,  University  of
George  Washington  University
Georgia  School  of  Technology
Georgia,  University  of
Gooding  College
Goucher  College
Grand  Island  College
Hamilton  College
Harvard  University
Hastings  College
ITaverford  College
Hendrix  College
Huron  College
Idaho,  University  of
Illinois,  University  of
Indiana,  University  of
Indiana  State  Normal  School
International  Y.  M.  C.  A.  College
Iowa  State  College  of  Agri.  &amp;amp;  Mech.  Arts
Iowa  State  Teachers  College
Iowa,  State  University  of
Iowa  Wesleyan  College
Jamestown  College  .....
John  B.  Stetson  University
John  Tarleton  Agri.  College
Johns  Elopkins  University
Kansas  State  Agri.  College
Kansas  State  Normal  School
Kansas,  University  of
Kentucky,  University  of
Keuka  College
Knox  College
Lafayette  College
LaVerne  College

Location
New  London,  Conn.
Mt.  Vernon,  Iowa
Ithaca,  New  York
Mitchell,  South  Dakota
Blair,  Nebraska
Hanover,  New  Hampshire
Davidson,  North  Carolina
Newark,  Delaware
Greencastle,  Ind.
Des  Moines,  Iowa
Downingtown,  Pa.
Philadelphia,  Pa.
Philadelphia,  Pa.
Springfield,  Mo.
Richmond,  Ind.
Iowa  Falls,  Iowa
Elon  College,  North  Carolina
Elmira,  New  York
Emory,  Virginia
Eureka,  Illinois
Evansville,  Indiana
Nashville,  Tenn.
Tallahassee,  Florida
Tallahassee,  Florida
Gainesville,  Florida
Washington,  D..  C.
Atlanta,  Ga.
Athens,  Ga.
Gooding,  Idaho
Baltimore,  Md.
Grand  Island,  Nebraska
Clinton,  New  York
Cambridge,  Mass.
Hastings,  Nebraska
Haverford,  Pä.
Conway,  Arkansas
Huron,  South  Dakota
Moscow,  Idaho
Urbana,  Illinois
Bloomington,  Ind.
Terre  Haute,  Ind.
Springfield,  Mass.
Ames,  Iowa
Cedar  Falls,  Iowa
Iowa  City,  Iowa
Mt.  Pleasant,  Iowa
Jamestown.  North  Dakota
De  Land,  Florida
Stephenville.  Texas
Baltimore,  Md.
Manhattan.  Kansas
Emporia,  Kansas
Lawrence,  Kansas
Lexington,  Ky.
Keuka  Park,  New  York
Galesburg,  Illinois
Easton,  Pa.
LaVerne,  California
        <pb n="158" />
        160

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

Name  Location
Lehigh  University  Bethlehem,  Pa.
Lindenwood  College  St.  Charles,  Mo.
Louisiana  College  Pineville,  La.
Louisiana,  Centenary  College  of  Shreveport,  La.
Loyola  University  Chicago,  Illinois
McGill  University  Montreal,  Quebec

Macalester  College  St.  Paul,  Minnesota
Maine,  University  of  Orono,  Maine
Marietta  College  Marietta,  Ohio
Marquette  University  Milwaukee,  Wis.
Maryland,  University  of  .College  Park,  Md.
Massachusetts  Agricultural  College  Amherst,  Mass.
Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology  Cambridge,  Mass.
Michigan,  University  of  Ann  Arbor,  Michigan
Milwaukee-Downer  College  Milwaukee,  Wis.
Minnesota,  University  of  Minneapolis,  Minnesota
Mississippi,  University  of  Oxford,  Miss.
Missouri,  University  of  .  Columbia,  Missouri
Montana  State  College  of  Agri.  &amp;amp;  Mech.  Arts..  Bozeman,  Montana
Montana  State  School  of  Mines  Butte,  Montana
Montana,  University  of  Missoula,  Montana
Morningside  College  Sioux  City,  Iowa
Mt.  Union  College  Alliance,  Ohio
Muskingum  College  New  Concord,  Ohio

Nebraska,  University  of  Lincoln,  Neb.
New  Hampshire,  University  of  Durham,  New  Hampshire
New  Mexico  College  of  Agri.  &amp;amp;  Mech.  Arts....  State  College,  New  Mexico
New  Rochelle,  College  of  New  Rochelle,  New  York
New  York  State  School  of  Agri  Morrisville,  New  York
New  York  University  New  York,  New  York
North  Carolina  State  College  of  Agri.  &amp;amp;  Eng...  Raleigh,  N.  C.
North  Carolina,  University  of  Chapel  Hill,  N.  C.
North  Dakota  Agri.  College  Fargo,  N.  D.
North  Dakota,  University  of  Grand  Forks,  N.  D.
Northwest  Nazarene  College  Narnpa,  Idaho  _
Northwestern  University  Chicago,  Illinois
Norwich  University  Northfield,  Vt.
Notre  Dame,  University  of  ,  Notre  Dame,  Ind.

Oberlin  College
Ohio  Northern  University
Ohio  State  University
Ohio  University
Ohio  Wesleyan  University
Oklahoma  Agri.  &amp;amp;  Mech.  College
Oklahoma  City  University
Oklahoma,  University  of
Olivet  College
Omaha,  University  of
Oregon  Agri.  College
Oregon  Normal  School
Oregon,  University  of
Otterbein  College
Ouachita  College

Oberlin,  Ohio
Ada,  Ohio
Columbus,  Ohio
Athens,  Ohio
Delaware,  Ohio
Stillwater,  Oklahoma
Oklahoma  City,  Oklahoma
Norman,  Oklahoma
Olivet,  Michigan
Omaha,  Nebraska
Corvallis,  Oregon
Monmouth,  Oregon
Eugene,  Oregon
Westerville,  Ohio
Arkadelphia,  Ark.

Pacific,  College  of  the  Stockton,  California
Pennsylvania  State  College  State  College,  Pa.
Pennsylvania,  University  of  Philadelphia,  Pa.
Pittsburgh,  University  of  Pittsburgh,  Pa.
Pomona  College  Claremont,  California
        <pb n="159" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

161

Name
Porto  Rico,  University  of
Pratt  Institute
Princeton  University  ....
Purdue  University

Location
Rio  Piedras,  Porto  Rico
Brooklyn,  New  York
Princeton,  N.  J.
Lafayette,  Ind.

Radcliffe  College  Cambridge,  Mass.
Randolph-Macon  College  Ashland,  Va.
Rensselaer  Polytechnic  Institute  Troy,  New  York
Rhode  Island  State  College  Kingston,  Rhode  Island
Richmond,  University  of  Richmond,  Va.
Rochester  Athenaeum  &amp;amp;  Mechanics  Institute....  Rochester,  New  York
Rochester,  University  of  Rochester,  New  York
Rutgers  College  New  Brunswick,  N.  J.

St.  John’s  College
St.  Lawrence  University
St.  Mary’s  College
St.  Stephen’s  College
Sioux  Falls  College
Skidmore  College
Smith  College
South  Carolina,  University  of
Southern  California,  University  of
Southwestern  Presbyterian  Univ..
Stanford  University
Stevens  Institute  of  Technology...
Stout  Institute
Swarthmore  College

Annapolis,  Md.
Canton,  New  York
St.  Mary’s,  Kansas
Annandale,  New  York
Sioux  Falls,  S.  D.
Saratoga  Springs,  New  York
Northampton,  Mass.
Columbia,  S.  C.
Los  Angeles,  California
Clarksville,  Tenn.
Stanford  University,  California
Hoboken,  N.  J.
Menomonie,  Wis.
Swarthmore,  Pa.

Temple  University
Texas,  Agri.  &amp;amp;  Mech.  College  of
Texas,  University  of
Thiel  College
Tufts  College
Tulane  University
Union  College.
Utah,  University  of
Vassar  College
Vermont,  University  of  ..
Virginia  Polytechnic  Institute...
Virginia  Union  University
Wake  Forest  College
Washington  College
Washington  College
Washington  Missionary  College.
Washington,  State  College  of...
Washington,  University  of
Washington  University
Weaver  College
Wellesley  College
Wells  College
Wesleyan  College
West  Virginia  University
West  Virginia  Wesleyan  College
Western  Reserve  University....
Whittier  College
Willamette  University
Williams  College
Wilson  College
Wisconsin,  University  of

Philadelphia,  Pa.
College  Station,  Texas
Austin,  Texas
Greenville,  Pa.
Medford,  Mass.
New  Orleans,  La.
Schenectady,  New  York
Salt  Lake  City,  Utah
Poughkeepsie,  New  York
Burlington,  Vt.
Blacksburg,  Va.
Richmond,  Va.
Wake  Forest,  N.  C.
Chestertown,  Md.
Washington  College,  Tenn.
Washington,  D.  C.
Pullman,  Washington
Seattle,  Washington
St.  Louis,  Mo.
Weaverville,  N.  C.
Wellesley,  Mass.
Aurora,  New  York
Macon,  Ga.
Morgantown,  W.  Va.
Buckhannon,  W.  Va.
Cleveland,  Ohio
Whittier,  California
Salem,  Oregon
Williamstown,  Mass.
Chambersburg,  Pa.
Madison,  Wis.

Yale  University

New  Haven,  Conn.
        <pb n="160" />
        fr

Hi

■  i
i

I
1  *  j
i,  i»'
'  1 1  |  (:

üi

.

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

Educational  Foundations  and  Organizations
Alice  Walker  Shinholser  Memorial  Loan  Fund
445  College  Street
Macon,  Georgia
American  Association  of  University  Women
National  Headquarters,  1634  I  Street
Washington,  D.  C.
Carnegie  Institution  of  Washington
Washington
D.  C.
Chemists’  Club
52  East  41  st  Street
New  York,  New  York
Dartmouth  Educational  Association
414  National  Shawmut  Bank  Building
Boston,  Mass.
Darlehnskasse  der  Deutschen  Studentenschaft
Dresden
Germany
Darlehnskasse  der  Deutschen  Studentenschaft
Berlin
Germany
Hebrew  Free  Loan  Society,  Inc.
108  Second  Avenue
New  York,  New  York
The  Henry  Strong  Educational  Foundation
50  S.  LaSalle  Street
Chicago,  111.
The  Institute  of  International  Education
522  Fifth  Avenue
New  York,  New  York
Institution  of  Honour  Loans
Board  of  Education
Paris,  France
Lewis  H.  Beck  Mother’s  Memorial  Fund
Wesleyan  College
Macon,  Georgia
Mary  C.  Jackson  Emergency  Loan  Fund
Women’s  Educational  and  Industrial  Union
Boston,  Mass.
The  Massachusetts  Society  for  the  University  Education  of  Women
688  Boylston  Street
Boston,  Mass.
Mayo  Clinic
Rochester
Minnesota
National  Research  Council
B  &amp;amp;  21  st  Streets
Washington,  D.  C.
        <pb n="161" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance
i

163

National  Student  Council  of  the  Young  Women’s  Christian  Associations
600  Lexington  Avenue
New  York,  N.  Y.
North  American  Student  Friend  Association
Kansas  City
Kansas
Presser  Foundation
Middle  City  Post  Office
Philadelphia,  Pa.
Rhode  Island  Society  for  the  Collegiate  Education  of  Women
Providence
Rhode  Island
The  Santa  Barbara  Educational  L,oan  Fund
Santa  Barbara
California
The  Schmidlapp  Bureau  for  Women  and  Girls
Cincinnati
Ohio
The  Wellesley  Students’  Aid  Society,  Inc.
Wellesley  College
Wellesley,  Mass.
Wieboldt  Foundation
3166  Lincoln  Avenue
Chicago,  Illinois
Woman’s  Educational  and  Industrial  Union
Boston
Massachusetts

Church  Boards  of  Education
The  Christian  Church,  Christian  Education  Department
C.  P.  A.  Building
Dayton,  Ohio
Congregational  Education  Society
14  Beacon  Street
Boston  9,  Mass.
New  York  Baptist  Union  for  Ministerial  Education
910  Union  Trust  Building
Rochester,  N.  Y.
The  Northern  Baptist  Education  Society
Ford  Building
Boston,  Mass.
Northern  Baptist  Convention
276  Fifth  Avenue
New  York,  N.  Y.
Ohio  Baptist  Education  Society
Granville
Ohio
Pennsylvania  Baptist  General  Convention
1701  Chestnut  Street
Philadelphia,  Pa.
        <pb n="162" />
        164

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

Seventh  Day  Baptist  General  Conference
Salem
West  Virginia
United  Lutheran  Church  in  America
437  Fifth  Avenue
New  York,  N.  Y.
Board  of  Education  of  Disciples  of  Christ
122  Downey  Avenue
Indianapolis,  Indiana
Norwegian  Lutheran  Church  of  America
Minneapolis
Minnesota
Methodist  Episcopal  Church
ISO  Fifth  Avenue
New  York,  N.  Y.
Methodist  Protestant  Church
613  W.  Diamond,  N.  S.
Pittsburgh,  Pa.
Primitive  Methodist  Church  in  the  U.  S.
Billerica  Center
Mass.
Board  of  Christian  Education  of  the  Presbvterian  Church  in  the  U.  S.  A.
822  Witherspoon  Building
Philadelphia,  Pa.
The  National  Council,  Protestant  Episcopal  Church
281  Fourth  Avenue
New  York,  N.  Y.
The  Executive  Committee  of  Christian  Education  and  Ministerial  Relief  of  the
Presbyterian  Church  in  the  U.  S.
410  Urban  Building
Louisville,  Ky.
Society  for  the  Increase  of  the  Ministry
650  West  Main  Street
Hartford,  Conn.
Board  of  Education  of  the  Church  of  the  United  Brethren  in  Christ
1208  U.  B.  Building
Dayton,  Ohio
American  Unitarian  Association
25  Beacon  Street
Boston,  Mass.

Miscellaneous  Organizations

American  Bankers  Association
110  East  42nd  Street
New  York,  N.  Y.
American  Y.  M.  C.  A.
Czecho-Slovakia
American  Y.  M.  C.  A.
Warsaw,  Poland
        <pb n="163" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

165

Association  of  University  and  College  Business  Officers  of  the  Eastern  States
Association  of  University  and  College  Business  Officers  of  the  Western  States
Chamber  of  Commerce  of  the  United  States  of  America
Washington,  D.  C.
Denver  Chamber  of  Commerce
Denver,  Colorado
The  Christian  Work
70  Fifth  Avenue
New  York,  N.  Y.
Curtis  Publishing  Company
Independence  Square
Philadelphia,  Pa.
The  Duke  Endowment
Sil  Fifth  Avenue
New  York,  N.  Y.
Feild  Co-Operative  Association
Berryville,  Clarke  County
Virginia
Florida  Educational  I,oan  Corporation
Gainesville
Florida
General  Federation  of  Women’s  Clubs
1734  N  Street,  N.  W.
Washington,  D.  C.
Intercollegiate  Branch  of  the  Y.  M.  C.  A.
2  West  45th  Street
New  York,  N.  Y.
International  Committee  of  the  Y.  M.  C.  A.
347  Madison  Avenue
New  York,  N.  Y.
Massachusetts  State  Grange
Pittsfield
Mass.
The  Morris  Plan  Company
469  Fifth  Avenue
New  York,  N.  Y.
P.  E.  O.  Sisterhood  Educational  Fund
3231  Fulton  Street
Chicago,  111.
Student  Friendship  Fund
347  Madison  Avenue
New  York,  N.  Y.
United  Daughters  of  the  Confederacy
Americus
Georgia
        <pb n="164" />
        166

A  Study  of  Student  Loans  and

Knights  Templar—(Educational  Loan  Funds)
Grand  CommanderiES
Arkansas  North  Carolina
Colorado  Ohio
Illinois  Oregon
Indiana  Pennsylvania
Iowa  South  Dakota
Louisiana  Vermont
Massachusetts  and  Rhode  Island  Virginia
Missouri  Washington
Nebraska  Wyoming
Rotary  Clubs
Athens,  Pa.  Monroe,  Louisiana
Atlanta,  Georgia  Rome,  New  York
Battle  Creek,  Michigan  Redlands,  California
Beiton,  Texas  St.  Petersburg,  Florida
Boston,  Mass.  San  Antonio,  Texas
Casper,  Wyoming  Temple,  Texas
Dallas,  Texas  Tucson,  Arizona
McKinney,  Texas  York,  Pa.
Missoula,  Montana
Individuals
Amick,  T.  C  Bus.  Manager,  Elon  College.
Armand,  Miss  B  Bursar,  Wesleyan  College.
Arnett,  T  Bus.  Manager,  University  of  Chicago.
Baker,  H.  C  Asst.  Pur.  Agent,  University  of  Missouri.
Ball,  R.  N  Treasurer,  University  of  Rochester.
Bartlett,  W.  W  Asst.  to  the  President,  Carleton  College.
Barrett,  G.  H  Asst.  Treasurer,  Columbia  University.
Bates,  W.  H  Secretary,  State  University  of  Iowa.
Blackwell,  E.  E-,  Jr  Adm.  &amp;amp;  Asst..  to  the  President,  Principia  Junior  College.
Bostwick,  C.  D  Comptroller,  Cornell  University.
Bowen,  A.  F  Treasurer,  North  Carolina  State  College.
Bradshaw,  F.  F  Dean,  University  of  North  Carolina.
Brewer,  T.  W  Treasurer,  Wake  Forest  College.
Brockman,  E.  W  Bus.  Manager,  Furman  University.
Brooks,  E.  C  President,  North  Carolina  State  College.
Brown,  E.  E  Bus.  Manager,  University  of  Missouri.
Browne,  A.  S  Bus.  Manager,  North  Carolina  State  College.
Brownlee,  R.  C  Bus.  Manager,  Erskine  College.
Buckley,  P  Asst.  Secretary,  University  of  Michigan.
Burlingame,  E.  A  Comptroller,  Brown  University.
Carlson,  T.  C  Bus.  Manager,  University  of  Arkansas.
Cain,  J.  H  Secretary  to  the  Administration,  Catholic  University  of
America.
Carruthers,  E.  I  Bursar,  University  of  Virginia.
Cassat,  P.  C  Comptroller,  Vassar  College.
Chaddock,  R.  E  Professor  of  Statistics,  Columbia  University.
Christensen,  J.  C  Asst.  Secretary  &amp;amp;  Pur.  Agent,  University  of  Michigan.
Cobb,  W.  H  Auditor,  State  University  of  Iowa.
Coleman,  H.  S  Bus.  Manager,  University  of  Pittsburgh.
Coughlin,  E.  M  Bursar,  Hamilton  College.
        <pb n="165" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance  167

Danielson,  C.  S  Bursar,  Columbia  University.
Davis,  J.  K  Treasurer  and  Bus.  Manager,  Wofford  College.
Derby.  Miss  M  Bursar,  Elmira  College.
Dew,  W.  B  Treasurer  &amp;amp;  Bus.  Manager,  Sweet  Briar  College.
Dewey,  H.  F  Asst.  Treasurer,  Union  College.
Doggett,  R.  L.  S  Asst.  Treasurer,  University  of  Pennsylvania.
Earnshaw,  E.  B  Bursar,  Wake  Forest  College.
Edgerton,  H.  C  Treasurer,  Dartmouth  College.
Egbert,  J.  C  Director,  School  of  Business,  Columbia  University.
Ellsworth,  R.  C  Secretary,  St.  Lawrence  University.
Ely,  R.  T  Director,  Research  Institute  of  Land  Economics  and
Public  Utilities.
Ford,  H.  S  Bursar,  Mass.  Institute  of  Technology.
Frantz,  A.  C  Bursar,  Temple  University.
Füller,  E.  O  Fiscal  Agent,  University  of  Wyoming.
Haig,  R.  E  Professor  of  Business  Administration,  School  of  Business,
Columbia  University.
Harmon,  W.  E  President,  Harmon  Foundation,  New  York  City.
Harwick,  H.  J  «Manager,  Mayo  Foundation,  Rochester,  Minnesota.
Held,  A  President,  Amalgamated  Bank  of  New  York,  New  York
City.
Holmes,  C.  W  Treasurer,  George  Washington  University.
Hüll,  T  Sec.  &amp;amp;  Pur.  Agent,  University  of  Utah.
Hunter,  J.  R  Trustee,  Wake  Forest  College.
Hurst,  S.  L  Comptroller,  Bryn  Mawr  College.
Hyde,  G.  P  Treasurer,  Smith  College.
Ingalls,  H.  B  Bursar,  University  of  Illinois.
Jackson,  F.  L  Treasurer,  Davidson  College.
Johnson,  A.  S  Comptroller,  University  of  Wisconsin.
Johnson,  F.  B  Bursar,  Yale  University.
Jordan,  J.  R  Accountant,  University  of  Missouri.
Kayser,  W.  H  Bus.  Manager,  Wellesley  College.
Kehoe,  F.  W  Asst.  Comptroller,  University  of  Vermont.
Kellum,  J.  G  Treasurer,  Florida  State  College  for  Women.
Kidder,  H.  W  Treasurer,  Amherst  College.
Kimball,  L.  E  Comptroller,  New  York  University.
Kinsey,  W.  A  Asst.  Purchase  &amp;amp;  Stores,  University  of  Missouri..
Klouz,  K  Chief  Clerk,  University  of  Kansas.
Kuntz,  C.  A  Comptroller,  Ohio  State  University.
Lambdin,  A.  B  Bus.  Manager,  Connecticut  College  for  Women.
Lane,  L.  W.,  Jr...  Treasurer,  College  of  William  &amp;amp;  Mary.
Lersner,  V.  A  Vice-President,  Bowery  Savings  Bank  of  New  York  City.
Lester,  O.  C  Asst.  Vice-President,  Bowery  Savings  Bank  of  New
York  City..
Lindsay,  S.  M.  Professor  of  Social  Legislation,  Columbia  University.
Lobb,  A.  J  Comptroller,  University  of  Minnesota.
Long,  Miss  E  Asst.  Bus.  Adm.,  University  of  Delaware.
Lowes,  J.  W  Bus.  Manager,  Radcliffe  College.
McCaffrey,  M.  E  Sec.  Board  of  Regents,  University  of  Wisconsin.
McCrea,  R.  C  Hepburn  Professor  of  Economics,  School  of  Business,
Columbia  University.
McKenney,  M.  F  Financial  Secretary,  University  of  Maryland.
Mather,  W.  J  Asst.  Cashier,  University  of  Chicago.
Mew,  G.  H  Treasurer,  Emory  University.
Miller,  W.  O  Comptroller,  University  of  Pennsylvania.
Murtoff,  W.  G  Treasurer,  Pennsylvania  State  College.
Orbin,  F  Bus.  Manager,  Carnegie  Institute  of  Technology.
        <pb n="166" />
        168

A  Study  of  Student  L,oans  and

Pearce,  T.  J  Auditor,  Brenau  College.
Phillips,  J.  D  Bus.  Manager,  University  of  Wisconsin.
Plimpton,  N.  C  Auditor,  University  of  Chicago.
Pittenger,  N.  O  Comptroller,  Swarthmore  College.
Poteat,  W.  L  President,  Wake  Forest  College.
Rogalsky,  G.  F  Treasurer,  Cornell  University.
Rogessan,  F.  B  Auditor,  University  of  North  Carolina.
Rupp,  G.  S  Auditor,  University  of  Pittsburgh.
Saxon,  R.  B  Asst.  Pur.  Agent,  University  of  Nebraska.
Seager,  H.  H  Professor  of  Political  Economy,  Columbia  University.
Schneeweiss,  H.  P  Treasurer,  Rutgers  College.
Shaw,  L.  E  Veitch,  Shaw  &amp;amp;  Remsen,  New  York  City.
Sheers,  G.  F  Auditor,  Carnegie  Institute  of  Technology.
Sieg,  P  Treasurer  &amp;amp;  Bus.  Manager,  Renoir-Rhyne  College.
Skinner,  L,.  T  Adm.  &amp;amp;  Asst.  to  Pres.,  South  Dakota  State  Coli,  of  Agri.
&amp;amp;  Mech.  Arts.
Smith,  F.  E  Sec.  Board  of  Trustees,  University  of  Wyoming.
Smith,  R.  H  Comptroller,  Pennsylvania  State  College.
Smith,  S.  W  Secretary,  University  of  Michigan.
Snow,  M.  E  Accountant,  Connecticut  College  for  Women.
Spencer,  A.  E  Treasurer,  Presbyterian  College  of  South  Carolina.
Sproul,  R.  C  Vice-President,  University  of  California.
Stauffer,  G.  Ö  Accountant,  Goucher  College.
Steeb,  C.  E  Bus.  Manager,  Ohio  State  University.
Stockder,  A.  H  Asst.  Professor  of  Business  Administration,  School  of
Business,  Columbia  University.
Tabb,  B.  W  Vice-President  &amp;amp;  Treasurer,  University  of  Richmond.
Thwing,  C.  F  President  Emeritus,  Western  Reserve  University.
Turby,  F.  L  Auditor,  Drake  University.
Wagenseller,  W.  R  Comptroller,  Drexel  Institute.
White,  L.  F  Deputy  Fin.  Sec.,  University  of  Nebraska.
Wilkinson,  A.  G  Bus.  Adm.,  University  of  Delaware.
Wilson,  S.  S  Treasurer,  Western  Reserve  University.
Willis,  H.  Parker  Professor  of  Banking,  Columbia  University;  Editor,  New
York  Journal  of  Commerce.
Winfree,  R  Treasurer,  Randolph-Macon  Women’s  College.
Wintringer,  G.  C  Controller,  Princeton  University.
Youngs,  F.  S  Treasurer,  University  of  Maine.

SECONDARY  SOURCES

Books
Clark,  T.  A  Discipline  and  the  Derelict.  Macmillan  Co.,  New  York,
1922.
Culbertson,  W.  S  International  Economic  Policies.  D.  Appleton  and  Co.,
New  York  &amp;amp;  London,  1925.
Monroe,  Paul  History  of  Education.  Macmillan  Co.,  New  York,  1908.
Thwing,  C.  F  College  Administration.  The  Century  Co.,  New  York,
1900.
Westerfield,  R.  B  Banking  Principles  and  Practice,  Vol.  I.  The  Ronald
Press  Company,  New  York,  1921.
        <pb n="167" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Einance

169

Miscellaneous
Arps,  G.  F  State  Supported  Universities  and  Public  Education,  School
and  Society,  19:503-10,  Feb.  16,  1924.
Butler,  N  What  a  Man  Gains  in  Going  to  College,  Saturday  Evening
Post,  193:35-6,  Feb.  5,  1921.
Brady,  Mary  B  How  Students  Can  Borrow  Money  with  Character  as
security,  Independent,  112:6,  Jan.  5,  1924.
Ellis,  A.  C  The  Money  Value  of  Education,  U.  S.  Bureau  of  Education, ­
  Bulletin  No.  22,  1917.
Gatchell,  Earle  Bank  for  Students,  Survey,  47:949-50,  March  18,  1922.
Graves,  F.  R  Evolution  of  our  Universities,  School  and  Society,  8:691-702,
  Dec.  14,  1918.
Harmon,  W.  E  Business  versus  Philanthropy,  Hormon  Foundation  Bulletin, ­
  1:4,  Sept.  1925.
Harmon,  W.  E  Students  who  Pay  Back,  Survey,  52:  581-2,  Sept.  1,  1924.
Hawkes,  H.  E  Annual  Report  of  the  Dean  of  Columbia  College,  1925.
Johnson,  F.  B  Scholars  and  Scholarships,  Yale  Alumni  Weekly,  34:432-3,
Dec.  26,  1924.
Lester,  O.  C  How  to  Make  School  Savings  Banking  Permanent,  News
Bulletin  of  the  Savings  Bank  Association,  State  of  New
York,  6  :H  36,  Sept.  18,  1925.
Mitchell,  W.  C  Quantitative  Analysis  in  Economic  Theory,  American
Economic  Review,  15:1-12,  March,  1925.
Murlin,  L.  H  Problems  in  the  Use  of  College  Endowments,  School  and
Society,  16:246-50,  Aug.  16,  1922.
Sears,  J.  B  Philanthropy  in  American  Higher  Education,  U.  S.  Bureau
of  Education,  Bulletin  No.  26,  1922.
Sears,  J.  B  Our  Theory  of  Free  Higher  Education,  Educational  Review, ­
  65:27-34,  Jan.  1923.
Seligman,  E.  R.  A  The  Financing  of  Education,  Educational  Administration
and  Supervision,  8:449-56,  Nov.  1922.
Sills,  K.  C.  M  On  Going  to  College,  Companion  for  all  the  Family,  May
29,  1924.
Snavely,  G.  E  College  and  University  Finance,  School  and  Society,
17:670-2,  June  16,  1923.
Snedden,  D  Capital  Needs  for  Education  in  the  U.  S.,  Annals  of  the
American  Academy  of  Political  Science,  87:71-82,  Jan.
1920.
Strayer,  G.  D  Financing  Education  on  a  Scientific  Basis,  School  and
Society,  21:243-47,  Feb.  28,  1925.
Thurber,  C.  H  Fiscal  Support  of  State  Universities  and  .State  Colleges,
U.  S.  Bureau  of  Education,  Bulletin  No.  28,  1924.
Thwing,  C.  F....  Support  of  Higher  Education,  School  and  Society.
13:356-7,  March  19,  1921.
Thwing,  C.  F  Cost  of  Higher  Education,  Educational  Review,  60:173-6
Sept.  1920.
Thwing,  C.  F  Lending  Money  to  College  Students,  Nation,  107-262-3
Sept.  7,  1918.
        <pb n="168" />
        170

A  Study  of  Student  Loans

Thwing,  C.  F  Pecuniary  Aid  for  Poor  and  Able  Students,  Forum,
27:179-89,  April,  1899.
Updegraff,  H  Internal  Administration  of  the  College,  School  and  Society,
18:631-41,  Dec.  1,  1923.
Venable,  F.  P  Loan  Funds  and  Other  Plelps  for  Students,  with  Information ­

  as  far  as  possible  from  the  South.  National
Association  of  State  Universities,  Transactions  and  Proceedings,
  1905.

Editorials

Cash  Value  of  a  College  Education.  Literary  Digest,  83:74,  Nov.  1,  1924.
College  Education  Every  One’s  Right.  New  York  Evening  Post,  Sept.  29,  1922.
College  Men  who  Need  Help.  Literary  Digest,  83:33-4,  Nov.  15,  1924.
College  Men  who  Need  Help.  Yale  Alumni  Weekly,  34:376-7,  Dec.  12,  1924.
College  Scholarship  Plans  of  Scottish  Rite  Masons.  School  and  Society,  20:403,
Sept.  27,  1924.
Cost  of  Higher  Education.  Educational  Review,  60:173-6,  Sept.  1920.
Educational  Values.  Dial,  55:10,  July  1,  1913.
Ellen  H.  Richards  Fund.  Journal  of  Hoine  Economics,  16:711-12,  Dec.  1924.
Give  a  Thought  to  the  Young  Man  who  Works  his  Way  through  College.
Forhes,  Sept.  15,  1924.
Given  Away,  the  Duke  and  Eastman  Millions.  Literary  Digest,  83:36-44,  Dec.
ZI,  1924.
Knights  Templar  Educational  Roan  Fund.  School  and  Society,  20:276,  Aug.
30,  1924.
Loan  Plan  for  Aiding  Christian  Students.  School  Life,  10:57,  Nov.  1924.
Millions  for  Higher  Education.  Outlook,  138:622-4,  Dec  17,  1924.
Our  Universities—For  Whom?  New  York  World,  Oct.  4,  1925.
Poor  Men  at  the  Universities.  School  and  Society,  18:742-4,  Dec.  22,  1923.
Report  of  a  Survey  of  State  Institutions  in  Kansas.  U.  S.  Bureau  of  Education,
Bulletin  No.  20,  1923.
Suggestions  for  an  Ambitious  University.  School  and  Society,  5  :440-l,  April  14,
1917.
Two  New  International  Fellowship  Foundations—Guggenheim  Memorial  Foundation ­
  and  Commonwealth  Fund  Foundation.  School  and  Society,  21:262-4,
Feb.  28,  1925.
Use  of  Character  as  Collateral.  Educational  Review,  67:212-3,  April  1924.
Views  pro  and  against  Question  of  Need  of  College  Men.  Commercial  and
Financial  Chronicle,  115  :  2236,  Nov.  18,  1922.
Working  through  Yale.  Alaska  Daily  Empire,  April  18,  1924.
        <pb n="169" />
        THE  EVEN1NG  POST  JOB  PR1NT1NG  OFFICE.  INC.
154  FULTON  STREET
NEW  YORK.  N.Y.
        <pb n="170" />
        Their  Relation  to  Higher  Educational  Finance

113

Image  Engineering  Scan  Reference  Chart  TE263  Serial  Na

"*us  year  shows  that  there  is  no  uniformity  in  the  administration  of
i  t  loans  in  the  various  Colleges  and  universities.
:  l  working  out  a  policy  for  the  administration  of  Student  loans,  it  is
;  Die  to  incorporate  all  that  is  best  from  the  various  methods  in  use.
*i  I
Oethods  of  Administration
sv  oan  funds  are  administered  under  two  methods.  The  restricted
i:  d,  which  is  loaning  only  the  income  from  the  fund,  and  the  revolving
j:  i,  which  is  loaning  both  income  and  principal.  There  are  many  more
administered  under  the  restricted  method  than  there  are  under  the
v  ing  method,  notwithstanding  the  fact  that  of  the  93  institutions
answered  an  inquiry  sent  out  by  the  Student  Loan  Information
v  x,  69  replied  that  they  favored  the  revolving  fund.
*;  he  actual  conditions  reported  show:
1:  ARACTER  AND  AMOUNT  OF  FUNDS  AVAILABLE  1924-1925
Revolving  $187,253  10  funds
Restricted  704,000  12  “

Emergency  5,000  2  “
Not  specified  3,205,786  288  “

:  a  large  part,  the  “not  specified”  funds  ($3,205,786),  is  “restricted”,
j :  s  safe  to  suppose,  the  proportion  of  available  funds  actually  to  be
v  ed  as  “restricted”  is  overwhelming.  Much  of  this  money  was  left
V  restricted  form  and  must  continue  to  be  thus  administered.  How-;;
  t  is  safe  to  assume  that  there  are  many  of  these  funds  that  could  be
£ ;  on  a  revolving  basis.  The  revolving  fund  has  the  more  weighty
l:  ents  in  its  favor  besides  having  the  favorable  sentiment  of  a  large
£:  jty  of  officials.
_he  greater  efficiency  of  the  revolving  fund  is  indisputable.  For
le,  a  fund  of  $100,000  at  5%  yields  $5,000  annually  and  would  be
ä i:  {nt  to  make  a  loan  of  $250  to  20  students.  Over  a  period  of  fifteen
;  it  would  be  able  to  make  300  such  loans.  On  the  other  hand,
äi  00  if  turned  into  a  revolving  fund,  allowing  $20,000  of  the  principal
i:  oaned  annually  for  the  first  five  years,  and  revolved  for  an  additional
2[_ars,  would  be  sufficient  to  make  1,475  such  loans  which  means  that
ld  serve  practically  five  times  as  many  students.
i:  ome  officials  and  donors  fear  that  if  the  principal  as  well  as  the
ä :i;  is  loaned,  the  fund  will  eventually  disappear.  This  fear  is  well
' :  ;d  only  if  it  is  admitted  that  funds  cannot  be  efficiently  administered.
i:  who  administer  Student  loans  can  well  afford  to  borrow  some  of  the
Tjles  from  the  business  world  that  make  loaning  in  small  sums  sucj.
  1  Colleges  and  universities  that  have  tried  these  principles  of  busi-8
        <pb n="171" />
        ﻿
        <pb n="172" />
        ﻿
        <pb n="173" />
        ﻿
        <pb n="174" />
        ﻿
      </div>
    </body>
  </text>
</TEI>
